Aboyade-Cole, Adebisi B. “Alternative Strategies for Commercializing New Technology or Products: Building a New Plant of Acquiring an Existing One?”

Oct. 18, 2006, 87pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis describes multiple strategies for bringing new technology to market. It addresses the questions: Is it better to build a new manufacturing plant from scratch or to acquire an existing one? These questions were researched because of the high failure rate reported for new technology start-up firms. The dismal performance of new technological start-ups is alarming. This moves one to wonder if all these technological ideas are merely wasted for lack of sound implementation strategies. One school of thought seems to blame the poor performance on a poor strategy of building a new plant where most of the capital is used up without good results. Another school of thought argues that a modification of strategy to invest in a used plant for the implementation of a technology better serves the vision by conserving the capital for other incidentals. The timeframe to market of any product or service is critical; hence, the vehicle driving the idea to market by way of the product must be effective. The fastest commercialization strategy cannot accommodate delays in zoning, regulatory bureaucracy, supply-chain problems, process malfunction, staffing problems or inadequate funding because infrastructure costs can be higher than expected. These are some of the overriding factors that deny the entrepreneur precious time, and ultimately, business opportunity. Conversely, all the infra-structural cost and the system operational costs are better contained under a bulk expense, which includes the price of purchasing an existing and operating plant that meets the needs of the project at hand. It is imperative, however, that the facility’s integrity is not compromised for effectiveness, meaning that a less expensive facility must not be purchased with the hope of making it fit the job at hand. The risk is drastically lower when an operational system is acquired. In this situation, there should not be any surprises, assuming that proper research is done up-front before acquiring the plant. The total cost is known up front, including any refurbishment that may be necessary. Acquisition of an existing plant looks like a better strategy to make the vision successful. A better approach to such a purchase may be the acquisition of an experienced crew along with the package in order to prevent any future troubleshooting problems. The quickest way to determine the feasibility of the start-up is to get as close an estimate as possible of the operation, from the purchase of the facility to getting the product on the market.

Aho, Tiejo “Competitive Advantage Through Virtual Integration”

Oct. 16, 1999, 107pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Digital technology is reducing the transaction costs of conducting business in the open market. This is due to the rapid development of computing power and the increasing usage of the Internet. Companies are finding that the Internet is providing consumers with more price transparency and easier value comparison. The Internet provides a direct link between the producer of a service or a product and its consumer. Companies that are not adding sufficient value are being cut out. Growing competition is forcing companies to focus on their core competencies and outsource that which is not, to companies that do the same. Companies can compete by operating on scale, yet the real competitive advantage comes from joining forces to produce something that is the best of everything. Virtual integration occurs when these individual companies join resources through digital exchange of information to work on something they could not separately produce in a competitive manner. Virtual Integration lets companies combine always the right amount of the best resources available. By using digital information the companies can reduce the transaction costs of traditional outsourcing. These companies are required to share information openly in an electronic format that is understood by all participants. Information can be shared over the Internet by using networking applications such as a Virtual Private Network. ABB is a $30-billion engineering and technology company that is streamlining its internal processes to reduce in-house transaction costs. ABB uses a proprietary network backbone to connect the information flow of its business units. Currently business collaborate on joint projects but share very little information otherwise. Latest efforts include information technology and network architecture development to facilitate information reuse. ABB is setting electronic commerce as one of its next strategic priorities. ABB needs to use digital information flow to consolidate many of its internal activities to centers of excellence. The business unit level companies need to share as much information as they can with suppliers and customers.

Al-Sayed, Adel A. “Corporate Tax Structure”

Nov. 1988, 72pp
Archival copy only

Albinger, Don and Bruce Church “Incorporating an Incremental Innovation Approach into Product Development”

May 24, 1999, 141pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is not a secret the world economy is offering ever increasing options to customers and driving manufactures to find new and better ways to compete. One product development philosophy that offers time competitive, lower risk and measured market response is Incremental Innovation. This method of product development uses time as an ally and delivers product features and enhancements in smaller, pre-determined increments. This philosophy helps control costs and risk, as it demands that innovations be delivered within shorter time frames, thus limiting the extent and risks of big product developments. It also forces the product development mechanics such as product market and feature definitions to be more succinct and part of an overall roadmap system that details the evolution of the market and product. Incremental Innovation allows the organization to become more customer-centric as all development groups must adopt a “learn by doing” philosophy to be successful. Improving sales and profitability through Incremental Innovation means being very intent and time competitive with the fundamentals of product development. Product development programs that incorporate Incremental Innovation as a philosophy need to execute and drive these strategies and methodologies into the organization to accomplish the aggressive goals this philosophy usually present. With this, it must be recognized that the philosophy, methods and procedures used in this thesis to describe an incremental product development approach are also sound methods for effective product development in general. The difference is that Incremental Innovation demands more attention and focus be spent on good product development methods. An Incremental Innovation product development strategy will not survive if sound product development practices are not for quicker and more focused developments.

Alhamdan, Haitham S. “How Online Purchase Decisions Are Made: Analyzing the Consumer Decision-Making Process in an Online Purchasing Environment”

May 10, 2005, 151pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: There have been a number of research studies with the aim of understanding how consumers make purchase decisions. The major assumption in these studies is that decision makers analyze product offerings from different retailers and make a tradeoff decision among all offers to select the offer that delivers the greatest utility. With the advent of Internet shopping, consumers are faced with an overwhelming amount of product offerings, and consequently have a greater degree of freedom to choose among many different alternatives. Internet shopping carries a number of different characteristics than traditional shopping methods. In an online shopping environment, there are many variables that the decision maker evaluated which appear to be different from that of “classical” methods of shopping. These variables enter into the decision maker’s utility functions and are evaluated on the basis of their importance to him or her. Unfortunately, the researcher does not have immediate access to those variables and cannot evaluate each one in isolation of the others. Hence, a bundle of these variables should be analyzed for different decision makers to assess the importance of each attribute and understand the implication of varying each attribute’s level on the final decision of the consumer. There have been numerous research studies that looked into how consumers make purchase decisions. However, only a few have focused on analyzing the decision process of consumers and what attributes they usually consider and/or evaluate when shopping on the World Wide Web. This study analyzes this process and develops an empirical choice model for individual consumers in a particular market segment buying a particular product. This study’s main contribution to the marketing literature is its consideration of behavioral attributes that show strong influence on the online buying behavior of consumers, such as attitudes, perceptions, memory, and learning. In order to keep the variables in the model at a manageable level, the author considers the perception variable as an influential behavioral attribute in the consumer’s choice of online retailers. Specifically, the author tests the significance of the consumer’s perception of web retailer trustworthiness on the choice of retailer. Historically, there has been a divide among the scientific community on the significance of behavioral attributes in influencing human decisions. In the economics and statistics literature, such soft attributes have not been modeled explicitly into consumer choice models with the assumption that consumers behave rationally. Consequently, the consumer was always assumed to choose an alternative that yields him or her maximum utility given the attributes of the alternatives and attributes that are explicit to him or her, such as income. In addition, the evidence against the theory of rational behavior has been accumulating, leading researchers in the field to search for alternatives. Recently, however, there have been a few papers that looked into explicitly modeling softer attributes such as attitudes, perceptions, memory, and satisfaction into choice models. Evidently the results were improved models-fit, and a richer and a more behaviorally-realistic representation of the choice made by human decision makers. The theory of rational behavior makes the assumption that humans make decisions based on the attainable level of utility from making a decision. This implies that the decision making process follows a systematic, step-by-step process where the decision is planned and rational. The other theory is based on the psychology and cognitive science view of human behavior, in that human behavior is far from rational. It is learned, dynamic, and evolving, and therefore, unpredictable. This paper presents an overview of both theories. It portrays how each theory pertains to the online marketing problem. In addition, the paper presents a mathematical model for consumers’ choice of web retailers. Attributes relating to the web retailer as well as the individual consumer are considered in building the model. Accordingly the author combines softer attributes of the decision maker (consumer) with other tangible attributes as they relate to the web retailer. A number of estimation techniques were used in the estimation of the proposed models, namely Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE), Maximum Simulated Likelihood Estimation (MSLE), and Bayesian estimation. Results from the estimation are presented, along with other measures of statistical significance. The results of the estimation confirm that softer attributes do indeed influence the choice of web retailer, particularly the consumers’ perception of web retailer trustworthiness. Furthermore, models that incorporate softer attributes do I fact produce a better fit, as judged by goodness-of-fit statistics. Next, the paper presents a strategy for online marketing based on model outcomes. Strategies for segmenting, targeting, and positioning to the online consumer are presented in the strategy sections of the paper. Recommendations for applying the presented strategies are also discussed. The paper finally concludes by giving recommendations on the aspects discussed, particularly those pertaining to online marketing strategy and research. Moreover, a recommendation for integrating marketing information systems and intelligence is given in the recommendations section.

Ali, Ahmad M. “Some Techniques of Linear Applications”

May 1972, 60pp
Archival copy only

Almarshood, Waleed R. “Engineering Management in Kuwait”

Oct. 1987, 131pp
Archival copy only

Alwazir, Jihad Khalil. “A Structure for Small Scale Industry Development in the Occupied Palestinian Territories”

Dec. 1990, 134pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This study presents a program for developing small scale industries in the occupied Palestinian territories. The role of small scale industry in the development process is examined. Small scale industries are found to be efficient, competitive, and provide for more productive employment than large industries. Three case studies of small scale industry programs are presented. These included India, a developing country which had the oldest and largest small scale industry development program. Singapore, a Newly Developed Country (NDC) which recently realized the role of SSI in maintaining growth and developed a dedicated Light Industry Services (LIS) and a $100 million venture capital fund to help small industry. And Japan, as an example of an industrialized country where a large network of small scale industries work as subcontractors to major Japanese corporations. The lessons learned from the experiences of these countries is used to develop a Small Scale Industry Development Organization (SSIDO) in the Occupied Palestinian territories. This organization includes a training institute and a network of small industry development centers. These centers provide managerial, financial, and technical training and support to local entrepreneurs. A realistic analysis of Possible shortcomings and implementation problems is made and proper conclusions are drawn.

Anderson, Hubert J “The Engineer as a Represented Employee”

Feb. 1974, 85pp
Archival copy only

Arid, Adnan A. “A Study of the Profit-Sharing of the Interest-Free Islamic Banking System”

Spring 1989, 69pp
Archival copy only

Armstrong, Bill. “A Study of the Feasibility of a Knowledge Management Program for a Small Technical Sales Company”

Oct. 2000, 95pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: In the opinion of many experts, the tool of “Knowledge Management” can be applied to increase the value of knowledge as one of these intangible assets. These experts have studied and documented the efforts and successes of large multi-national corporations that have implemented knowledge management programs. However, little if anything has been written about how knowledge management would benefit small companies. At the same time that technology and the “new economy” are increasing the value of knowledge, they are serving to decrease the value of many services offered by intermediary companies such as manufacturers, representatives and distributors. The author of this paper serves as owner and managing partner of such a firm, Fluid Handling Inc. In this paper, he shows that good reasons exist for considering knowledge management for small technical sales companies. The project is presented in three phases. In the first phase, the author presents a summary of his research and presents current thinking from the experts on the topic of knowledge management. This paper emphasizes the practical side of knowledge management including considerations for planning, designing, and implementing a knowledge management program. Also addressed in this phase is a discussion of technology to support knowledge management efforts. In the second phase, the author develops the design of a pilot knowledge management program for his company, covering 1) product knowledge and 2) human resources knowledge. Chief considerations are 1) low cost, 2) avoiding hiring new employees, and 3) avoiding new information technology and infrastructure. At the end of this phase, the author reaches the conclusion that it is possible to meet the criteria of the experts with a basic knowledge management program that suits the needs of a small technical sales organization. In the third phase, the author uses off-the-shelf intranet design tools to create a company intranet to support the plan developed in the second phase.

Assa, Menachem. “A Case Study of Rational Strategic Planning”

Feb. 1974, 51pp
Archival copy only

Atkinson, Louis D. “Research and Development Product and Marketing Planning”

May 1973, 48pp
Archival copy only

Bahlman, Julia Smith “Scientific and Technical Information Usage in a Consumer Products Company”

May 1994, 149pp, bibliography, appendices, tabels, graphs
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this work is to explore the scientific and technical information flow within a central research and engineering organization of a consumer products company to gain an understanding of existing usage requirements. In understanding the existing scientific and technical information exchange, the information needs of the user and requirements for future technology transfer can be identified. Review of the existing literature can be summarized in three periods – “mechanism of technical information of transfer”, “mechanization and automation of technical information usage” and the application of technical information systems. The behavioral differences in engineers and scientists were the focus of the initial period which studied the mechanism of information transfer. During the second period, concentration was toward the organization with an emphasis on networks and gatekeepers. Most recent studies are using the fundamentals previously developed to understand particular user groups (industry, application and company specific) to design and manage information systems. This study concentrated on a specific sector of a major consumer products central research and engineering organization. A survey was administered to the population and an audit of several existing information sources within the company was performed. The study group consisted of a diverse population – job descriptions, education, experience in field, and experience with company. The audit tracked usage of the company technical library, research files and engineering files information systems. The results of the survey and audit were compared and contrasted to one another and the results of other information studies. Specific comparison of the data was made to four hypotheses previously developed in prior work by Ritti, Allen, Gertberger, Tushman and Scanlan. The results of these comparison follows: -Scientist within this organization pursue their individual ideas through formal publication of their work more frequently than engineers which is consistent with Ritti’s work. Conversely, the population surveyed did not support Allen’s hypothesis that scientists tend to aspire to more technical education than engineers. -Engineers and researchers similarly prioritize the following factors in order of importance when selecting an information source – technical quality, accessibility, ease of use and experience; however, individual source preference and usage frequency varied for each group. Allen and Gerstberger’s “law of least effort” applied to both groups who selected personal files as the most used and most accessible information source. Several other interesting findings resulted from this comparison. -Both engineers and researchers use informal sources of information most frequently; however, the researchers used formal sources more than engineers which follows Allen’s theory. Engineers tend to seek information sources which involve other colleagues rather than finding answers in the literature. -Unlike Tushman and Scanlan’s description of the typical information gatekeeper, the engineers and researchers within this organization tend to regard peers with more than 10 years of experience with the company and industry which possess a minimum of an undergraduate education as the information gatekeepers. Researchers also use technical leaders with an undergraduate education and peers or technical leaders with a doctorate degree. The analysis of the user habits and experience with electronic tools provided an insight for several recommendations for application of improvements to the technical information system within this company. The study also identified areas where information is unavailable such as engineering standards but is regarded as important. Exposure to marketing research and consumer product testing information will enable the organization the expedite product and process development for the global marketplace. By understanding the differences between the two organizations, improving and expanding the existing information systems and destroying the barriers for external information transfer, this organization can become one of a handful of successful consumer products companies in the world.

Ballard, Robert J. “Quality Cost Management System Growth of a Workable Dynamic System”

Spring 1980, 85pp
Archival copy only

Bannick, Gustave E. “Better Management Through Communication”

Aug. 1977, 19pp
Archival copy only

Baradic, Richard A. “Management and Behavioral Aspects of Post-Graduate Engineering Degrees”

May 1, 1975, 85pp
Archival copy only

Baranowski, Stephen W. “How to Choose the Proper Distribution Channel to Bring a Product to Market in the Industrial Environment”

1989, 125pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis compares the various distribution channels available to the industrial manufacturer to bring a product to market. The problem that was solved was to find the best method of distributing Programmable Controllers in the Connecticut Area for the Square D Company. I examined the present method of distributing this product and compared the pro’s and con’s of using a Direct Sales Force vs. Manufacturer’s Representatives vs. Distributors or Systems Integrators. The present dilemma is that the computer product described is not achieving the market share it should and various distribution methods have been unsuccessful. The methods used to solve this problem were: 1. Research the available types of distribution channels. 2. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of these channels. 3. Review where our products fit on the product life cycle curves. 4. Analyze the present method of distribution and other alternatives available. What was accomplished in this paper was finding the best method of distributing programmable controllers in Connecticut. The conclusion divides the programmable controller product line into two distinct stages in their product life cycle with appropriate marketing channels selected depending upon the value added by that channel and the market growth rate that could be expected. The recommendation for management section on pages 72 through 77 details a plan to increase the market share by utilizing more marketing channels to increase the breadth of distribution and to consider selling these new channels on a direct basis to decrease the length of our distribution channel making Square D more competitive.

Bark, Jeffrey E. “Management of the Virtual Project Team”

April 1999, 85pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The main topic for this study was an exploration of the factors related to the effective incorporation of human resources external to the company into a project team. A project team with this type of structure is called a Virtual Project Team. Primary and secondary research was undertaken in order to define the major issues which confront a virtual team. Primary research was via a survey given to both male and female individuals employed primarily in medical device companies. Demographic information was gathered from the survey respondents in the first section of the survey. The second section of the survey included questions designed to probe the experience with project teams in general. Finally, the third section of the survey was designed to uncover the general consensus as to the future of virtual teams. The survey was sent out to 75 individuals and 50 were returned completed. The raw data was compiled manually by the author and organized on a spreadsheet. The spreadsheet was used to create graphs and charts that illustrate the data. In addition to the primary research, secondary research in the form of a literature search was completed. The main concepts from the literature were identified and analyzed, with a comparison formed between the outcome of the primary research and that of the secondary research. Common themes and issues identified in both the primary and secondary research included the purpose for the virtual team, selection and structure of the virtual team, the importance of commitment on the part of the team members, the role of the Project Team Manager, and the importance of communication on the efficient functioning of the virtual team. In addition, the importance of team culture and top management involvement on the successful outcome of the project was discussed. The Project team Leader is the central individual within the project team. The demands of the position due to the virtual team structure require that the Project Team Leader be trained in handling a wide variety of issues. Because of this exposure it is important that specialized management programs are developed and incorporated with a sense of urgency. It is recommended that one or more of the following actions be initiated: 1) Perform study on the effectiveness of different means of communication, 2) Develop management techniques specific to the needs of the external team member, 3) Initiate a proposal to evaluate the effect of different cultures on project outcomes, 4) Develop methods to develop trust between team members quickly.

Barnard, David A. “Was the Acquistion by the RTE Corporation of the Delta Switchboard Company a Sound Financial Decision?”

May 1, 1975, 85pp
Archival copy only

Bartol, Christine M. “Litigation vs. Alternative Dispute Resolution: A Construction Industry Comparison”

April 29, 1991, 74pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Currently, the majority of all disputes are handled by litigation i.e. the court system. Participants in this process are discouraged by the expense, long time frame, and adversarial nature of this dispute resolution system. In addition, disputes that involve technical issues are evaluated and resolved by parties that often have little understanding of the intricacies of a technical process. People in the construction industry are generally “hands on” types of individuals, whose major goal is to complete the current project, and get on with the next one. For them, resolving a dispute quickly, inexpensively, and with the aid of other participants that are already knowledgeable about their industry, is a way to minimize the overhead expenses associated with projects. Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) is a system of providing dispute resolution by a technically knowledgeable, neutral party, in a loosely structured administrative framework. Litigation has its advantage in that it is a recognized, strictly controlled procedure, in which applicable laws and precedents can be used to resolve a dispute. Its disadvantage is that the time period from initiating action to resolving the dispute averages three to five years. Consequently, significant expenses, emotional drain, and lost opportunities are experienced by the participants. The advantage of ADR is that its informal structure allows for more latitude in the presentation of information and facts to participants that are familiar with the technicalities of the dispute situation. In addition, the lack of administrative and procedural boundaries allows for the dispute to be resolved in an average of six months, and at costs appropriate for the amount of the claim or counterclaim. The comparison of the applicability of litigation vs. ADR rests on the nature of the dispute; situations that are mainly characterized by legalistic boundaries are best handled by the court system, and situations that involve technical issues are best resolved using ADR. Since the majority of construction disputes involve the interpretation of written and (mostly) oral communication about highly interfaced technical components, dispute resolution using ADR should be the choice of most participants in a construction dispute situation. The information presented in this paper will compare the procedure for litigating a dispute vs. using ADR for resolving a dispute. In addition, the advantages and disadvantages of each method of dispute resolution will be analyzed. The conclusion, formed by input from numerous written sources, and interviews with dispute resolution participants, is that the advantages of ADR far outweigh any disadvantages, whereas the advantages of the court system are minimized by its adversarial nature, long time frame, and high overall costs.

Bayer, Wendy M. “Utilizing a Defect Detection Model for Software Development as a Decision Support Tool for Management”

Aug. 31, 2005, 82pp, appendices, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: To be a top performer in its sector, an organization needs the right kind of information, on a regular basis, to make the right decisions. Organizations use information to become more efficient and to produce better-quality products. Measurement facilitates and accelerates organizational learning and supports corporate adaptation within the marketplace. Measurement provides a structure for learning from each project, whether or not it was a good experience. Measurement also helps an organization understand the gaps between how it is performing and the performance levels demanded by the constraints. In effect, measurement information becomes a competitive resource, and an effective measurement process becomes an organizational discriminator. A well-designed measurement system collects the data that is necessary for data mining. The data that is found at the operational level of an organization. It feeds the data analysis systems, typically information systems (IS), and data mining processes that allow organizations to gain knowledge about themselves, their business environment, products, etc. It is an effective tool for decision support, and it leads to business intelligence (BI). It is business intelligence and the use of information technology that give organizations a competitive advantage, by modeling outcomes and discovering patterns in data. This thesis aims to prove that predictive models such as Kandler’s defect prediction model for software development contribute to the overall measurement process and business intelligence of an organization, an ultimately contribute to decision support and strategic planning.

Bayer, William R., Jr. “The DIRECT Model: A Tool for Evaluating Logistics Outsourcing Oppurtunities”

May 1997, 143pp, appedix, bibliography, glossary
Available for checkout
Abstract: The downsizing of nearly every company in America, has created the trend to look to outsourcing various operations in order to leverage scarce resources and improve asset utilization. Among the most prominent operations targeted for outsourcing is the logistics operation. With companies spending over $500 billion annually on logistics services, it offers one of the last frontiers for wringing costs out of today’s business. While the results are often impressive, with cost savings of up to 30 percent realized in some cases, outsourcing is not without possible pitfalls. Until now, the in-house logistics management function lacks the tools necessary to make the right decision when considering outsourcing. Over the next pages, the author will develop a decision process model designed specifically for assisting the logistics professional in determining whether outsourcing is right for his/her company. Effective outsourcing of logistics functions require a methodical approach. The DIRECT Model provides just that. With this tool, logistic managers will be able to make outsourcing decisions that will take all aspects of the company into consideration including: human resource issues, financial aspects, customer service, quality, etc. The rationale behind the DIRECT process approach essentially addresses the advantages and disadvantages to outsourcing. The information is based on data collected through the author’s in-depth research of organizations that have chosen to outsource some or all of their logistics functions. In particular, it satisfies the need for logistics professional to have an effective tool to assist them in making strategic decisions pertaining to logistics functions. It forces the potential buyer of third party services to comprehend the underlying aspects of the outsourcing decision that might have otherwise been forgotten. The result of applying the DIRECT Outsourcing Evaluation Model will significantly impact the success of outsourcing logistic functions or support the decision not to. The DIRECT outsourcing process model consists of 6 basic steps. They are defined as: Define, Identify, Research, Evaluate, Contract, and Transition. The first phase, Define, is initiated when a cross-functional team has been developed to administer the analysis. This team, led by the organization’s CFO, will be represented by various departments including, logistics, finance, manufacturing, customer service, among others. The CFO has been chosen to facilitate the effort of the outsourcing analysis mainly because he or she is not directly involved with any specific function of the logistics operation or any department dependent on it. It is easier to maintain a neutral position and help take down the barriers to change. In the Define phase, the outsourcing team is charged with gathering information, both internal and external, on the organizations goals, objectives and strategies. The outcome of this first phase will be a complete understanding of whether or not outsourcing will ‘fit’ into the organization’s culture. If the team finds it will not, corporate objectives can be realigned or the evaluation process is suspended indefinitely. However, if the team determines outsourcing will ‘fit’ into the organization, the evaluation will proceed to phase two or the Identify phase of the analysis. Here the team will identify logistics activities and their associated operating expenses. This is determined by several different cost analysis methods. One of the more common methods practiced is activity based costing (ABC). Utilizing this method and/or other analysis tools, will ultimately reveal activities or processes that may be more advantageous to the business to outsource. When the costs associated with the various functions of the logistics operation have been established, the results are benchmarked against similar organizations. By doing this, the evaluation team will not only gain an understanding of the current operational cost-effectiveness, but will also provide a cost basis for contract negotiations which take place later in the outsourcing process. The next phase, Research, takes the information gathered from the cost analysis and begins to identify the potential third party providers that offer the types of services desired. Several alternatives to collecting information on potential third party providers are discussed. Some of the more common search engines include: journals or newspapers, networking and the Internet. When the search is complete and the number of providers is manageable, an informal initial request for proposal (RFP) is sent to each of the selected service providers. The RFP is basically a request sent out by the organization soliciting more detailed information on how the provider will perform their responsibilities. The elements of the RFP include cost figures, operational and contingency planning, human resources, equipment and facilities, etc. More specifically, the providers are asked to elaborate on how the “work” that was determined in the Identify step of the DIRECT process will be completed with a neutral or positive financial impact. The next phase of the process, the Evaluation phase is initiated when the RFP’s have been returned. The outsourcing team is then charged with evaluating the submissions and narrowing down the field of potential providers once again. Selected criteria, specific to the outsourcing activity(ies), is used in the evaluation of the providers. The result of this phase is a provider which is feasibly and operationally and culturally compatible with the buyers organization. At this point in the author’s model, both parties in the relationship, begin the contract negotiations. The Contract phase of the process solidifies the alliance between the two entities. Issues such as responsibilities, compensation, termination, service features and above all, performance measurements, are put into context. Upon the signing of the agreements, the sixth and final phase, Transition, begins. It is difficult to introduce two corporate cultures in a third party logistics arrangement and expect them to perform efficiently on the first day, but that is when it is most critical. For a number of reasons, it is worth spending some time and effort to ensure the first day is as perfect as possible. Therefore, the author recommends development of a detailed implementation plan in order to smooth out the change process. As part of the implementation plan, performance measurements are put into place in this phase to ensure a profitable relationship in the future. The objective of this paper is to develop a process tool which will assist logistics professionals in evaluating outsourcing opportunities. To make the abstract concrete, the author integrates a “real world” case study as each phase of the model is defined. Sorrento Cheese Company, Inc. is the organization used to illustrate how this model will help develop a world class outsourcing relationship or justify why outsourcing does not fit a business. Sorrento’s success represents the need to have such a tool available. The DIRECT Model for evaluating outsourcing opportunities model fulfills that need.

Beall, Ware T., Jr. “Planning for Survival and Growth of a Small Business”

May 1983, 94pp
Available for checkout

Beasley, Elizabeth M. “Reducing the Costs of Stress in Organizations”

March 2008, 90pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Stress in the workplace is one of the most negative forces in organizations today. Stress is not healthy when it accumulates rapidly without release daily, weekly, and yearly. When stress accumulates rapidly without release or necessary periods of relaxation, stress can propel employees to engage in unhealthy behaviors and anger. As it accumulates, stress affects the human body psychologically, physically, causing an infinite number of health problems, including stroke, heart disease, heart attacks, and a lowered immune system. Change in organizations is one of the constants in the business world. Organizations continue to alter structures and procedures, and become leaner. Companies are downsizing more rapidly than in years past, as the need to thrive and survive are making them more flexible, global, and technological. Products need to be designed ahead of the competition, integrate customer needs, be delivered as soon as needed, and in perfect condition. Rising costs of materials and energy are a headache to organizations making them cut costs any way they can in order to remain profitable. Changes in organizations threaten employees, increasing stress-related illnesses, and worsening mental health. Mergers and acquisitions are becoming commonplace in organizations, causing stress not only in the employees laid off, but also for those left in the aftermath, who must increase their workloads even more. Employees left after a layoff experience feelings of insecurity, as they do not know if they are next. They feel disillusioned, as they have worked hard for the company, possibly for many years. They feel alienated from the values of the company, and confused about their future. All of this creates lowered morale, reduced creativity, lowered productivity, stress, and health problems. All of the causes and effects of stress affect the organization in terms of costs. These costs continue to rise at increasing rates each year throughout the last several decades. In organizations, there is a lack of understanding why changes need to be made to lower stress levels. There is an absence of a shared vision among the different levels within the organization, inadequate leadership skills, a lack of involvement in change management, and increasing workloads coupled with insufficient training methodologies. Although it seems to be an insurmountable task for upper management, the reduction of stress, and reduction of costs due to stress, can be analyzed, a plan formulated, and stress reduction implemented from small changes to large integrations. Once started, stress reduction needs to be an ongoing focus in order not to backslide, or to make matters worse.

Beckwith, Scott Duane. “Primrose Construction: A Hypothetical Development”

Sept. 1992, 126pp, summary, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: The six block section in Milwaukee’s central city would be completely redeveloped to attract middle and upper income families. The primary target market will be minority families that could afford housing in the suburbs but chose to live in the city because they feel more excepted there. The secondary market will be young married couples with no children. They will be individuals that work downtown and enjoy all the activities the city has to offer. Both groups will demand a safe and secure environment and will be willing to pay for it. They will also appreciate the close proximity to the downtown area and the freeway. Finally, they will enjoy all the amenities that a new custom built has to offer. House and lot will sell for approximately $150,000 plus association fees incurred for lawn care, snow removal, recreational areas and security. The target market will have a combined family income in the range between $60,000 to $90,000 per year. The land will be acquired through the city’s redevelopment authority’s power of eminent domain. The anticipated cost for acquisition, relocation and demolition is estimated to be $3.4 million dollars. Financing will be obtained from the city’s sale of a bond. The bond is then repaid through Tax Incremental Financing (TIF). TIF is an agreement between the tax authority’s to only collect the current tax revenue in a given area for a specified term. The difference between the new revenue and current one is deducted to pay off the bond. Once the land is cleared it will be given to the developer. Initial improvements such as speculation built homes and site work will be the responsibility of the developer. An initial investment of $100,000 will be used to cover incidental start up costs. $1,063,764 will be borrowed for a period of three years to make improvements which will be held as collateral to the loan. $709,176 will be used to cover the cost of constructing eight speculation built homes. Seven of these units will serve as model homes until they are sold. The eighth unit, a value of $150,000, will be used as the main office and will be turned over to the association as a storage and recreation facility upon completion of the project. The balance of $225,000 will be expended on site improvements which include the security system, green space and recreational areas. The project should take about three and one half years to complete. The first nine to twelve months will be devoted to clearing the land. In the following period, twenty five homes are anticipated to be built and sold each year. The feasibility study projects profits to be about $150,905 million dollars with an Internal Rate of Return of 20.13%. One final note, in the spirit of good community relations, Primrose Development will establish a Discretionary Responsibility account. $144,000 will be deducted from the project and placed in an annuity for the betterment and economic relief of the residents that will be displaced as a result of the project.

Bedwell, Michael F. “International Marketing: A Method for Global Market Entry”

May 1993, 105pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Expansion of a current business to service global market needs is an objective for many firms. Entry by an American business is a serious and risky undertaking. A modern company must have a significant presence in the three major market areas, North America, Europe and Asia if it wishes to remain globally competitive. Analyzing the offshore market and developing a plan for its execution can increase a company’s possibility for international success. This essay discusses an approach to assessing an global market opportunity for electronic components and subsequent entry into a German market that plays a significant role of a unified Europe. A key part of this approach includes investigation and analysis of the external environment with application of this data to strategy elements aimed at increasing the opportunity for success. Replication of the process is prescribed for firms wishing to enter additional international markets.

Behn, John E. “Production Management Applications in Telephone Trunk Provisioning”

May 1976, 49pp
Archival copy only

Beltsos, Demetrios J. “Mathematical Approach to Pricing Policy Formulation”

1972, 44pp
Archival copy only

Berger, Thomas “Comparing Valuation Methods in the Acquisition Process”

Dec. 1998, 79pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: With greater pressure and demands coming for earnings growth, acquisitions and mergers have become a popular technique used by executives to improve a company’s profitability. Their popularity, however, has varied throughout the years. Looking back from the late 1960’s to the present, yearly acquisitions and mergers have ranged from a low of 1,877 in 1991 to a high of 7,800 in 1997. In 1969, there were over 6,000 acquisitions and mergers, so this strategy is nothing new. There are four general categories as to why a company may decide to acquire or merge with another business. The first, is to implement a growth strategy. Some examples of this are to obtain new products, to grow internationally, to obtain technical information, to increase market share, or to diversify a product line. A second motive for acquisitions is to capitalize on efficiency improvements. This can come in the form of vertical or horizontal integration, which can eliminate dependence on a supplier, or improve the distribution channel. Synergy is also a benefit of improved efficiency. A third reason a company may want to acquire or merge with another company is for tax purposes. A highly profitable company may look for a company with unused tax losses to benefit them. However, the IRS requires that such a merger have another benefit in addition to the tax advantage. And finally, a company may acquire another company as a defensive strategy. In-other-words, to stop a hostile takeover. Once a firm decides that it wants to acquire another company, it must determine what is fair compensation. This is called Business Valuation. It is the process of determining the worth of a business, taking into account the risks and the return. Business valuation is not an exact science. There are many techniques which range from being quite simple to very complicated. But despite this, good business valuation is a key to an acquisition success. There are four general categories of business valuation techniques. There are the Cost Approaches, the Income Approaches, the Market Approaches, and the Other Approaches. The cost approach bases the worth of a business on the value of its assets. Each asset and liability are reviewed separately and then added together. In general, these approaches are accounting in nature and are straight forward and easy to understand. The major disadvantage associated with this method is that it doesn’t take into account future earnings. The rate at which the earnings are discounted are dependent upon the risk associated with the business. Under this approach there are three principal methods: Earnings Capitalization, Excess Earnings, and Discounted Cash-Flow. The discounted cash-flow is the most popular of these methods. Its advantages are that it takes into account timing, future earnings, and risk. However, the results can be greatly affected by small changes in critical assumptions (sales volume, operating expenses, etc.), and in determining the continuing value of a firm. The market approach bases the worth of a company on financial information obtained from the open market. The three principle methods under this approach are: the stock and debt approach, the direct comparison approach, and the financial multiples approach. For these methods to be accurate, it is important that the market be efficient, and that there be several comparable firms (with regard) to the target company. If either of these elements is missing, then the accuracy of the results will suffer. The last category of valuation techniques include: rule-of-thumb, unit-capacity, and hybrid methods. Rule-of-thumb and unit-capacity methods are quick and simple, but they are based on ‘typical’ companies. This may, or may not, cause a problem. The hybrid method simply incorporates parts of different valuation techniques to create a new method. The possibilities are endless because of the number of techniques. This approach is used by companies which acquire businesses regularly, and usually evolves over several years. Although any of the methods discussed could be used to value a business, some methods are more accurate than others for certain circumstances. As a result, one method alone cannot be used for all valuations. To determine what valuation method should be used, the advantages, disadvantages, and limitations of each were reviewed and analyzed. Using this information, key characteristics of businesses which affect valuation approaches short-comings were identified. These characteristics were then used to determine the best approach to use and when. The key characteristics identified were: Type of earnings (standard or bankruptcy), Earnings sign (positive or negative), Type of business (manufacturing or service), Number of comparable firms (0-2 firms or 3 and over firms), and Amount of assets (high or low). Using the different key characteristics to identify different business situations, 24 different scenarios were identified. For each scenario, a primary and secondary valuation method was recommended. The discounted cash-flow (DCF) method is recommended as the primary approach in 14 instances, and is recommended as the secondary approach for the other 10. Direct comparison, adjusted book value, rule-of-thumb, and unit capacity were the other primary techniques. DCF is the preferred method because it takes into account cash-flows, timing, and risk. It can be tailored to work for most of the business scenarios. If a firm is in bankruptcy with a high amount of assets, DCF may have problems. Regardless of the situation, both the primary and secondary valuation methods should be used to calculate the value of a target company. If there are differences between the two results, an attempt to understand why must be made. For acquisitions to be successful, the valuation process must be accurate. The valuation techniques recommended here will not give an exact value. What they will do is give an estimate which is valid for that target company, at that point in time. Since external factors in the market place change on a regular basis, so must the data used in calculating a businesses worth. It is clear that each of the valuation approaches discussed in this paper, does have some sort of short-coming in certain situations. Therefore, there is not one single valuation method that will work accurately for all circumstances, and that is why the valuation selection tool was developed. It is also important that a minimum of two different techniques be used. The more information the better the valuation. And the better the valuation, the better chance of a successful merger or acquisition.

Bernabe, Cesar S. “A Quantitative Method for Evaluating Manpower Utilization in Direct Labor Activities”

May 1979, 41pp
Archival copy only

Bertolas, Perry M. “General Cargo Ship Economics”

May 7, 1992, 129pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper reviews the current economic situation in the cargo shipping industry. Specifically, a detailed supply/demand and cost/benefit analysis of the commercial shipping industry is presented. This is done to determine the relevant trends and cost factors associated with cargo shipping operations. The main findings of the economic review are: (1) certain technological developments are leading to significant cost savings in cargo shipping, (2) the key cost of most any containership operation utilizing U.S. ports, will be the port/cargo handling costs, and (3) the U.S. shipbuilders and ship operating companies are currently facing, and will continue to face, difficult economic times if they persist to compete in the world commercial shipping business in the same way they are now. The effects on the economics of shipping operations of different capital structures, inflation, taxation, and depreciation schemes (as they apply to the cargo shipping industry) are evaluated. Based on this information, guidelines and methods are developed to correctly deal with these matters when conducting financial analysis for ship operations. A detailed financial costing model is developed and used to evaluate the feasibility of a specific containership operation. The result of the analysis is that the proposed operation, based on the assumptions stated, can be a very profitable venture for the ship operating company.

Bertz, Robert G. “Risk analysis methods for research and development projects”

Oct. 2, 2008, 99pp, bibliography, appendices, tables, figures
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis focuses on techniques for improving risk analysis under extraordinary uncertainty. Practical methods for reducing bias in subjective probabilities are developed. These methods include mathematical approaches as well as recommendations for raising awareness to the potentially irrational trends in human thought. Typical metrics produced through risk analysis do not adequately address the reliability of probabilities based on subjective information. In this thesis, quantified knowledge gaps are introduced as an additional metric in risk analysis. Background for the topic is provided through an extensive review of project risk management, bias, heuristics, and decision-making theory. Techniques are developed for integrating objective and subjective information and presenting the results in terms of meaningful metrics. The methods presented here address problems with typical techniques by including metrics for knowledge gaps and expected monetary values. These values are presented to the response phase of project risk management in a matrix format known as a risk register. A two-stage risk register approach allows the risk manager to generate initial assessment, followed by a detailed analysis. The author integrates concepts from best practices in project risk management, cognitive decision theory, and statistics to compile a practical approach to risk analysis that is particularly suited to research and development projects.

Bichler, Anthony J. “Factorial Experimental Design and Analysis- A Management Tool”

June 9, 1977, 37pp
Archival copy only

Bielefeld, Jon C. “Main-Internal Planning (MIP)- A Non-Stock Planning Supplement to MRP”

April 1, 1983, 248pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Since about 1960, when the first computer-based “Material Requirements Planning” systems were developed and installed, time-phased MRP has come a long way as an accepted production planning technique and area of new knowledge. Many companies have successfully developed and installed MRP systems, both home-grown and canned system packages. Unfortunately, the number of unsuccessful attempts far outnumber those which were installed and brought on-line successfully. There are a number of reasons for these failures, including lack of upper management support, inaccurate files (bill of material, inventory, etc.), ineffective processing of engineering change notices, and lack of accurate timely shop reporting, to name just a few. Another key requirement for success, often neglected in the excitement of MRP’s implementation, is to carefully tailor each MRP system to the nature of the product being produced and the facilities in which production will occur. This thesis examines the nature of one company’s products and production capabilities. The design and application of this company’s computerized on-line MRP system is described with reference to the wide range of standard, engineered, make-to-stock, and make-to-order products which it produces. Shortcomings in the practical application of this highly sophisticated MRP system to low usage subassemblies are then discussed. This student’s proposed solution to these shortcomings is introduced as the “Main-Internal Planning” (MIP) system. MIP’s file requirements, processing logic, and interface with the company’s existing MRP system are discussed in detail. In addition, CRT displays of file contents are developed and exhibited. In summary, this thesis, by example of a diverse manufacturing company, intends to make the reader aware of shortcomings commonly found in MRP planning of low usage subassemblies and introduce the concept of “Main-Internal Planning” (MIP) as a new and practical solution to this problem.

Birks, Carl W. “An Evaluation of the Commercial Competitiveness of Nitrogen Generated Fuel Cells”

70pp
Archival copy only

Birringer, Chuck “An Overview of the Reengineering Methodology Followed by a Case Study of Order Fulfillment in the Durable Goods Industry”

Spring 1998, 103pp, 34 references, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: When the subject of order fulfillment surfaces, one retailer almost always stands out, “Wal-Mart.” Wal-Mart redefined the word value as always available with the best quality, at the best price. The supply chain for retailing is traditionally three players, the manufacturer, the wholesaler and the retailer. Wal-Mart is able to achieve the best prices by replacing the wholesaler with the manufacturer as the supplier that stocks the shelves. Sharing real time retail information with the manufacturer creates accurate demand data while providing timely reorder point information. Wal-Mart has been very successful at this, leaving much of the competition scrambling. The durable goods industry on the other hand is slow to respond to this new way of doing business. Except for the industry leaders such as GE, Whirlpool or GM (Cadillac), other durable goods manufacturers are slow to follow. The dealers in the durable good industry are typically found to be laden with inventory from the manufacturer. As labeled by the manufacturer, a “loaded dealer is considered a loyal dealer.” Not only is the dealer loaded with excess inventory, but also in many cases it is the wrong inventory for their customer needs. Inventory that in the short term is financed through the manufacturer is eventually sold off to consumers as non-current inventory for reduced prices in order to improve the cash flow and prepare for the next onslaught of inventory from the manufacturer. The percentage of losses taken by the dealer on the sale of non-current inventory is typically in the double-digit proportions. The interest rates paid by the manufacturer to maintain the floor plan inventory can be as high as 4 – 8% above the prime rate. The case study is about one such company in the durable goods industry. The company is experiencing declining profits, sees declining dealer profits and hears customer complaints about the lack of the manufacturers concerns with product availability. The dealers are loaded with an abundance of inventory to sell to their customers. Unfortunately, the inventory is the wrong style, the wrong make or does not meet the customer’s expectations. So the customer has a choice, accept product that either exceeds one’s expectations or is less than one’s expectations, pay a premium in time or money to have the product delivered from another store or another dealer or order the product from the manufacturer direct and wait 4 – 6 weeks for delivery. Through the use of a reengineering methodology a team of individuals from various functions with the company are formed to reengineer the order fulfillment process. The results of the project are a proposed process with these new characteristics. The new process is proactive rather than reactive. The large inventory that was maintained in the dealerships is now consolidated at the manufacturer. Product sales are recorded at the time of the retail sale rather than at the time of the wholesale sale. Product is allocated to sales orders, not only from finished goods, but also from the doable production schedule. Product demand is recorded at the time of the consumer sale not at the time of the dealer sale. Outstanding receivables are cut in half from 33 days to 15 days. Credit checking is all but eliminated. Order entry is put in the hands of the dealer. Cash application is automated. Inventory availability that was estimated in the old process, is promised to the customer and backed with a guaranteed delivery. Implementation of the proposed process is completed through the pilot. With the completion of the pilot there are both successes and failures. Successes are prevalent in the logistics and marketing functions. In the logistics area, guaranteed delivery contracts with carriers are in place and operational. Finished goods inventory, that was distributed, is now centralized. Dealers on the pilot are pulling inventory from segregated stock based on retail demand. Distributors on the pilot are planning inventory using a 13-week forecast. In the marketing area, old contracts and agreements, related to the old push inventory strategy, are replaced with new contracts and agreements that center on a pull inventory strategy and a 13-week forecast. Failures are prevalent in the sales, information systems and finance functions. The sales area began the pilot phase by allowing dealers on the pilot to pull inventory based on retail demand. However, by the end of the first quarter, the pressures from the parent company to make the wholesale sales numbers, caused the sales function to revert back to the push inventory strategy. Information systems failed to support the needs of the pilot implementation. The customer workstation is not developed. Changes to the existing customer order processing system, i.e., for the new contracts and agreements, the distributor forecasting interface, the production planning interface and the inventory allocation module, never make the IS project list. The financial area failed to address the change in sales recording from wholesale to retail, where the retail sales are seasonal. What has been learned from the reengineering project? What improvements can be made for the next reengineering project? The selection of the reengineering team is critical to the success of the project. Team members should be managers that are empowered decision-makers, selected from the existing functions within the process that is being reengineered. A higher degree for success is found when team members are removed from their existing jobs and give a full time commitment to the project. The tendency is to implement the pilot across the entire process with a subset of customers. However, since reengineering creates such dramatic change, and typically involves several functional areas, implementation by functional area can be more successful. What is the next step? The company must evaluate the successes and failures. Then decide whether or not to proceed with the full implementation.

Bitar, Michel. “Motivating the Technical-Professional Employee for Improved Productivity”

March 1987, 51pp
Archival copy only

Bixler, Michael E. “Concurrent Use of Varying Management Styles Within a Single Manufacturing Operation”

May 1996, 119pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The ever changing pressures on today’s businesses such as increased quality demands, the ease of international trade and competition, government regulations and restrictions are causing companies to focus on their most valuable assets – people. The methods by which hourly workers are governed on a day to day basis need to be customized to fit the personality of each particular work force. If only one structure is used to manage all areas of a business, the potential of a company’s work force can be severely limited. Varying levels of employee involvement, self-direction, accountability, and compensation systems can be effectively used for difference process areas within the same manufacturing operation. This thesis applies the concepts of employee empowerment, skill-based pay, and variable pay to a manufacturing organization which has been operating by traditional management techniques for more than 30 years. Chapter three provides a basic tour of the existing manufacturing operation. The tour is intended to familiarize the reader with the details of the manufacturing operation as well as with some performance issues which are typical to traditional manufacturing operations. Chapter four describes the strategy of the new structure for the manufacturing operation. An integral part of the new structure is to combine employee empowerment principles with skill-based pay concepts to develop customized structures for each specific process area within the operation. Chapter five describes the restructured model of this manufacturing organization and demonstrates that the operation would operate more efficiently when the structure of each process area is customized to maximize the potential of the available resources for that specific area instead of using one common structure for the operation as a whole. The structure of the model will also demonstrate that not all employees desire nor need to have a high degree of involvement in self-directed teams to be valuable employees. Some people just want to report to work and do a good job while others continually seek ways to improve themselves and their company. Every manufacturing operation has unique requirements which need to be addressed when implementing the techniques and concepts which are presented by this thesis and Chapter six introduces some of these elements. The ultimate goal of this thesis is to create a system which enhances and develops the unique skills and abilities of individual hourly workers instead of “force fitting” all employees into a “one size fits all” organization.

Bizri, Samer Menah. “Investment in Lebanon”

May 1991, 105pp
Archival copy only

Blacklock, Quentin J. “Factors for Success in Social Knowledge Management”

January 2014, 69pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to discover key factors for success in social knowledge management initiatives. The use of social networking tools inside of organizations for the purpose of collaboration, knowledge sharing, and knowledge transfer is on the rise. Despite the increasing numbers of social knowledge management initiatives, it is predicted that the majority will not deliver the intended business benefits. The research method used for this study is a grounded theory inquiry, using case studies as data. The research results indicate that they key factors for success of social knowledge management initiatives are leadership, organizational culture, metrics and training. Specifically, the research indicates the importance of leadership that prioritizes social knowledge management, leadership that aligns social knowledge management strategy with business strategy, and leadership that sets the tone for a social knowledge management culture. Moreover, the results indicate the importance of an organizational culture that encourages collaboration and sharing, freely and widely, an organizational culture of lifelong learning, as well as leadership that uses relevant metrics to measure the effectiveness of the social knowledge management programs at the individual, team, department, and enterprise levels, and leadership that prioritizes and makes the investment in ongoing training for all members of the organization. An additional result was a better understanding of the enterprise social space. The implications for these results are that deploying innovative and enabling technology alone is insufficient for success. The four key factors, which are human factors, with enabling technology, greatly improve the odds for success.

Blaha, James J. “A Fundamental Approach to Pricing of Products”

Nov. 1985, 54pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The topic of pricing is the one area of manufacturing and marketing of a product in which the role of an engineering manager does not have a primary responsibility. This thesis is an analysis and evaluation on key pricing principles. Most companies pay a great deal of attention to providing efficient manufacturing, marketable products, good customer service and excellent cost and accounting controls. However, fundamental to their business is the question of overall profit margin on sales. Pricing policy is at the heart of the profit margin. In any business organization, one may find vice presidents of sales and various vice president levels of manufacturing and production. Typically, no vice president exists in overseeing the pricing of products. An introductory framework will be presented to provide the fundamentals of pricing. The affects of pricing on an organization will be covered through the five pricing strategies. An analysis of each of the three main pricing systems utilized in industry today will be presented and investigated as to their practical impact to the engineering manager. Field marketing will be researched to round out the completed product cycle. Pricing efforts will be covered in its various forms of presentation as they apply to the field sales market. The final product pricing cycle will be drawn together by the pricing decision process. The conclusion of this thesis establishes the engineering manager as a non-candidate to accept the product pricing responsibilities. Pricing, when properly performed, revolves around market trends, customer perceptions and competitive response. All three areas are external to the engineering manager’s major areas of responsibilities. To respond accordingly requires intuitive decisions versus a pure analytical approach. The pricing process should reside within a position that directly interfaces with the company’s field marketing organization along with a liaison to the manufacturing group.

Bonfiglio, Michael M. “Strategic Marketing: The Employment of the Marketing Mix in an Industrial Products Company”

March 1987, 112pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Boschke, Dale “Modified Flexible Manufacturing Systems”

Oct. 15, 1984, 75pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS) has been evolving for the past ten (10) years, having as its objective reduction of costs and increased flexibility in mid-volume manufacturing situations through the application of Numerical Control (N/C) technologies, automated material handling and computer systems. The importance of achieving maximum productivity in manufacturing has been emphasized by the cost spiral being experienced throughout the world. The problem is especially serious in the United States which in recent years, has achieved a substantially lower productivity improvement rate than reached in most other industrial free world countries. In the metalcutting segment of the manufacturing industry, emphasis has been placed on maximizing productivity (minimizing cost) for high volume parts. The effort has been quite successful. In relatively low volume situations, the use of N/C equipment has significantly improved productivity in recent years. Much less effort has been directed toward improving the mid-volume production range which accounts for 50 to 75% of all parts manufacturing costs. The FMS approach has been developed to help meet the mid-volume manufacturing challenge, by incorporating elements of both the flexibility of the job shop and the high productivity of the transfer line. The key element that the early Flexible Manufacturing Systems failed to recognize, and in fact tried to eliminate, was the human resource…man. Japan is heading toward the “unmanned factory”, while the United States is touting the nondescript phrase “Factory of the Future”. A program of modified FMS’s incorporating production with limited manning is more suited to today’s manufacturing needs. Totally unmanned is not the real world and there will always be a need for people, utilized in a more efficient and humane way. The highly skilled worker is still the primary force in good FMS operations. When production equipment is running, this is the best approach to cost control. Involving all people in the commitment to optimum utilization will lead to the transferring of indirect work contributions to the direct production unit. Implementing modified Flexible Manufacturing Systems or production with limited manning will ultimately receive the highest production returns.

Bose, Scott E. “A framework for collegiality, communities of practice, and knowledge management within the global enterprise”

July 30, 2008, 89pp, bibliography, appendices, figures, table
Available for checkout
Abstract: The student’s contribution focuses upon the foundations required to build sustainable global knowledge management systems within a global enterprise. Many attempts have been made to achieve a global knowledge strategy, but the foundation that supports this strategy is the most important first step. The organization’s culture must provide a basis for which employees can feel secure and confident about the types of information they can and should share. This organizational environment also includes the types of information that must be controlled and secured in order to maintain the confidential nature of that information.

Knowledge management systems are the enablers that help define and build communities of practice and collegiality within the global enterprise. Portal technology is the framework that brings it all together. Knowledge management is derived from a common business vocabulary in order to provide a consistent user experience. The Dewey Decimal System was developed in the nineteenth century and has been in use in libraries throughout the world to provide a consistent manner to file and retrieve information. Businesses, on the other hand, have developed departmental systems typically deployed by the administrative personnel and expanded in an unmanaged way, the silo approach to store, classify, secure, and retrieve must be implemented so that knowledge management systems can then be leveraged to further control and manage the information and provide a sound basis to control access, improve and assure security, and provide auditing for the entire enterprise. Portal technology, built on a strong foundation can then be leveraged to build the common place for communities of practice and the exchange of information in a familiar place that is consistent through the enterprise, but technology alone is not the answer. The required human interaction within a management system must not only be compatible with this technology but must lead its activity and deployment.


Boyer, Shauna “Knowledge Management in the Construction Industry”

July 23, 2008, 98pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is commonly accepted that knowledge is an important asset in today’s organizations. Businesses are starting to apply knowledge management theory in an effort to remain competitive in the dynamic environment of the 21st century. The construction industry has struggled to find ways to effectively embrace knowledge management and maximize its potential. This paper focuses on utilization of post-project reviews in an effort to aid in facilitation of this objective. First, the uniqueness, project delivery methods, and challenges associated with the construction industry are considered, as well as how these characteristics affect knowledge gathering and retention. Next, communication and the vital role that it plays in regard to knowledge management is investigated. The concept of post-project reviews is then presented as a means to implement knowledge management within this unique industry. Finally, primary research was conducted through a survey to gauge the current practices and perception of knowledge management and post-project reviews among construction professionals. The results of this study support the hypothesis that post-project reviews are an effective means to facilitate knowledge management in the construction industry. Additional conclusions are explored and recommendations for further research in the field are suggested.

Brandel, Robert L. “Competitive Intelligence on the Internet: A How-To Guide for Gathering Information”

May 18, 1999, 84pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Although it is often touted as having all the answers, Internet research does have distinct limitations. The best usage of the web is to use it as a supplemental tool for gathering secondary intelligence to supplement other intelligence gathering activities. The first step should be to check competitors’ home pages, looking for information that is “straight from the horse’s mouth”. This option is often overlooked, but can provide valuable intelligence. Another important starting point is Hoover’s Online (www.hoovers.com), a site filled with corporate and financial news and information, as well as useful links to related sites. Once basic information is obtained from these two sources, the next step should be to use search engines to see what other information is available. Since no search engine will be able to find all the information available, it is extremely important to use more than one search engine in order to maximize the amount of data collected. While important, using multiple search engines can be quite time consuming. Metasearch engines provide links to the major search engines, automatically sending out requests with only one keying of the search string. While there are many to choose from, the best add a feature which automatically sorts responses and discards duplicates. There are tools available for the desktop that make conducting searches easier by allowing multiple engines to be searched simultaneously. Some of the more powerful programs have the added feature of automatically performing searches on a regular basis, allowing the user to stay abreast of competitive situations without direct involvement. While search engines have the ability to find a large amount of information, they are not tailored to retrieve data from everywhere; other forms of searching must be used. Another form of searching is the use of newsgroups and discussion groups. These are areas where people hold discussion on a wide variety of topics. Participating in discussions on these groups is useful, but archives of the thousands of groups can be searched for more information. Other specialty sites are tailored towards specific industries, products, or geographic locations. Job postings, patents, and even industry tradeshows can be researched. These types of sites can all be helpful in the intelligence gathering process. While there is a vast amount of information that can be obtained free of charge, there are times when it is beneficial to pay for information. Fee-based sites can be full-fledged research companies that allow Internet access to their specialists, or they can be specialized sites providing unique content. Most of the time, the information provided is not available anywhere else on the Internet, especially for free. Traditional media sources are starting to have greater exposure on the Internet. Much of the time, content originally found in these sources is converted over electronically, allowing Internet researchers to gain access to it. Several sites will point the user to local newspapers and television station home pages. Once the initial intelligence gathering is done, it is important to continue to monitor the competition and marketplace. This can be done in a variety of ways, many of them automated. Websites can be monitored, and customized stock quotes and company news can be obtained without user intervention. This can be done online, using desktop tools, or even sending results to a cellular phone. Regardless of the type of information being sought, it is important to realize the limitations of the Internet. The amount and quality of information on small, privately held, non-technical companies will be vastly different than that of large, well-known conglomerates. The Internet cannot provide answers to all competitive questions. It is best used as a part of a well thought out intelligence gathering plan, providing important clues to a competitor’s activities.

Braun, James P. “Implementing a collaborative workspace to support knowledge management in product development at Harley-Davidson Motor Company “

May 27 2007, 121pp
Archival copy only

Braun, Jeffrey R. “Quantifying the Value of a Product Feature Through the Utilization of a New Market Research Tool”

March 2002, 71pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Breunig, Tim “Management of a Manufacturing Resource Planning System (M.R.P II)”

Sept. 1985, 42pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The objective of this essay is to enlighten management to the benefits, which can be attained through proper use of MRP II. Materials requirements Planning (MRP) has evolved over the years into a closed loop system tying the financial and the operating systems together with technical theory. But the company wide implications can be much greater when used properly and understood by corporate executives. Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) should be a corporate game plan that Manufacturing, Finance, Marketing and Engineering use to work together toward company objectives. When MRP is used properly by management, the results can greatly improve the net profits of the firm by reduction of operating expenses. To remain competitive today in the international market place, U.S. corporations must use and properly implement the management philosophy required to effectively use MRP II.

Brittnacher, Richard J. “Manufacturing Plant Closing or Facility Closings: A ‘Best Practices’ Proposal”

Dec. 2001, 89pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: All too many companies, large or small, frequently have been forced to close offices, manufacturing plants, or facilities. Extensive literature exists that explains causes, effects, and results of downsizing or restructuring on corporations and employees. This paper focuses on actual plant closure activities, examining the processes and procedures needed to shut down a facility. It proposes a set of “best practice” facility closure guidelines that provides direction to an enterprise once it makes a decision to close a plant or facility. The paper also provides suggestions as to any counseling or career transition programs soon-to-be ex-employees could expect. The discussion begins after the actual decision is made to shut down a plant. The manuscript examines general activities that take place, from managerial, human resource, and employee perspectives to close a facility due to corporate restructuring. It assumes the company remains in business. Most of the concepts are similar whether the facility that closes is an office or a manufacturing plant. The first step in the plant shutdown process is to plan the closure strategy. The plan undertaken should be firm, yet flexible enough to provide for unforeseen circumstances. In an extended closure process, consistent communication from management is the most critical tool needed to achieve successful results. It must be truthful and honest and take place throughout the process. The financial picture should be considered with closure costs estimated in advance, accounted for during, and reported after the process has been concluded. Historically, providing extended benefits and retention bonuses have been valuable practices in successfully completing the unpleasant task of closing a company. They are important options in any plant closure strategy. Closure activities taken from three representative midsized organizations, Signetics, Siemens- Westinghouse, and U.S. Leather provide a range of successful, and not so successful, plant shutdown efforts.

Brooks, Russell “The Establishing of a Plant Engineering Department for the XYZ Company”

June 1975, 74pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Brossmann, William D. “Marketing and Corporate Strategy Plan for Econo-Clean Janitorial Service”

March 1980, 42pp
Archival copy only

Bruhn, William C. “Using Forecasting to Understand How to Increase (Not Just Predict) New Product Sales”

May 1998, 125pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The primary role of management is to improve the firm’s processes. New product sales forecasting is one such process. The sales forecasting process can be used to increase, not just predict, new product sales. Forecasting new product sales is difficult due to market change and complexity. The changes are random and the complexity of the market always means that information is lacking. Traditional wisdom has forecasters concentrating on, ‘how to increase the new product sales forecast accuracy?’ This is important and it will be addressed in the course of this research. However, the better question to focus on is, ‘how to increase the new product sales forecast?’ If a logical rational can be established to this question, then the resultant actions from this exercise should indeed make this a self-fulfilling prophecy of increased sales. Management needs to answer both questions. Six information sources were used to compile this thesis: trade publications, an original market survey, corporate annual reports from the Dow Jones 30 Industrials, seminar literature, computer software information and consultant brochures. The Journal of Business Forecasting and Journal of Product Innovation were the most prolific trade literature sources. An original survey was done to gain insights from ‘real world’ practitioners. The annual reports yielded what was on the minds of the nation’s top CEO’s – new products were definitely critical. Seminars are another way to increase the forecasters skill base. The Marketing Institute and Institute of Business Forecasting each run forecasting seminars. The forecasting specific software identified was: Forecasting Pro, Smart Forecasts, Sibyl / Runner. A number of consultants were also identified that specialize in the area of forecasting: The BASES Group, ADA Applied Decision Analysis, Hauser Furstace and Elrick & Lavidge. Each of these research information sources offered a new perspective on the seven hypotheses (H1 to H7) being studied. With five of the seven hypotheses there was sufficient proof to validate their claim. Strategic corporate measurements influence new product sales forecasting (H1). Forecasts evolve from a need for a broad numerical range to a narrow range (H2). The role of forecasting changes over the new product cycle from identifying winners and losers, to being the key measurement of success (H4). Sales forecasting identifies and defines the variables that are critical to improve the likelihood of new product success (H6). Finally, a team needs to recognize and avoid both resource costs and opportunity costs that result from inaccurate forecasts (H7). The other two hypotheses had elements of truth but were elected to need further evidence. External business environmental changes (eg. Recession, niche marketing., …) in the 1970’s changed forecasting practices in place from the 1960’s. However, the internal business restructuring (eg. Teams, globalization, …) of the 1990’s has not similarly impacted the forecasting process – just yet that is (H3). It would seem logical that one or two key parameters may dictate proper forecasting method selection. However the reality seems to be that with minimal guidelines in existence for the forecaster, one uses any and all known methods (H5). A number of ‘Best Practices’ were noted that new product development teams can use in their search of how to increase forecast accuracy and actual sales. When new product development teams attempt to model their product’s sales with a diffusion model they need to answer three very good marketing questions: how will communications spread about the new product – mass media and/or word of mouth? When will adoptions peak? When will cumulative adoptions peak (market saturation)? Another excellent exercise for new product teams is to describe their new products with Roger’s General Attributes: divisibility (trialability), complexity, communicability, relative advantage, perceived risk and compatibility. Research shows that compatibility has a strong direct impact on purchase intent, as do perceived risk and relative advantage but to a lesser degree. New products are critical to a healthy future for any company. Not only do they gain a competitive advantage in the marketplace for the firm, they also earn better margins. In particular, firms should strive to: be innovators not imitators, reduce the time to market with new products (eg. use parallel rather than serial processes), find ways to view their markets as infinite (eg. global perspective) and recognize and reward teams and individuals who champion their new products. The corporation should use measurements to encourage new product development and hence, new product sales. Research and Development (R&D) is an expense for future growth. R&D expense is at 6% to 8% in America’s most innovative firms. Three different measurements can help the firm to track their progress: new product sales as a percentage of total sales, number of new products introduced and new product sales dollars. To improve the new product sales forecasting process itself, there are a number of suggestions to follow. Research seems to reveal that better application of known methods is needed, rather than invention of new techniques altogether. Approximately 40 forecasting methods were identified that the team can draw upon. Numerous studies point to the ‘Jury of Executive Opinion’ or management team opinion as the most popular technique. The key rule of thumb though is that using multiple methods and combining the knowledge gained from each will produce the most accurate forecast. For new products there are three main methods available: analogous products (past sales and future predictions), internal company opinion (management and sales force) and external company opinion (potential customers). All market research projects on new products should include purchase intention questions. There are two advisable improvements to this area of inquiry. First, in the question itself use the probability phrases of: certain, high chance, even chance, low chance and never. Secondly, during results interpretation use the purchase intent translation of 75% (of certain respondents), 25% (of high chance respondents, etc. …), 10%, 5% and 2%, to modify the survey results to what could be expected actual sales results. An interesting analysis of early sales data by the new product team should look at the purchase interval between the 1st and 2nd purchases. One study found that the shortest intervals usually belong to what later become the largest volume purchasers. Another rule of thumb to keep in mind is that 8 to 10 experts will create a very accurate forecast, and that additional opinions generally do not increase the accuracy. Forecasters also need to be aware of the forecasters’ ‘Survivor’s Curse’ – products that survive to be actually market tested tend to disappoint in terms of their forecast. Also the corresponding bias of ‘Prophet’s Fear’ – forecasters may underestimate since low forecasted products never make it to market to allow judgment on the forecast accuracy. The basic forecasting formula used by consultants is a good guide for both entrepreneurs and corporate new product development teams. Consultants combine the marketing plan with a survey of potential customers plus add in their past experience usually captured in some model or numerical format. Note the trick is to have all three pieces of this puzzle completed. In closing, new product sales forecasting is a valuable dynamic viewpoint for the team to use throughout the new product development cycle and beyond. It can be used to increase (not just predict) new product sales.

Bruner, Louis L. “Necessovation: applied strategies for integrating innovation with necessity”

April 30, 2008, 120pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: How does a company stay ahead of the curve? The solution is: innovation. If an organization has a process and the wherewithal to create what can be referred to as an innovation machine, it will be generations ahead, while leaving rivals struggling to figure out how they became followers. However, to as many organizations can attest, innovation alone may not always be enought to establish a sustained competitive environment in today’s marketplace. As the title of this paper proposes, the integration of necessity and innovation may offer a bolstered solution. Termed by the student as “necessovation”, the solution can be thought of as creating the need for an innovative idea where it was once previously non-existent. Application of this new concept will also be applied in a virtual environment.

Bursek, Gerald W. “Training- An Investment in Human Resources”

May 1971, 34pp
Archival copy only

Bury, James L. “Emotional Intelligence: How it is Applicable to Engineering Management in the 21st Century”

Sept. 2002, 69pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The 1995 best seller Emotional Intelligence by Daniel Goleman popularized the term “emotional intelligence” and stimulated a logical reasoning vs. emotion debate. Many consultants and companies alike quickly jumped on the emotional intelligence bandwagon and gave the concept a fad or zeitgeist aura. This paper returns to the originators of the concept, John D. Mayer and Peter Salovey, and uses their definition in a review of emotional intelligence to see if its abilities are useful for today’s engineering managers The paper begins with a review of what emotional intelligence is. Mayer and Salovey tell us emotional intelligence has four ability levels with increasing degrees of sophistication. Level one is the ability to perceive, appraise, and express emotions. Level two is the ability to use emotions to facilitate cognitive thinking and decision-making (a discussion of Antonio Damasio’s somatic marker theory is also discussed with this level). Level three involves the understanding and analyzing emotional information and employing this knowledge. The ultimate level, level four, is the ability to regulate and stimulate emotions in one’s self and others. Once these concepts have been explained, the paper goes beyond the Mayer and Salovey model and discusses preconscious thought and perceptions. It refers to Seymour Epstein’s description of the experiential mind and how it uses perceptions and past experiences to 1) make quick decisions on sensory inputs that signal danger and 2) color our view of perceived reality by inferring things using our past as a guide. This section closes with a creation of the author called the thought and emotion loop. Briefly, this loop consists of the following steps: 1) the emotional mind takes in memory, perceptions and sensory input; 2) the emotional mind quickly decides if there is danger or not; 3) if there is danger, an emergency reaction cuts directly to taking action; 4) of no danger exists, emotion sorts out potential combinations that the cognitive mind must analyze and allows emotions to emerge to the conscious level which can then be sensed and regulated by emotional intelligence; 5) the cognitive mind analyzes the information and makes a decision on a course of action; 6) the event occurs and is perceived by the conscious mind; 7) the outcomes and results of the events, the perception of what occurred in the process, and the mood the individual was in are all stored in the memory and experiential mind for use on future trips around the loop. The point being made here is that emotional intelligence can be used in many parts of the loop. It can influence the deep-seated sources of those emotions to better predict and/or control the emotions before they emerge. The paper then leaves emotions and briefly discusses leadership and manager traits. The intention is not to polarize the two types as many authors have done. Management typically has to use a blend of both types on the job, depending on what needs to be done at the time. It is shown later in the paper how emotional intelligence and these traits can combine to help the engineering manager fulfill the duties of the position. The next section of the paper reviews the changes in both the engineering department and business as a whole in the last two decades. In general terms. business has changed from a manufacturing-based to a service-based economy, bringing with it a need for increased levels of interpersonal skills. Likewise, engineering has gone from a almost purely analytical department that designed things and then threw them “over-the-wall” to the next department to a service department that needs to view everyone as a customer, regardless if they are inside or outside the company. Improvement programs like ISO, Design for Assembly/Design for Manufacturing, and cross-functional teams have drastically increased the required skill set that everyone in the engineering department must possess to be successful. This service orientation and people skills requirement of the department and business has opened up an opportunity for those who are emotionally intelligent to be very successful as engineering managers. The last section of the paper examines many of the functions of today’s engineering manager and how each one could benefit from an individual with high levels of emotional intelligence. These functions are broken down into three subgroups: 1) influencing the company and department cultures; 2) leading project and department teams; and 3) interpersonal relationships. The conclusions section reinforces the original hypothesis that the abilities of emotional intelligence have never been more important for the successful engineering manager due to the changes that have occurred in both the engineering department and the business environment in the past two decades. It explains the author’s connection to the subject and how the lessons learned with this paper will help in his career.

Busalacchi, Louis J. “A Computer Program Utilizing Economical Order Quantity Theory in Association with Return on Investment Theory and Applying These to Purchasing and Inventory Control Systems”

Jan. 17, 1974, 45pp
Archival copy only

Butson, Dennis L. “The Economics of Pollution”

Feb. 27, 1979, 40pp
Archival copy only

Campbell, Jane A. “Women in Management Working Within a Changing Corporate Culture”

Feb. 1988, 36pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Women have become a major influence in the labor force in the U.S. in the last decade. Even with the increasing number of women entering the labor force, few have made it to the upper managerial level in any of the Fortune 500 companies. Test measures of personality dimensions, intelligence, and behavior in problem-solving groups show that executive women are just as able as executive men to lead, influence and motivate other group members, to analyze problems and be task oriented, and to be verbally effective. So why are women unable to crack the “glass ceiling” and become accepted in the corporation? Different corporations have different cultures, but most of the rituals, myths, and legends that make up these cultures remain attuned to the “male model”. The male model traditionally emphasized team competition, dominance, and survival-of-the-fittest. Many institutions are unprepared to deal with the cultural change involved with the integration of women into the management ranks. Not only are the employing organizations being caught unprepared, many males in the long-dominated arena of management and even a large number of females are not ready to deal with the problems associated with women’s increased access to management positions. But, the structure and the culture of today’s organization are evolving. Society has recognized a need for more flexible, responsive leadership. The styles of management required in the late 1980’s and 1990’s will emphasize collaborative management skills based on a participative philosophy related to a sense of common purpose and mutual interest. Authoritarian styles based on an assumed superiority will not be effective in solving the complex problems caused by an accelerating rate of change. While there is little doubt that women need to sharpen their political skills, by showing men that quality decision making can evolve from a participative approach to management, women may slowly help to promote a change from the old authoritarian management philosophy to a more collaborative consensual approach. This will only serve to expedite the smooth transition of women into the upper managerial ranks by allowing women to use the cooperation and relationship building skills in which they excel, rather than requiring conformity to the existing management model.

Carravetta, R. “Applied Psychology in the Corporate Environment”

May 1976, 55pp
Archival copy only

Cauley, Patrick M. “World Class Teaming: Enabled by Organizational Design”

July 15, 1998, 245pp, appendices, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis studies the effects of altering the organization design to increase the success of teaming. A. McKenzie 7-S framework was used to comprehensively cover all aspects of organizations to insure that the magnitude and complexity of teaming is presented. The author proposes the hypothesis that the amount and extent of organizational design changes attempted by the organization will directly influence the success of teaming. Teaming was found to be a very complex group form requiring extensive understanding and organizational support. The individual requirements of teaming are supported by a complex matrix of McKenzie 7-S elements. Due to the complexity of interrelations, the author recommends that a structure approach be taken in the implementation of teaming. Typically this structured sequence should start with an assessment through the use of survey instrument, an analysis of the present state of the organization, development of a strategy to alter the organization, implementation of the alterations and monitoring of the effectiveness of the alterations relative to teaming. It is also recommended that organization consider a separation of the business processes (i.e. how some thing is done) from the tasks (i.e. what is to be done). Different teams should be formed with different focuses each relying on the other for continuous improvement. This will help to enable the organization to sustain teaming in the long term by: • Altering the fundamental business processes that provide effectiveness and efficiency. • Increasing the middle management’s exposure to teaming, ownership of the alterations and self-security in altered roles. • Improving the viability that the new design will continue to meet the legacy requirements of the organization. The primary research performed by the author supported the tenet of the thesis – this research demonstrated that the more comprehensive the organization design alterations, the more successful the teams will be in meeting or exceeding expectations. The research also provided insight on areas of concentration and sequence of alterations. Organization should have higher levels of concentration in the areas of structure, group skills, individual skills, management style, and systems and procedures. The alterations should be performed in a specific sequence: • Initial alteration should be focused on structure, group skills, staff selection and individual shared values. • Initial alteration should be focused on structure, group skills, staff selection and individual shared values. • These alterations should be maintained and supplemented by alterations of strategy, staff development, and additional individual shared values. Through these concentrations and sequence organizations will find the most success. Finally, the author concluded that no one ideal model would work for all organizations. Organizations were too varied and unique for a broad application of a single model. Focused models should be used to justify, explain and implement individual organizational design alterations.

Chandler, Earl H. “Business Applications of Linear Programming Using the Simplex Method of Solution”

July 1971, 29pp
Archival copy only

Chesterfield, Michael P. “Synchronous Manufacturing Techniques for the Electronics Industry”

1991, 56pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Electronic Manufacturing is reaching a competitive level that has forced all competitors to re-evaluate and improve manufacturing abilities. The industry is therefore faced with the ability to deliver a quality product at a competitive price and insure continuous, on time delivery to its customers. Centralized functioning, the traditional approach, focuses the process, rather than the product. Modular manufacturing, on the other hand, isolates the complete production of a specific product family. The intent of this paper is to support the modular manufacturing method for high volume production of electronics. Industry today has typically used a centralized functioning approach for production of its products. This approach has incorporated large amounts of work in process, excessive material handling, and product defect build up prior to detection. A newer approach, known in some circles as module manufacturing, meets the three main goals of any manufacturing system. They are customer satisfaction, direct profitability, and an enriched work environment for all employees. Module manufacturing is therefore a viable approach because it comes closest to meeting these three main objectives. Our electronics industry must improve its methods of manufacturing if it is going to compete within the world class markets which currently exist.

Christie, Lukie Lonsdel “How Costs are Controlled in the Manufacturing of a Standard Overhead Crane”

March 1980, 53pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The main purpose of this report is to demonstrate the control of manufacturing cost through measurement of direct labor cost as applied to a standard overhead crane. The actual reported time in hours will be compared to the standard hours. The net effect of this comparison is the generation of two very important elements of an effective cost control program. These elements are: 1) Variances 2) Efficiency measurement or performance Variance is the difference between the actual and the standard hours. If nothing ever changed, there would be no need for variances. But, because there are always deviations between the actual and the standard hours, there is a need to analyze the variances. The analysis of cost variances is usually the most important job to be done in the operation of a standard cost system. Although, without proper analysis and intelligent factual interpretation, the cost variances are just a collection of figures. Accurate analysis of these variances will make it possible to effectively monitor and control the manufacturing operations of the crane. By investigating major manufacturing areas and identifying locations that need immediate attention, management will be given a priority of variances enabling operations to be investigated and problems corrected. Because of the finite breakdown of the labor standard, management will be able to carefully study all phases of the operation, and then launch a major cost reduction program. A good labor reporting system is aimed at measuring the effectiveness of the employee, as well as the effectiveness of the system supporting the employee. To be able to accomplish this, one has to rely on efficiency measurement or performance. Efficiency measurement or performance measures how efficiently one is able to perform a productive work reported in the allotted time and in accordance with the prescribed method. It also measures the level of interference being encountered in the operation. This level of interference will determine if and when corrective action is needed. By establishing an average performance of 80%, the net selling price, reported cost, and list price of the crane can be developed. Assuming, of course, a particular sales factor for that period. A detailed development of this pricing system will be established in Chapter 1. Actual data developed for the standard crane identifies eight major operational areas. These areas will be used to monitor operating performance to ensure that the goals and objectives of the business are being achieved. The importance of implementing an effective cost control program is essential for several reasons. These reasons can be summarized as follows: Improved profitability is a basic operating objective. However, the intensity of competition has made it almost impossible for a company to recover all cost increases through increased selling prices. Therefore, an effective cost control system is the key to success.

Church, Bruce and Don Albinger “Incorporating an Incremental Innovation Approach into Product Development”

May 24, 1999, 141pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is not a secret the world economy is offering ever increasing options to customers and driving manufactures to find new and better ways to compete. One product development philosophy that offers time competitive, lower risk and measured market response is Incremental Innovation. This method of product development uses time as an ally and delivers product features and enhancements in smaller, pre-determined increments. This philosophy helps control costs and risk, as it demands that innovations be delivered within shorter time frames, thus limiting the extent and risks of big product developments. It also forces the product development mechanics such as product market and feature definitions to be more succinct and part of an overall roadmap system that details the evolution of the market and product. Incremental Innovation allows the organization to become more customer-centric as all development groups must adopt a “learn by doing” philosophy to be successful. Improving sales and profitability through Incremental Innovation means being very intent and time competitive with the fundamentals of product development. Product development programs that incorporate Incremental Innovation as a philosophy need to execute and drive these strategies and methodologies into the organization to accomplish the aggressive goals this philosophy usually present. With this, it must be recognized that the philosophy, methods and procedures used in this thesis to describe an incremental product development approach are also sound methods for effective product development in general. The difference is that Incremental Innovation demands more attention and focus be spent on good product development methods. An Incremental Innovation product development strategy will not survive if sound product development practices are not refocused for quicker and more focused developments.

Chybowski, Robert J. “A Plan for the Functional Structure and Management of a Computer Software Development Organization”

June 1978, 36pp
Archival copy only

Cluka, Dave “AdversityU: A Nonprofit Business Plan”

June 2011, 82pp
Archival copy only

Coffey, Anthony, Matthew Kennedy, Scott Sparapani and Jessica Wobschall “Strategic planning for a start-up company”

August 2010, 177pp
Archival copy only

Craven, Charles R. “Development of a Financial Plan Checksheet for New Product Development”

July 1977, 33pp
Archival copy only

Daley, Robert M. “A Study and Practical Application of Material Requirements Planning”

1978, 54pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Damania, Chetan I. “The American Invasion by Japanese Automakers”

Oct. 1991, 103pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Japanese automakers are rapidly increasing their share of the American car market. They have transformed their export-oriented Japan-based operations to full-fledge American companies – “transplants” – with the ability to design, engineer, build and assemble cars in the United States (U.S.). The transplants, which had no domestic capacity in 1981, will build 2.5 million automobiles by end of 1991 and some 3 million by 1994. This massive transfer of Japanese production to the U.S. in less than a decade is indeed a historic landmark in the world automotive industry. It has posed serious threats to the U.S. Big Three automakers – General Motors, Ford and Chrysler. Their prospects for growth are more uncertain today than at any time since 1980, when they pushed for “voluntary” quotas on Japanese imports. Their sales are slumping, and they are being forced to weigh shutting plants, laying off workers and delaying investments. This essay gives a brief history of U.S. and Japanese auto industries. It highlights the important philosophies and strategies that led to the rapid growth of Japanese car makers – especially, Honda, Toyota and Nissan – in the U.S. It compares the Japanese and American approaches to auto manufacturing and analyzes their successes and failures. As discussed in the study, teamwork, communication, efficient use of resources, elimination of waste and continual improvements are the most important ingredients in the Japanese success. This extends upstream from factory to the research lab and design center, as well as downstream to the sales and dealer system . As the Japanese transplants prove the effectiveness of their system in the U.S., the Big Three will have to respond quickly. The study recommends that U.S. automakers should become leaders in globalization by integrating the innovative, flexible thinking of the West with the meticulous, strategic mentality of the East. They must focus on restructuring their management, strengthening manufacturing, reducing throughput, and enhancing product quality and diversity. They can achieve positive results by adopting some of the Japanese strategies and techniques, which can be implemented to counter their Japanese competitors.

d’Auguste, John “Motivational Theories, Principles and Industrial Applications”

June 1976, 96pp
Archival copy only

Daoud, Ghaith, Jonathan Marten, Jennifer Wisniewski, and Uwe Knie “Examining the Business Case of Millwood, Inc.”

Feb. 13, 2007, 99pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis includes a business analysis of Millwood Inc.’s Cudahy, Wisconsin facility. The project team spent two days on-site, working closely with Millwood personnel and conducting research on the company, concentrating on the corporate and local organization that included an evaluation of the organizational structure, customer/supplier relationships, strategic management process, process flow, change management, and existing human resources and quality systems. Using the information obtained from the site visits along with additional secondary research conducted by each student, the project team is making recommendations on process and system improvements that will allow Millwood Inc. to increase throughput while also increasing quality and employee motivation. The team recommends reversing the direction of repair line to increase the continuity of the product flow. This will allow workers to access the current bulk lumber storage area instead of having to restrock individual lumber carts throughout the day. Expected results include an increase of repaired pallet throughput and a decrease of non-value added time, such as material handling activities. A partial reallocation of a material handling position to a quality control function further allows implementing a quality audit system, potentially increasing product quality and thus strengthening the customer-supplier relationship. Changes to the handling of scrap wood are also recommended by moving dumpsters closer to the repair workers and providing screen shields to address employee safety concerns.

Davis, Kelly R. “The Organization for Quality Control: A Study for Change”

Spring 1979, 47pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Davis, Michael B. “Implementing Alternative Work Schedules to Attract and Retain Production Employees in Manufacturing Operations.”

May 2001, 142pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Employers today are facing significant challenges in attracting and retaining employees. With low unemployment and new workforce entrants lacking the skills needed to be successful, maintaining a high caliber workforce has become difficult. In addition, the effect of not managing retention, namely turnover, is becoming more costly. At the same time that employers are facing employment issues, employees are facing new pressures in balancing their work lives with their personal lives. Social changes are driving new needs that often do not align with traditional working arrangements. In order to address both the issues of attracting and retaining workers, and meeting changing employee lifestyle needs, many employers have implemented alternative work schedules. Alternative work schedules provide employees flexibility at managing both when and where they work. In many industries, the change in work scheduling has been profound, as it has redefined how employers manage their businesses and view their people. Yet despite the use of alternative work schedules in many industries, most manufacturing companies have not adapted to the new employer/employee relationship paradigm. This is largely due to the difficulty of integrating flexibility into production operations that are both time and equipment sensitive. However, solutions are available. Two specific types of alternative work schedules, which can be adapted to production environments, are flexible work schedules and compressed workweeks. Employers considering implementing these types of programs can draw upon the experiences of other companies in understanding schedule design options, benefits, concerns, and implementation issues. Additionally, employers can follow an implementation model built from the lessons learned by others. This paper provides a guide for manufacturing companies to use in designing, planning and implementing flexible work schedules and compressed workweeks in production environments. It contains a base of knowledge built from the experiences of other manufacturing companies that have already implemented these types of programs. The social changes, that have necessitated the use of alternative work schedules by employers, are not going to diminish. In fact, the evolution of employee flexibility has demonstrated that employers must continually examine employee needs, and the role of employers and employees in society. Employers must constantly evaluate how they manage employee and business demands, in order to create an environment that meets the needs of both parties.

Dawodu, Owen B. “Administration in Research and Development Organizations”

Dec. 1980, 40pp
Archival copy only

De Teran, Carmen T. “Decision Support Systems: A New Tool for Management”

June 1980, 60pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis is about an area called Decision Support Systems (DSS), that is, supporting the decision process of managers with flexible access to models and relevant information. This approach focuses on an analysis of the key decisions and then the provision of support to managers in making these decisions. This support is possible in complex, unstructured, problem situations and can be used by the manager in conjunction with his intuitive “feel” for the problem and its solution. Since DSS approaches are new, there are still obstacles to their use. While a few of the problems are associated with the growing pains of the state-of-the-art, the more challenging and fundamental ones deal with the inertia of change in general. All of these problems can be overcome by effective planning, coordination and control.

Deely, John “Characteristics that Influence New Software Venture Performance”

Jan. 29, 1998, 135pp, 135 references, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: In recent years, software companies have accounted for the greatest number of small business start-ups among all technology related fields. The industry, in general, is highly fragmented, rapidly changing, and fast growing. As such, it is a highly attractive industry for entrepreneurs, particularly software professionals looking to strike out on their own. The software industry offers many opportunities and thrives on innovation. Its opportunities, however, can be extremely volatile and short-lived. At the onset of this project, the author believes that certain characteristics of a new software venture could minimize the risks in this opportunity-filled, but uncertain, industry. The intent was to perform an academic study of a new software venture performance, modeled after some other general works on new venture performance. The results of the study, then, would identify some key characteristics that can minimize the risk and improve the probability of success of new software ventures. This project first looks at some of the characteristics of the software industry which differentiate new software ventures from new ventures in other industries. Chapter One looks briefly at some software case histories which serve to illustrate some of these characteristics. Some of the characteristics of the software industry identified are rapid change, fragmented markets, low barriers to entry, fast growth opportunities, a unique economy, and a reliance on intellectual capital. The project then reviews pertinent literature with respect to start-up ventures and entrepreneurship. Chapter Two identifies four general classifications of factors that influence new ventures: Business Environment, New Venture Strategy, New Venture Financing, and Entrepreneur Characteristics. Chapter Three takes a look at several research studies related to new venture performance. In particular, three Ph.D. dissertations are reviewed in depth and are used later as a basis for the primary research used in this project. Each study discussed in Chapter Three provides a Model of New Venture Performance. These models suggest a range of start-up characteristics which can affect new venture performance, as well as appropriate measures of new venture performance. Chapter Four draws on the first three chapters to develop a Model of New Software Venture performance. This model proposes that the performance of a new software venture is related to three general start-up characteristics: New Venture Strategic Planning, New Venture Start-up Financing, and Entrepreneur Characteristics. A questionnaire is then created to gather primary research data from some software start-ups. The administration of the questionnaire is discussed in Chapter Five along with a summary of the data collected and analysis of how it relates to the propositions asserted in Chapter Four. In general, the data indicates that new software venture performance is not closely related to New Venture Strategic Orientation or Entrepreneur Characteristics. The results did, however, confirm the proposition that there is no relationship between New Software Venture Financing and New Software Venture Performance. With the survey data affirming only one of the three propositions presented in the Model of New Software Venture Performance, Chapter Six looks at the implications of the survey results and concludes the following: One unique difference that distinguishes the software industry from other industries is that a software entrepreneur can develop a new product with very little up-front costs. Once that product is ready for market, however, the entrepreneur is faced with the same business constraints and considerations, including strategic planning, marketing and sales, as a new venture in any other industry. The last section of Chapter Six closes with a discussion of the implications of this project for the aspiring software entrepreneur. The most important implication is that, although the software industry offers attractive opportunities for software entrepreneurs, there is no formula that will guarantee success in seizing those opportunities. Starting a new software venture holds the same uncertainty and risk as new ventures in other industries.

Delie, Frederick Robert “Understanding American Ethnocentricity and Worker Lifestyles to Better Manage the Diverse Workforce”

June 1984, 206pp, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: The character of the American workplace is changing. Global competition has mandated American companies reevaluate how they do business. “Downsizing”, “retraining”, and “technology-based” have become the buzzwords of the business world. Today’s companies have found that to survive means working smarter and with less employees. Good-paying jobs are rapidly disappearing for those having only a high school diploma. Employers are retraining their remaining workers to be able to effectively use the technologically advanced software tools and production equipment needed to maintain their viability. As workers retire or leave the company, each employer determines which jobs are essential to the company and require refilling. It is in the effort of recruiting workers to refill these positions that American businesses encounter a startling fact. The number of new entrants into the workforce is smaller than it has been in several years. Workplace entrants in the 18 to 24 year-old age bracket is expected to decline from 28.9 million in 1980 to an estimated 23 million in 1995. More dramatic than the reduction in worker numbers is the composition of these entrants. It is estimated that between 1988 and 2000 the number of White non-Hispanic males entering the workforce will be 2.3 million. Compared with the estimated 6.9 million White non-Hispanic women, 3 million Blacks, 1.9 million Asians, and 5.3 million Hispanics who will enter the workforce in the same time period, the White male entrant has become a minority, representing only 11.6 percent of the total. Entrenched in an organizational culture which favors the White male with a European ancestry, many companies are struggling with how to integrate the multi-ethic/multicultural new employee. Changing worker lifestyles further compound this problem. Single parent families, dual-income families, day-care needs for both the child and aging parent, are just some of the additional challenges facing today’s employer in molding an effective organization. Key to surmounting these challenges is a historical understanding of American ethnocentricity, an insight into how worker lifestyles affect their performance in the workplace, an appreciation for the importance of education, and a knowledge of the cultural attributes of today’s workforce.

Dieringer, James Victor “Motivational Technical Employees”

Aug. 1970, 32pp
Archival copy only

Dobrinska, Robert F. “Financial Risk”

Feb. 24, 1979, 38pp
Archival copy only

Donner, Donald K. “Quantitative Methods of Forecasting with Special Application in Forecasting the Demand for Small Power Transformers”

May 1970, 103pp
Archival copy only

Dopheide, Jan “Knowledge Management: Metrics for Evaluating the Effectiveness of Intranets as Knowledge Management Tools”

Dec. 2003, 149pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: In a global environment where knowledge and its usage become increasingly more important every day, many organizations employ knowledge management to manage this valuable asset. Organizations expect improvements in various areas such as an increase of productivity, improvement of processes and the exchange of information, and customer orientation and satisfaction. Among the challenges in the various approaches to knowledge management is measuring the value and the performance of knowledge assets as well as of the effectiveness of knowledge management itself. In part, this can be attributed to a lack of familiarity with methods to promote the application of knowledge in the area by using measures to control knowledge. Due to the fact that various schools of knowledge management have developed over the last years, the student has narrowed the scope of this thesis to the role that intranets in organizations can play in knowledge management efforts and how their effectiveness is evaluated. The proposition of this thesis is that knowledge management efforts in organizations lack the metrics to evaluate the effectiveness of employed intranets. In order to be successful with knowledge management, such metrics need to be developed and implemented into the existing performance measurement activities. So far, literature seems not to focus on metrics specifically developed for intranets. Based on the findings of this thesis, the author suggests the use of a modified version of the Balanced Scorecard framework, in order to evaluate the effectiveness of intranets as knowledge management tools. In the opinion of the author, the existing setups to evaluate intranet effectiveness are insufficient, due to their lack of a connection between the business strategy and the knowledge management strategy as well as their incompleteness in regard to their ability to capture sufficient relevant data on the knowledge processes that are facilitated by intranets. Therefore, the author proposes to use a modified version of the Balanced Scorecard concept, combining the specific knowledge measure presented in this thesis. The result of this new evaluation system should be a Balanced Scorecard for intranet effectiveness evaluation with the following performance equation: Knowledge goal achievement plus internal efficiency plus user satisfaction equals intranet effectiveness.

Dorschner, Rod “How to Gain Market Leadership in a Fragmented Industrial Market: A Strategy for Capturing Leadership in the General Motion Control Market”

1999, 94pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The world economy is in the process of transforming from an industrial focus, to a knowledge and information focus. Companies that strive to dominate in a fragmented industrial marketplace must become aware of the new economic paradigm and the three major trends of globalization, digitization, and deregulation. They should focus on providing knowledge to customers using either a strategy of codification or personalization, both of which allow for knowledge to be reused in finding solutions to customer applications. The modern knowledge-based industrial company should focus on an operationally excellent, product leader, or customer-intimate business model, and should use its knowledge base to enhance that business model. The General Motion Control (GMC) market is an example of one segment of the industrial market. It is highly fragmented with hundreds of companies, each competing for their share of the $2.9 billion market. No clear leader has emerged, primarily because the knowledge required to select, implement, and support GMC applications is too great for any one organization to provide to the multiple segments of the diversified market. Users of motion control who cannot afford the cost of maintaining a knowledge base in-house are forced to seek a GMC supplier who either has the ability to provide extensive pre-and post-sale support, or who tailors their product to fit a particular market niche efficiently. Although consolidation continues to occur, no single GMC supplier has become large enough to provide low-risk, cost-effective solutions for all segments of the GMC market. The key to capturing market leadership in the GMC industry is the ability to provide customers in a majority of market segments with low-risk, cost-effective total motion control solutions. A GMC supplier with a competitive advantage in codified application knowledge, embedded in the hardware-independent control software, and based on a customer-intimate business model, would be in a unique position to change the rules and dominate the overall market. It could do this by developing a competitive advantage in tools that provide the customer with the knowledge required to select, implement, and support GMC applications with minimal risk. These strategies for implementing this concept are outlined in detail in the following pages.

Dorth, Daniel P. “Project Management with Project Appraisal”

Dec. 1971, 65pp
Archival copy only

Dragosz, Steven W. “Management Responses to Alcohol Problems in the Workplace”

Fall 1996, 65pp, works cited, appendix
Available for checkout

Droegkamp, Glenn “The Monetary Mechanism”

May 1977, 20pp
Archival copy only

Duley, Monica “Managing the Integration Process of People During Mergers and Acquisitions”

April 30, 2002, 116pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis is set up to develop a replicable plan to integrate people into new and changing cultures as the result of mergers or acquisitions. Specifically, the exploratory and research phase of the report is designed to identify any additional elements of the acquisition integration process, identify management practices or tactics used to influence these areas, and assist in the development of an integration plan and approach to be used throughout the phases of transition.

As research progressed, it became clear that, although integration plans aid in the successfulness of the transition, it is the elements of the plan that are replicated, not the integration plan itself. The plan must be customized for every merger or acquisition to better address the uniqueness of each. Never will two deals be the same. Even if the deals appear to have the same characteristics, the people involved are different than the prior deal and will not respond to a previous plan in an identical manner.

Along with the plan elements goes a coordinated approach. The approach is the type of integration desired for the deal, whether it is full, partial, or minimal integration, etc. The author has set forth a three-stage approach to integration activities that helps serve as a sample timeframe to be customized to each deal. It clearly covers the plan elements and management practices that should be addressed during the integration process, especially effective management and good communication.


Dyson, George H. “Business Forecasting using Lagged Regression”

Aug. 1973, 50pp
Archival copy only

Dziennick, Thomas J. “An Evaluation of the Business Transmission by a Typical Aerospace Company”

May 1973, 86pp
Archival copy only

East, Guy Madison “Sports Facility Construction: Market Share, Potential and Strategy Relative to the Contracting Firm”

May 1988, 126pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The construction of professional sports facilities has intensified during the past decade. The demand for sports arenas and stadia has created a new market for some contractors and a more competitive market for the leaders. This market is very competitive, and it is theorized that hometown contractors perform the majority of work. However, one national contractor has overcome this barrier and has succeeded in becoming the nation’s leading sports facility constructor. This lead is dwindling though, as another national contractor uses aggressive marketing techniques to win new contracts. This treatise determines the market share of sports facility constructors, analyzes the market potential both short and long term, and used the information to formulate a marketing strategy. The framework for marketing strategies responsive to a growing market include the market penetration strategy, new-market strategy, horizontal integration strategy and geographic-expansion strategy.

Ebbott, Peter Michael “Development and Evaluation of Short-Term Forecasting Models”

May 1971, 38pp
Archival copy only

Eberle, Thomas J. “The Organization Structures of XYZ Corporation: Past, Present, Future”

May 1991, 96pp
Available for checkout

Ebly, Ronald W. “Return on Investment by Mapi and Discounted Cash Flow Analysis”

May 1972
Archival copy only

Ehlinger, Larry “Management Control Systems and Performance Measurements”

May 7, 2001, 114pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: An ever greater pace of down-sizing, up-sizing, right-sizing, acquiring, divesting, and reorganizing characterizes today’s business environment. Flexible management control systems are required which can produce more accurate, more timely, and more relevant information to support the decision, investment, and learning activities. This paper examines the traditional roots and elements of management control systems and performance measures to provide and understanding of their basis. The investigation focus on why corporations still using traditional management systems that focus more on internal goals of cost and efficiency are not addressing the prevailing needs of rising customer expectations by emphasizing time and flexibility. A model is developed which is based on both external and internal performance measures and relates hierarchical components of controls such as quality, financial strength, and cycle time.

Eisner, Dale F. “A Study in Method Improvements”

Sept. 1973, 53pp
Archival copy only

Eliott, Jeanne Kirk “Benchmarking: An Applications Guide”

Jan. 1997, 96pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The recommendation from this study is that Benchmarking can be used by any company as a productivity and performance improvement tool. This recommendation is the result of research and survey analysis. Benchmarking is different from other competitive analysis tools due to open communication between companies. It is not reverse engineering or after the fact design analysis. Benchmarking is a proactive way to obtain information and quickly adapt concepts to make changes in an operation or organization. The four phases of a Benchmarking study: Planning, Analysis, Integration and Action are discussed and divided into the process steps associated with each phase. Applications and examples of successful and unsuccessful studies are provided, with particular emphasis on unsuccessful studies. A survey was distributed to 200 people experienced in the benchmarking process. The survey was tailored to identify and obtain data on the frequency and characteristics of unsuccessful benchmarking projects. The survey was divided into four major areas of interest: Topic Definition and Scope, Benchmarking Process Elements, Documentation and Record Keeping and Management Support. Finally, methods to identify features of an unsuccessful benchmarking activity and measures to avoid failure are supplied.

Ellis, Linda Kathleen “The Wisconsin Electric Power Company Materials Forecasting System”

Nov. 1987, 48pp
Archival copy only

Elmquist, Steven Allan “Predicting an Abrasion Index for Aggregate Construction Materials Based Upon Their Chemical Analysis”

May 1980, 54pp
Archival copy only

Elz, Howard A. “The Management Science Approach to Project Evaluation for the Small Firm”

July 1973, 40pp
Archival copy only

Emery, Michael F. “Quality Cost and Its Impact on Management”

May 1990, 54pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: A major emphasis in many companies today centers on the issue of quality. Some of the many managerial aspects to quality include awareness, commitment, establishing sub-systems, adopting controls and procedures, and communicating results. As with most business issues, quality also has a financial root which can be represented or measured as a cost item. By converting the cost of quality into dollars, quality becomes presentable in a language that is easily understood by management. To effectively manage for quality, one must know the major Quality Cost factors and how they relate with one another. The objective of this study is to define the principles of Quality Cost and how they can be utilized to isolate problem areas and measure the effectiveness of quality related programs. The ultimate goal of this research will be to develop a tool that can be used effectively to provide direction for cost reduction, profit enhancement and continual improvement.

Emmerich, Richard P. “Wage Incentives, Their Selection and Installation”

April 1972
Archival copy only

Feldhausen, Joseph E. “Developing New Equipment Markets and Their Distribution Cells”

July 1998
Archival copy only

Fennigkoh, Larry “Conversion of a Clinical Engineering Department Cost Center into a Profit Center”

Nov. 1986, 59pp
Archival copy only

Flanagan, Tom “Quality Management: Methods and Systems for Metallurgical Operations”

April 1996
Archival copy only

Fleischacker, Robert “Quality Assurance Management”

June 1972, 37pp
Archival copy only

Fleischmann, Gary A. “A Linear Programming Model for Product Evaluation”

May 1978, 55pp
Archival copy only

Flom, Carl N. “Capital Equipment Replacement Considerations”

June 1971, 39pp
Archival copy only

Fote, Russell R. “Creative Problem Solving for Engineering Managers”

May 1971, 51pp
Archival copy only

Fouch, William H. “Motivation”

53pp
Archival copy only

Frahm, Curtis S. “Analysis of Possible Channels of Distribution for a Construction Equipment Manufacturer”

May 1989, 50pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: LaBounty Manufacturing, Inc., builds attachments (grapples and shears) primarily mounted on hydraulic excavators or backhoes. These attachments are used for demolition and material processing (scrap or recycling). The company has been operating for 17 years and has altered their channels of distribution several times. Currently their policy is to sell to everyone. That being; selling direct to the end user and also through Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Distributors such as the local Caterpillar, John Deere, Link-Belt, Koehring, and Komatsu Dealerships. The customer base has consisted of primarily demolition contractors and scrap yards. LaBounty has determined that their mobile shear can be utilized by Bridge contractors to remove bridge decks. However, the Bridge Contractors want to rent the shear through local dealerships. This new market creates additional problems for LaBounty’s existing distribution plan. The objective is to create a new channel of distribution for their product line. This treatise determines the appropriate channel of distribution by analyzing the market potential for both the short and long term.

Fritz, Franz E. “Small and Medium-Sized Business Enterprises in an Increasingly Global Economic Environment”

Dec. 1990, 108pp
Archival copy only

Froh, James P. “CEO Traits Needed for the 21st Century”

Nov. 20, 1997, 38pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to evaluate which characteristics of CEOs will be essential to ensure the company’s current survival and growth into the future. Do CEOs currently running companies know what is expected of the CEO? Does past history remain the guiding force for current CEOs characteristics? The thesis will establish past CEO types, identify the trends that are forcing changes, and establish which key characteristics are needed for the leaders of tomorrow.

Furness, Eric, Jr. “Quality Costs: A Management Tool for Improving Profitability and Productivity”

Oct. 1985, 61pp
Available for checkout

Garelnabi, Salah B. “Student Performance Evaluation: An Approach to Predict Success in College and University”

April 19, 1980, 33pp, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is well known that the measurement of individual ability, achievements, and characteristics offers the most solid basis on which students may be assisted in their choice of studies and occupations. Although individual measurement was once regarded with natural suspicion, research in this field has made such rapid progress as now to command the respect and confidence of personnel officers both in schools and colleges, on the one hand, and on industry, on the other. The movement may, indeed, now be regarded as having established itself as the chief source of information on which educational and personnel officers may rely to aid them in their process of selection and guidance of individuals. In the belief that the field of individual measurement offered great possibilities for improving educational processes, mainly selection, this essay is intended to provide a modest depth and breadth in this area.

Gau, Amy B. “How Managers Need to Change Their Skill Sets to Successfully Manage Virtual Teams”

Nov. 12, 2001, 148pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Virtual teams and organizations are becoming increasingly more prevalent among businesses. The sudden emergence of virtual teams has left managers ill-prepared to successfully handle the challenges as they relate to the non-traditional environment of virtual teams. The skills required for successfully managing virtual teams are:

  • Build Teams and Team Identity
  • Create an Infrastructure
  • Communication
  • Performance Measures and Compensation/Recognition
  • Mentoring and Training Employees Remotely
  • Culture
  • Influence Management
  • Build Trust
  • Watch for Conflicts

An individualized, self-paced course targeted for managers interested in updating or changing their skill sets to better manage virtual teams is included with this project.


Gavran, Russell E. “Effective Pricing Leads to Business Success”

May 1991, 51pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: A business begins to fail for several reasons: Either because the company is selling at too low a price, or the cost of goods sold are too high if the gross profit margin is decreasing. Business failure is also due to a sales volume increase coupled with a cash flow problem. It has been a standard business practice to lower prices and increase product volume and turnover in order to compensate for a lag in business growth and development. However, the additional costs, such as operating expenses, personnel needed to process invoice orders as well as to move products and purchase materials, can cause a business which is already in trouble to plunge quickly toward an inevitable collapse. This paper will demonstrate how an increase in prices, reduction in volume, and efficient use of personnel should lead to a business success. In order to show that increase in pricing and efficient use of personnel are conducive to a gross profit margin growth, other more conventional methods which do not safeguard the success of a business will be compared to effective pricing methods. Also, methods of maintaining and developing effective pricing strategies will be described and compared to the increase in pricing strategy mentioned in Steinmetz’ lectures on “How to Make Your Prices Stick.” Several businesses and companies will be examined in terms of their success or failure due to planned pricing strategies and their subsequent implementation.

Geiss, Gerald W. “Development and Marketing”

March 9, 2005, 102pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Recently, companies have been devoting much attention to core competencies. As will be demonstrated, companies that develop strategies around their core competencies often perform well. Several examples will back this claim. Core competencies are unique for the organization that holds them. However, it is proposed that core competencies of a company are built or based upon common underlying factors. For most companies, these factors would include innovation, communication, knowledge, and teamwork. While core competencies are unique to an organization, the underlying factors can share some commonality. This commonality is reviewed to determine the underlying factors and to identify the core competencies required for new product development and marketing. The correlation between innovation, communication, knowledge, and teamwork and how they relate to core competencies is explained. For example, core competencies are built upon the unique collective learning and knowledge of the organization. Communication is a tool to transfer knowledge from one person to the next. Communication may take place verbally, in written form, or by sharing experience. Teamwork is a means to get people from various parts of the company together so that they can communicate effectively. Teamwork also facilitates the building of knowledge. Ideas can be presented and expanded upon through other team members. Innovation comes from new ideas being generated inside the company. These ideas may come from teamwork or the knowledge that is being created within the company. New product development and marketing can use these factors to create their own core competencies. For new product development, their goal is to create new, innovative products for the company to market and sell ahead of the competition. Marketing’s goal is to find a market for the company’s products and services and to keep existing markets abreast of new products and what they offer to the customers. How is this accomplished? New product development uses new technology to create new innovative products. They inform marketing of the new available and upcoming technologies to find out how the market will respond. Marketing communicates with the customers to find out what their needs and requirements are. Unrealized needs are a good opportunity for the company. Marketing also has the task of determining what are the future market needs, even before the customers realize what they are. Marketing then communicates this information back to new product development. When marketing receives the feedback from new product development, they can determine if the technology is a viable option for the company and its market or even find new markets for the pending new products. When marketing relays its information back to new product development, products can be created to meet both the customers’ needs and requirements and also their unfulfilled needs. This bi-directional flow of information and knowledge helps the company create new, innovative products that have a viable place in the market ahead of the competition.

Ghani, Mohammed Asif “Competitive Intelligence: Insights for U.S. Companies”

Jan. 18, 1996, 171pp, appendices, bibliography
Archival copy only

Gilgen, Russell W. “Marketing in the Aerospace Industry: How it Functions”

Feb. 1971, 102pp
Archival copy only

Godwin, Thomas Charles “Determining Geographical Market Potentials for Consumer Goods”

May 1970, 26pp
Archival copy only

Golembiewski, Richard George “Managing the Engineering Consultant”

May 1983, 54pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: In this era of rapid technological change, many firms are finding it increasingly difficult to maintain technical competence or to keep up with advancing technology. For many such firms, the use of an engineering consultant is a cost effective way of obtaining expertise. This essay examines the reasons why a firm might choose to use a consultant, the selection procedure, contract negotiations, project control, and closeout. Additional chapters examine the specific topics of practical and international considerations as they apply to the consulting agreement.

Golomski, William A. “Quality Control and the Consumer”

April 30, 1969, 54pp
Archival copy only

Gooden, Donald A. “Strive to Achieve Optimal Results : A Project Involving a Small Manufacturing Company”

July 2008, 122pp, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: A correlation exists between organizations (large and small) meeting existing and potential customers’ product pricing (and quality) expectations and the effectiveness of that organization’s continuous improvement initiatives. This relationship has motivated manufacturing operations professionals to identify value-added practices that support continuous improvement efforts of organizations. Lean Manufacturing, Six Sigma, and development of collaborative working environments exemplify the many methodologies that have evolved from efforts to identify effective practices and programs that achieve optimal results.
Attainment of optimal results from manufacturing-related operations requires diligence in identifying appropriate programs that drive non-value-added cost out of business-related operations. Organizations that appreciate this realize verifiable results from implemented cost reduction and quality improvement prograrms. However, meeting the stated challenge is potentially more challenging for small businesses lacking sufficient resources to support their efforts to achieve optimal results consistently.
Take for instance, the XYZ Company, the subject of this paper’s case study. The XYZ Company, a small manufacturing organization, is currently considering the feasibility of continuing to provide parts to a valued customer. Recently, the organization discontinued leasing a crucial piece of equipment that potentially supported the organizations’ efforts to achieve acceptable profit magins. Is investing (or leasing) in equipment the only cost reduction option? Could equipment purchases hide or accommodate existing inefficiencies?
Before investing in additional equipment, organizations must be confident that they are realizing optimal results from their existing resources. This caveat applies to the XYZ Company. The XYZ Company should be confident that the organization is achieving optimal results from their existing resources before purchasing or leasing additional equipment. Has the XYZ Company successfully identified and implemented appropriate efficiency enhancing programs? If cost reduction opportunities exist, what are the appropriate corrective actions? In addition, is the XYZ Company committed to apportion required resources to support implemented continuous improvement initiatives?
In the twenty-first century’s continually evolving, dynamic, and competitive markets, businesses must continually review and enhance their continuous improvement efforts. Organizations that fail to recognize this are destined to capitulate to competitors that appreciate the need to improve continually. In the twenty-first century, organizations’ achievement of optimal results from its manufacturing operations is not an option. A catalyst motivating this condition is the dynamics associated with meeting customers’ expectationsCustomers, domestically and globally, demand that organizations meet their product pricing (and quality) expectations. These conditions necessitate that manufacturing-related operations consistently function as efficiently as possible. To achieve this objective requires dedication and diligence in identifying and implementing programs (and practices) that eliminate non-value-added activities.

Gracyalny, Dale T. “A Study of the Genesis, Evaluation, Selection, and Termination of R & D Projects”

Jan. 1994, 109pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: In this master’s essay, various aspects of R&D project management and R&D decision making processes are critically examined as they relate to R&D project screening, selection, evaluation, and termination. Management science research literature is integrated with personal experience and insights from industrial research managers to operationally emphasize the advantages and limitations of R&D project selection models and the organizational decision processes in which they are employed. The purpose of this work is to examine the complexity of the R&D project selection process in order to heighten the awareness of R&D managers and other management professionals to the numerous factors that must be considered and the many techniques that can be used to select the most promising R&D projects. Hopefully, these observations and results will be especially meaningful to R&D professionals seeking to select R&D projects in a time which combines intensified global competition with increasing corporate financial pressures. The challenge for R&D management is to select and commercialize the R&D projects that will produce the greatest positive effects on the profitability and competitive position of the firm, both in the near and long-terms. Only by stepping up attention to global markets and international technology growth can most technically-oriented corporations hope to remain competitive and profitable. Therefore, possessing a global perspective is no longer a choice for R&D managers and their companies, but rather it has become a technological imperative. Furthermore, R&D must participate in shaping business strategy to achieve maximum return on R&D investment and long-term success for the company. In turn, strategic business units must assist in focusing strategy for R&D. Because of the inherent lack of specificity and the subjective nature of the available data, selecting new R&D projects is often viewed as a “black art”. Some of the R&D project selection and evaluation models can introduce more objective analysis into these technical, marketing, and manufacturing estimates to help clarify differences or similarities of opinion among the decision makers. Regardless of the subjectivity involved in the selection decisions, establishment of relevant and consistent criteria is paramount to viable R&D project screening and selection processes. Such criteria must be based on the interests, capabilities, and risk attitude of the individual firm. R&D opportunities should be examined in precise terms – not necessarily in terms of dollars and cents, but certainly in terms of how the company can gain value in specific ways. While many researchers have analytically described the mechanics of the R&D project selection decision, most neglect the fact that the decisions are made by people functioning within organizational settings. Effective R&D project management requires the management of those interpersonal and group dynamics that facilitate organizational integration. R&D management also needs a good understanding of the project’s priority, technology, and resource requirements. Further investigation is required to understand the human dynamics between the individuals and the corporate organizational units which drive the R&D project selection process. Additional study is also required to identify the interactions of critical R&D project success factors with the highly-charged decision processes leading to R&D project selection and ultimately, project termination.

Grant, James R. “The People Capability Maturity Model®: analysis and application”

April 5, 2008, 186pp, glossary, bibliography, appendices, figures, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract: The management practices performed at an organization have a dramatic impact on its success. Frameworks can provide guidance with respect to the order in which practices should be focused on. The People Capability Maturity Model®, which is the foundation of this thesis, offers guidance in the application of management practices. Each progressive level of the model introduces additional key practices that need to be performed. Consistent application of these practices leads to an increasingly effective organization.

This thesis describes: what the capability maturity model frameworks (CMM®) are; the specifics of the People CMM®; how businesses have had successful outcomes using People CMM®; how the People CMM® ties in with other theories, including Grenier’s model of Organizational Lifecycle and Cameron and Quinn’s model of Organizational Culture; how an organization can evaluate itself against the People CMM®; how an organization can become compliant at the first level of the People CMM® (Level 2 is the first progression with a maximum of Level 5).

Primary research was conducted with subjects in an organization that has a minimal amount of formally defined management practices. A survey used in the research and the analyses of the data focus on: the consistent performance of practices for People CMM®, Level 2; the priority of the practices in comparison to each other; the different views of management and staff with regards to the practices.

The results are analyzed for trends and specific recommendations for the organization are given. Finally, general conclusions are provided for professional managers who want to use some or all of the concepts in the People Capability Maturity Model®.


Gregoire, Brian Remi “A Plan to Limit Products Liability Exposure for Phoenix Product Co., Metals Division”

Nov. 1979, 74pp
Archival copy only

Gruenwald, Clifford F. “Selection of New Product Proposals: Criteria and Analysis”

Oct. 1973, 88pp
Archival copy only

Grutto, Edward Guy “Depreciation: Accounting, Taxes, and Business Decisions”

April 1972, 54pp
Archival copy only

Guasto, Benjamin L. “Financing and Pricing and Industrial Product Line”

May 1975, 93pp
Archival copy only

Gueller, Troy E. “Value-Added Analysis of a Non-Value-Added Activity: Material Delivery”

May 2002, 73pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Over the last 15 or so years a new vocabulary has spread like wildfire throughout the manufacturing industry. Companies have had to change and become better to survive increasing competition from both old and new competitiors. Many people now use words such as Lean Manfacturing, Just-In-Time (JIT), Total Productive Maintenance (TPM), 5S’s (Seiri, Seiton, Seisu, Seiketsu, Shitsuke), TQM (Total Quality Management), 6 Sigma, Kanban, Muda, and Visual Factory as though they had been sent down from Heaven. Many manufacturing businesses have seen dramatic increases in productivity and quality through implementation of one or more of the listed manufacturing techniques, others still have yet to successfully implement any of these approaches. All of these techniques, although different from one another, are ways to steamline the manufacturing process, involve employees, eliminate waste, and reduce inventory. World Class Manufacturers are those that demonstrate they are the best in their industry in the competitive priorities (quality, price, time to market, and customer service). These companies are the ones that all the others are striving to mimic. Benchmarking has shown that the companies on top have done an excellent job implementing many of the listed manufacturing practices and have effectively changed the culture within their organizations. This thesis does not propose any new ideas in the area of manufacturing practices dealing with Lean Manfacturing or Just-In-Time. The concepts are already well written about, explored, and have been proven many times over and over in manufacturing. This thesis attempts to have the reader understand that becoming the best at what a firm does is more than just using the above buzzwords. It is about getting better and continuously improving the company’s operations. The two basic concepts that are key to continuous improvement are implementing “pull” systems or Kanbans and finding and reducing waste or Muda. The best way to explain the concepts is through actual cases where these practices have been applied. Chapters 2 and 3 are two different case studies of companies that headed in the direction of improving the material flow to and within their plants. The case studies detail where the companies were, what they changed to get them where they are today, and then lists some recommendations that could be used to improve their systems even further. Chapter 1 briefly goes through the history of Just-In-Time and explains the concepts of a “pull” system (kanban), the elimination of waste (Muda), and talks about material delivery and management support needed for change. Chapter 4 ends with a final discussion on the best practices that will lead to improvements in a company’s material delivery system and an ideal setup if a company were to start from scratch or totally revamp their system. Getting better at what a company does whether it is producing a product or providing a service is what staying in business should be about. Stockholders want better returns each and every year. Employees want bigger checks and better benefits for their services and customers want chapter, higher quality products and/or services with more options and extras. Companies must realize that achieving all of these can be possible, but only if the company continually improves in everything it does from bookkeeping to manufacturing. Improvement is not a trip, it is a long rewarding journey.

Gundrum, Kari Lynn and Ruth Ann Lund “Case Study: Magnetek Shipping Team- Causes, Analysis, and Cures of Psychological, Physiological, and Behavioral Responses to Team Stress in an Industrial Environment”

Fall 1999, 190pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Cecilia Macdonald, a Sacramento-based speaker and corporate trainer, says, “Employees report that job stress seems to be running their lives, making them feel hurried, irritable, and frustrated.” Stress touches everyone’s life in today’s world on a much greater scale than in the past. The increase in stress has resulted in an increase in stress-related illness and insurance claims. The large sum of money involved in stress claims and loss in productivity has prompted further investigation into the area of stress management. So, stress has risen, the costs of stress have risen and, therefore, stress research has increased dramatically in recent years. According to research by University of Wisconsin, Green Bay Professor John Harris and Lecturer Lucy Arendt, “High levels of stress, if not understood and reduced, predictably result in high levels of employee dissatisfaction, illness, absenteeism, turnover, low levels of productivity, and, as a consequence, difficulty in providing high-quality service to customers.” John Ford, owner of Charlotte-based Leading Well, asserts that, “stressed out employees do not make good employees or family members and indirectly, but in a real way, negatively affect profits.” Stress is a serious mater for employers in the 1990s, and companies are looking for ways to manage it. This thesis is a case study of the MagneTek shipping team. Stress was a factor evident from the onset, so the authors decided to try to reduce stress while increasing the effectiveness of the team. To accomplish this, they chose to facilitate various training sessions in goal setting, communicating, and problem solving. The results of the case study show an improvement in team effectiveness and a reduction in stress. The thesis first provides an introduction and lays a foundation based on stress research before discussing the case study. Chapter Two contains the stress research that includes information of stress terminology, stress models, causes of stress, responses to stress, stress within teams, and the relation of stress and job performance. Chapter Three contains a detailed account of the work Gundrum and Lund did with the shipping team starting with an outline of the original case study plan, a discussion of meetings, and in-depth analysis of the surveys, and ending with recommendations for MagneTek. The closing chapter contains the final observations, conclusions, and recommendations for industry. Stress research is quite young and, therefore, researchers still have a lot of work to do in this field. So far, mainly people associated with the psychology field have contributed to stress research. Gundrum and Lund see their work as an important step in involving people from industry to start providing urgent solutions required by companies. It is critical to bridge the gap between business management and the stress researchers. Bringing together people from industry and the psychology field to conduct studies in stress research will strike a balance, providing research based in solid psychological science and solutions from an industrial perspective. Industry is in dire need of solutions as the costs of stress soar.

Gupta, Kamla Prasad “Quality Control Circles in Manufacturing Organization”

Nov. 1982, 45pp
Archival copy only

Gupta, Venu Joseph “Today’s Manager and His Investment Decisions”

Feb. 1, 1980
Available for checkout
Abstract: The biggest problem in any problem is knowing what the problem is. Therefore the dilemma of today’s manager’s decision-making process is explored in introduction part of this essay. In this portion of essay emphasis has been placed on the ability required by a manager today to view the firm as an integrated whole as a system. Even though for the main purpose of the report dealing with investment decisions should relate to manager in his financial context, it is strongly pointed out in the introduction of this essay that a manager along with being an officer of the firm also acts as a social agent. Before directly dealing with investment decisions, Management Information System also known as data processing has been brought to light as an essential tool of modern management in controlling and directing the course of events and soundness of decision within a business concern. Many a books have been written and thousands of articles can be found on the subject matter of Investment Decisions. It is not the purpose of this essay to evaluate these writings but to advance learning towards this subject by exploring the major proven theories helpful in evaluating proposed investments. The methods that suit certain type of Capital Investment decisions and understanding ranking measures to accept or to reject proposed investments. The cost of capital theory is discussed briefly as it is a vast subject in itself. Only that phase of it is discussed which is considered important in understanding the role it plays in investment evaluation methods. Business managers are concerned with the cost of money capital as it influences the allocation and efficient use of funds in the many aspects of their business, such as investments and related financing decisions. The remaining portion of the essay has been devoted to examining the important and widely used methods of measuring and ranking investment proposals such as payback period, net present value and internal rate of return are explained and exemplified. The methods are well recognized in managerial decision making and therefore for the purpose of this essay the recognition would be accepted as is. A related bibliography is prepared, a major part of which was used to assist in writing the essay. Some of the articles and writings date back to a few years ago while others have appeared in recent periodicals. As the analytical methodology has remained the same over the last years, the older articles handle the subject matter quite well and with up-to-date authority. Controversial approaches to the subject matter are avoided and an effort is made to bring forth the important factors applicable to general industry atmosphere and usable by today’s managers in making investment decisions. The focus throughout the essay is to lead towards making the most crucial decision; to find the optimum investment by understanding and analyzing the elements involved.

Gurchinoff, Stephen T. “Improving Company Systems and Technology to Assist in Divesting from a Single Primary Customer”

June 2010, 120 pp, 79 references, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis document’s purpose is to assist a family-owned injection molding company in improving their systems in order to help the company to reach its goal of divesting itself from reliance on a single, primary customer. The company is not identified, but is instead referred to as XYZ Molding. Research was conducted in order to determine how XYZ Molding can grow and attract new customers. Research focused on business planning, marketing, injection molding best practices, benchmarking, finance, and staffing. Through the course of writing and researching this thesis, it was found that XYZ Molding is capable of growth, but must embrace change to move forward with the topics discussed. This thesis concludes with a number of recommendations for XYZ Molding. The primary recommendations that the company should seek to implement include moving forward with all-business-related plans proposed in the thesis, as well as creating a new website that is search engine optimized, and actively pursuing new business.

Gustafson, Marty “Customer Loyalty Analysis for Manufacturing Industries”

March 24, 2003, 91pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper is a study to determine if the positive effects of customer loyalty on profitability and sales volume seen in consumer industries are also present in traditional manufacturing industries. Current available research and sales data provided from a sample manufacturing company will be analyzed for changes in sales growth, customer retention, sales order margin and profitability. The sample data will test the loyalty theories discussed and provide a plan for other companies to follow when investigating if a loyalty effect can be seen in their industry. When a loyalty effect is present, companies must next analyze their repeat buyers to determine buying behavior of each customer segment. Methods for segmentation and different marketing strategies for each customer type will be shown in order to provide a targeted marketing plan for companies interested in managing for improved loyalty. Finally, several tools that can be effective in improving customer loyalty will be explained and tested. These tools include software and database management systems such as customer relationship management (CRM) and recency, frequency, monetary value (RFM) software. Organizational designs such as customer centric corporate structures will also be discussed as a strategy to improve loyalty.

Haen, Kevin A. and Scott A. Roehrborn “An analysis of the Dot-Com Failures and an Application of their Strengths”

May 2002, 153pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: In the mid 1990s, a revolution began as business leaders recognized the potential ability of the Internet’s World Wide Web in conducting electronic commerce transactions. However, just several years after the dot-com euphoria started, the dot-com crash began, as investors demanded that management return to the “old economy” focus on profits. By 2000, the dot-com collapse reached massive proportions with widespread consolidation among e-commerce companies, and bankruptcy was common. Several recurring themes, including intense competition, lack of capital, and simply unworkable business models, appear to be the basis for many of the failures of the founding dot-com businesses. The failed dot-coms all had a common theme in that they all promised to revolutionize the buying habits of society. Companies such as etoys, Pets, and Fumiture.com had widely recognized brand names but still were unable to succeed. The dot-com euphoria of the late 1990s has now been replaced by concern over exactly how the Internet can successfully be used for business. Brick-and-mortar companies are working to integrate the Internet into their businesses in ways that will be profitable in the future. Because the Internet can be utilized in a broad range of areas, companies must deten-nine exactly which facets they want to benefit from. The challenge is deter-mining which facets of the hitemet can be utilized to add value and enhance company competitiveness. This includes developing the necessary marketing and customer strategies. These areas are critical to success because companies need to determine what markets they would like to serve, and then attract and retain customers. The abundance of dot-com failures should not be used to dismiss the potential of the Internet for business applications. Businesses and consumers still want and need technology and the Internet. Companies such as Amazon.com, Charles Schwab & Company, and numerous other smaller niche businesses have all demonstrated that the Internet can be utilized successfully. While the dot-com explosion may be over, a new generation of e-commerce companies is emerging. Now, companies in every industry are finding ways to utilize and leverage the Internet in all aspects of their operations. The distinction between old economy and new economy companies has been decreasing and this trend will likely continue. Whereas people initially predicted the Internet would reshape the U.S. economy, what is actually happening is that the economy is determining the final “shape” of the Internet. Now, it looks like the Internet is more suitable for extending and complimenting existing businesses, rather than as a replacement for them. Instead of being an entirely new business sector, the Internet is being viewed as a technology, and traditional companies are benefiting from the skills developed by the failed dot-coms. The methodology and strategic steps taken by successful dot-coms was used to develop a business plan for a proposed dot-com startup company, MagicalWedding.com. MagicalWedding.com is an Internet start-up company offering a complete source of wedding related information to consumers. Currently being developed by a creative design team, this Internet web site will allow consumers to do their wedding shopping and planning quickly and easily, from their own home. Detailed information on products and services offered by businesses will be displayed in an attractive and easy to navigate fonnat. Additional tools such as a guest list manager, budget calculator, planning calendar, and e-mail reminders will also be provided free of charge. This will allow consumers to make virtually all of their wedding plans without visiting every business. MagicalWedding.com has a key competitive advantage in that it will provide the only collection of businesses serving the wedding industry in this area. Nothing else like it currently exists. By defining a new market and offering services at a price that beats any other form of advertising, a significant number of businesses will be attracted to advertise on the web site. This client base, along with the MagicalWedding.com name recognition, will provide a huge barrier to entry.

Hahn, Manfred “Business Strategy for Hydraulic Power Unit Business”

July 18, 1999
Archival copy only

Halaseh, Omar J. “Impact of Global Potash Industry on the Arab Potash Company”

May 1990, 107pp
Archival copy only

Hall, Robert Anthony “Modern Business Approach to Sales Forecasting”

May 1971, 48pp
Archival copy only

Halsema, Craig Alan “Managing Engineering Professional Development”

Feb. 1995, 115pp, appendices, notes, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: Engineering Professional Development is one of the most valuable tools that an engineering manager can utilize. Surprisingly, though, there is a paucity of literature devoted to this topic. Resources abound for job seekers, educators and human resource professionals. Yet, there appear to be no materials available to demonstrate how an engineering manager can use engineering professional development to answer strategic needs within his organization. Consequently, this thesis is an original composition which illustrates how an engineering organization should go about determining its distinctive competency, or that which it does exceptionally well. Once this focal point or mission is established, activities within the organization can be monitored to ensure that they support this mission. From a human resources standpoint, the engineering manager can evaluate professional development tools like continuing education, technical society participation and intrapreneurship to ensure that these tools are developing human resources capable of supporting the company’s mission, capitalizing on market opportunities and countering competitive threats.

Hannes, Joseph William “A Study of the Human Side of Productivity”

Sept. 1986, 61pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The topic for this thesis was chosen due to my personal interest in examining the effects human resource has on productivity. Early in my engineering career, I found myself involved in the justification of capital equipment as a means of increasing productivity. Today, I find myself working closely with people in making things happen. In the latter situation, I’ve experienced many instances where an improvement in human relations by itself greatly improved productivity. In some cases, it eliminated the need for better or faster machinery. This situation has repeated itself so frequently, that I became convinced that American industry is not directing its expenditures for productivity improvement into the right areas. I don’t mean to suggest that technological improvements should be restrained. But, I do feel that our human resources can be tapped more constructively. Why American industry finds this a difficult task is the objective of this thesis. While researching materials to support my conviction, I found that productivity had been a popular buzzword in industry since the Industrial Revolution. Since that era, American industry is still struggling to manage its productivity. During the last decade, our productivity rate has declined to the critical point where America has lost its competitive leadership in the world marketplace. Currently, we continue to lose jobs and industry to other foreign nations, notably Japan. The ironic fact is that Japan learned how to optimize their productivity from America. How and why did this phenomenon occur? Very simply, American industry traditionally treats its workers as subservient to management. Further research has shown, that if American industry is to reverse its declining productivity, it will need to change its style of management. It must initially replace its adversarial image among its workers and the government. Next, it must foster creative plans which cause workers to help their company’s to survive. Another prime factor is to get industry, government, and workers to identify their efforts with a common goal. Japan’s goal is survival. Without manufacturing, it could not meet the needs of its people. America’s goal will need to be similar, however, our means of achieving it can be different. Without goals, people and nations begin to stagnate and slide backwards. In order to get workers to “want to” participate in the survival of America, industry and government will need to gain the confidence of the workers. Simplistically, confidence is going to have to be built on trust and honesty. This will undoubtedly be difficult, because our industries are not nationalized. However, it is believed, that the majority of workers can be made to feel secure and wanted rather than self-satisfied. Few people actually reach total self-fulfillment. With this thought in mind, the leadership in companies will need to stress participative and reciprocal style of management. Issues that will help win the confidence of workers are; job security, challenging work, internal training and promotion, praise and rewards, enthusiastic leaders, constructive appraisal, incentives, quality of work life, and two-way communications. Here-in, I have found that people are the key factor in improving productivity. People are responsible for controlling and utilizing resources. People design and operate the equipment and the facility. They design and implement methods and procedures. They purchase and use raw materials. They produce, provide, sell and service products. All these things are provided by people in varying degrees. People are undoubtedly a key factor in improving productivity. A fact which must be repeated is, the company which best understands the nature of its people and of the organization in which they work, will lead in the productivity race. This thesis will help managers lead the way to increased productivity. I feel confident tat it shows that the potential for boosting productivity growth through the better management of people is enormous.

Hansen, Mike “Intrapreneurship: The Key to the Long-Term Health of the Modern-Day Corporation”

May 1988, 61pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: In order to remain competitive in today’s international marketplace, companies must foster a working environment that cultivates creative thinking and rewards its employees based on merit. The paper will define the concept of Intrapreneurship and focus on concrete examples where it has been used to improve both operating efficiencies and overall competitive positions at several American companies. Several different management philosophies will be explored in order to determine the type that is best suited to the Intrapreneur.

Hanson, Timothy J. “Capital Intensive vs. Labor Intensive Distribution System for Expansion Analysis with Mobile Video Services, a Unit of the Destrier Corporation”

Nov. 8, 1990, 119pp
Archival copy only

Harpel, Brett “Influence of Change and Ethics in Modern Organizations”

June 25, 2004, 158pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Corporations undertake change initiatives in response to their environment. Managing these initiatives successfully is often difficult for organizations. Determining what needs to change, the process used to implement change and working with the human factors are three of the main issues that must be confronted during the change process. Change initiatives are undertaken when the organization believes change will provide a benefit and help reach or define the organizational goals. Business ethics have been in the media. Over the last few years some of the largest and most admired companies in their selected fields of business have been affected by their organizational ethics or their inability to adapt to change. Many of these ethical lapses occurred while the organizations were in a state of change. This thesis includes a literature review, which defines and notes the characteristics of both change management and business ethics. Also, a survey was administered to obtain primary research, and to expand upon the literature review. The purpose of this thesis is to determine if there is a connection between successful change implementation and ethics. The author’s hypothesis before researching the topic was there is a direct connection between ethics and successful change management implementation, helping increase stakeholder value. The research results do not support this hypothesis. However, ethics can influence the ability of leadership to implement change, but does not guarantee success. This thesis will explore the shared influences of ethics and change management such as culture, environment, and their dependency on communication.

Harris, David Laing “Make-or-Buy Using Incremental Discounted Flow for Cost Comparisons”

May 1978, 68pp
Archival copy only

Harris, Herbert H., Jr “A Study of Three Vital Areas of Material Management and Their Implementation in a Plastic Company”

1975, 100pp
Archival copy only

Hauke, Thomas A. “The Use of Financial Statements in the Purchase of a Closely Held Corporation”

Aug. 1971, 40pp
Archival copy only

Hayduk, Andrew Joseph “Feasibility Study- Automatic Remote Meter Reading”

Feb. 1971, 76pp
Archival copy only

Hayes, Gregory M. “Measuring and Improving Productivity in the Engineering Department”

March 1985, 51pp
Archival copy only

Heinecke, Kevin J. “An Evaluation of the Practical Application of Business Process Reengineering”

May 16, 2000, 192pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: In the 1990s reengineering concepts were being implemented in organizations seeking new ways to cut business process cycles, decrease labor, and increase profits and market share. One of the original authors to document the basic principles of reengineering was Michael Hammer. His concepts were radical in contrast to traditional change practices in organizations. He claimed the only way to achieve dramatic improvements in organizational effectiveness was to essentially evaluate current processes, tear them down to the basic functions and rebuild new processes suited towards the support of the customer and not internal organizational red-tape. Many of the reengineering initiatives attempted by companies failed or did not achieve the expected level of improvement. Estimates claimed 60 to 70% of all organizations which attempted to reengineer their businesses did not achieve noticeable success. In addition to the lack of successes, many organizations used reengineering as a method to cut staffs and strip away services and core competencies of their companies. Reengineering soon became synonymous with layoffs and cost cutting initiatives. Regardless of the negative examples, there were also many well-documented successes. Major corporations, such as Ford and Mutual Life had implemented reengineering principles and succeeded at improving operating processes. However, due to the negative connotations of reengineering and its lack to generate promised improvements in efficiency or lowering operating cost to the organizations’s operations, the emphasis to use reengineering as a method to address organizational problems dwindled by the end of the 1990s. The author of this thesis is employed by an organization composed of several smaller organizations which were recently merged together. The organization has a vision to make considerable gains in their market by consolidating the efforts of these smaller companies. Several years after the mergers, the organization is still struggling with removing barriers among the different departments and connecting people together towards the corporate goals. These one-time competitors must now work together. Old alliances, differences in methodology, software systems, and cultures have kept any significant growth and synergistic benefits to a minimum, The promise of the reengineering principles and the need to identify solutions and methods for the author’s organization has led the author to investigate the validity of reengineering principles and their application to the organization. To determine the validity of reengineering principles the author investigated the causes of failure and reasons for successes from several sources which performed a postmortem of the reengineering movements. Utilizing the information supplied by these historical cases the author determines if reengineering principles are another management fad, quality initiative, or reshuffling of employees and tasks. In addition the author investigates potential application of current management techniques and technologies to enhance or resolve many of the original reengineering problems. Investigations of the reengineering principles determined there is not one universal method, which can apply to every organization. Company size, product offering, culture, management style all play a significant role in successful application of reengineering tools and methods. Key to a successful reengineering program relies on choosing the appropriate reengineering team, executive management support and commitment, and creating an organizational culture willing to part with old habits and processes and embrace change. Historically, most documented failures have been attributed to a combination of lack of management commitment or inability to overcome existing cultures and momentum of the current business processes. Once these minimal requirements are met the reengineering program can be enhanced by utilizing quality techniques, such as flowcharting and Pareto charts to understand current business operations and uncover non-value added functions. Benchmarking techniques can also be applied to gauge current operations against industry leaders to establish baselines and goals. Technology can also enhance new processes by using data management and workflow software. After understanding the strengths and weaknesses of these tools and techniques a reengineering plan can be developed and implemented. In the final analysis of validating reengineering principles, the author concludes the original reengineering concepts suggested by Michael Hammer were sound. However, it may have been premature for most management techniques used and the technology available in the early 1990s. Most of the failures were due to poor implementation of these programs by management, the inability to stop the organizational momentum, technology and database systems unable to provide appropriate support. By implementing current database and ERP system technology, addressing and managing changes to organizational culture and processes, utilizing quality and benchmarking tools and techniques, and understanding the failures of the past, organizations have a much higher possibility to successfully implement a reengineering program. Using the information obtained by the research and a survey of the author’s organization, the author concludes the case study organization is not in a position to embark on a full-scale reengineering project at this time. The organization needs to address several cultural issues, organization structure, management practices, and ERP consolidation, before attempting to apply the reengineering principles. This conclusion contradicts Hammer’s original proposal to tear down the existing organization processes and start over. It is recommended the organization begin to position itself for making more significant changes in the future. It needs to begin evaluating current processes from order entry to manufacturing by utilizing benchmarking techniques to make qualified decisions to change process workflow. It cannot continue to make minor adjustments to a system burden with legacy processes and non-value added activities. A completely new approach is warranted, but due to the multiple sales channels, minimal staffing, and multiple manufacturing platforms and facilities, changes to processes will need to be addressed in manageable steps without affecting customer satisfaction.

Heltmach, Richard A. “Principal Factors for Consideration in Establishing a Sales Force”

Aug. 1971, 27pp
Archival copy only

Henry, David G. “The Similarities and Differences Between Total Quality Management and Six Sigma”

Sept. 21, 2007, 97pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Organizations that continuously improve are far more likely to achieve long-term growth and profitability than their competitors. Since the early 1900’s, the issue of quality has gone from an obscure concept to the forefront of continuous improvement initiatives. More recent decades boast improved business performance and innovative strategies credited to quality efforts. TQM and Six Sigma are proven continuous improvement methodologies. This thesis promotes awareness of quality and established the need for a quality improvement system in an organization. Next, the paradigms of TQM and Six Sigma are presented in a methodical way. Following that, a dissection of TQM and Six Sigma identifies both separate and overlapping matters. The similarities and differences of TQM and Six Sigma allow organizations to customize their quality tool kit to fit their business strategies, management styles, products or services, customer requirements, and financial situations. This thesis concludes with an implementation strategy for AGCO-Jackson, Minnesota, operations. It combines TQM tools that are encompassing in approach and the tools of Six Sigma that are more focused in scope. The ultimate power of this research lies in the hands of those who understand the importance and broader benefits of a strong continuous improvement system.

Hess, Andrew L. “Deregulation of Electric Utilities in Wisconsin”

July 1994, 54pp, appendix, works cited
Available for checkout
Abstract: For better or for worse, most developed countries in the world have and will continue to encourage deregulation and privatization of public services during the last decade of the twentieth century. This trend is creating some interesting problems and opportunities for Wisconsin electric utilities, their regulators, and independent parties. Examining the results of other industries already deregulated provides some insight into the preferred method of deregulation. The United Kingdom.s privatization of the electric utility industry shows that competition in electricity supply is a successful reality. Overcapacity is a threat to this system and must be managed. The deregulation of the U.S. telephone industry proves several things. First, the justice system is not the best place to accomplish deregulation. It takes far too long to complete, none of the parties involved are satisfied with the results, and when completed very little actual deregulation has occurred. Secondly, the average residential customer is not interested in choosing a service for something that has been a .utility. in the past. U.S. airline deregulation has shown that competition does create lower prices and in some ways greater service. It has also shown that overcapacity and a lack of competitors can be dangerous to the industry. It also shows that potential competition is no match for actual competition in a market with difficult market entry and quick pricing response mechanisms. The cable television merry-go-round of regulation, deregulation, reregulation is another example of good intentions gone bad. In areas with true competition the service was better and the rates lower. Most areas however, had no true competition and as such required regulation to prevent a monopoly from overcharging the public for poor service. Wisconsin faces the same problems that these other industries faced plus a few specific to the electric utility business. Wisconsin must create a system whereby the transmission system and the residential customers remain under utility control. Competition for electricity supply is already started and it must be allowed to move forward without the meddling of regulators. If regulators get too involved through bidding systems, calculating avoided cost, or other tampering with the market system, problems will be created. These problems will take the form of lawsuits which will accomplish little but create wealth for attorneys. Regulators must also continue with a successful method of integrated planning to prevent overcapacity. Accomplishing this transformation from a regulated monopoly to a competitive environment will be very difficult for all parties involved. This means the utilities, the regulators, the consumers, and the independent producers. They all must leave their old way of doing business behind and have the courage to move forward.

Hessenius, Kurt “Improvement of the Johnson Polymer Engineering Team Effectiveness Through Knowledge Management”

July 26, 2007, 113pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis is an applied research effort to improve a typical Design Change Authorization process through the use of knowledge management, enabled through information technology. A case study of the Johnson Polymer Engineering Team’s experience to improve its process to meet the intent of OSHA’s Process Safety Management (section 1910.119 J) is included. The resulting effort proposes the use of an electronic knowledge management tool to streamline and simplify the necessary engineering information flow and record-retention process. The use of current best practices in knowledge management concepts for small virtual project engineering groups was studied and integrated. This thesis covers the general human aspects of knowledge management systems and unique research in the area of knowledge reuse in engineering environments. A discussion of an existing Lotus Notes QuickPlaceTM product as a group respository and portal is included. Specifically, a reduction of the manual effort required to mainting the “paper trail” needed, ranging from the project inception through installation and maintenance, has been sought. The Design Change Authorization process falls under the guidance of Management of Change (M.O.C.) as required by OSHA for chemical manufacturing plants. A typical Design Change Authorization process currently requires a significant level of resources and attention to detail similar to ISO 9000. Johnson Polymer is a specialty chemical supplier and has technical and engineering environments across the globe. Currently engineers collaborate on projects at multiple facilities. This requires improved efficiency in reusing previously developed information. Ideally, this information must be in a format acceptable to two plants in North America.

Heytens, Rhonda Jean “The Human Impact of Automation Systems and Focused Factory Manufacturing”

April 1996, 188pp, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: Traditional industry favored a centralized, functional approach in the manufacture of products. Today’s intense global competition, strained economic conditions, advanced technologies, and societal demands require improved manufacturing techniques and systems. One advancement which has demonstrated success is the focused factory. Factories which focus on a narrow product mix or a particular customer can outperform conventional plants, which attempt to encompass a broader scope. Focus provides specific direction and clear goals which can be readily understood and absorbed by members of an organization. However, drastic changes in management and worker attitudes must accompany focused factory implementation if success is to be realized. Complete involvement and support is required. To gain the maximum benefit from the focused factory, people must understand new ways of managing and operating focused subplants. New authority and responsibility must be bestowed upon managers, supervisors, and operators. Communications between all employees must be enhanced. The intent of this thesis is to support the focused factory manufacturing concept, and stress the human impact that accompanies such a drastic change in manufacturing philosophy. The focused factory and its associated benefits are examined in detail, and current successful applications of the concept are discussed through case studies and examples. The psychological and emotional effects of the “plant within a plant” are explored. Involvement, training teamwork, reward systems and societal implications are reviewed. Finally, personal experiences relating to the actual planning and start-up of a local focused factory are shared. In order to take maximum advantage of the improvement opportunities inherent to the focused factory, (enhanced productivity, motivated employees, advanced technologies, improved process flow and layout, ownership, etc.) all of the organization’s people must be involved. They must be trained in work methods and management practices suited to effective operation in the new environment. New roles must be accepted and performed. Every team member must be educated and trained in new techniques. Although the hardware and technology is important, nothing will ever be as critical as the men and women who make the factory run.

Hill, Edison E. “A Discussion of Corporate Strategic Planning”

July 1970, 27pp
Archival copy only

Hock, Tom “New Product Development”

July 1971, 42pp
Archival copy only

Hodkiewicz, Gerald “Engaging the Workforce in the Execution of Strategic Plans”

Feb, 16, 1999, 55pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Most organizations develop and implement some form of a strategic plan. Typically the plan is developed by a select group of top managers who are expected to carry out the strategy. Frequently the dissemination and execution of the plan is disjointed due to a lack of understanding and commitment by the remaining organization. This thesis focused on a methodology to engage an organization’s workforce in the execution of a strategic plan. The process involved a unique format that enables management to communicate the plan to the workforce. The format can also be used to track and report progress along the way. The research involved a variety of avenues related to improving the strategic planning process. Among them are: • Engagement of the workforce. Using employee involvement teams and input from all levels of the company. • The importance of Vision and Mission as components of a strategic plan. The people responsible for the creation of these components and how they guide the organization. • Identification of Strategic Drivers to identify the tactics that will be used. • Performance Metrics to provide the scoreboard to track progress along the way. • Dependent and Independent variables that drill-down the metrics to individual tasks throughout the organization. • The importance of communication at all levels during the implementation process. • Creation of a most important ‘link’ between the employee’s tasks and the goals of the organization. • The analysis of various existing methods used to document strategic plans and track the results. • The development of a simplified worksheet that provides a step-by-step method to create strategic plans at all levels within an organization. • A test in an actual corporate environment with dramatic results that validate the methodology. This project provides a unique tool that is adaptable to any company or organization. Properly implemented, this methodology could change the way future strategic plans are developed and implemented.

Hodkiewicz, Nicole K. “The Clean Water Act, Its Impact on Business Development, and the Fifth Amendment to the United States Constitution”

Feb. 1997, 115pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis focuses on wetland regulation under Section 404 of the Clean Water Act (CWA). Wetland regulations have been blamed for devaluing business development opportunities and infringing on private property rights under the Fifth Amendment of the United States Constitution. The reason wetland regulations have been blamed is that one can not fill a wetland without a permit from federal and state governments. Reasons for individuals wishing to fill wetlands are varied. More common reasons include residential or commercial development, expansion of an existing plant operation, road building, and landfill locating. What has become known as the CWA was enacted in 1972 and amended in 1977 with the intention of protecting the Nation’s waters from degradation due to pollution. Section 404 of the CWA regulates dredging and filling in waters of the United States. Waters of the United States are not only considered to be lakes, rivers, and streams, but also wetlands. The United States Army Corps of Engineers (COE) is charged with administrating and enforcing Section 404 of the CWA. The COE enforces Section 404 through a permitting process. There are three wetland fill permits available from the COE: (1) Nationwide; (2) General; and (3) Individual. Each permit has limitations associated with it such as size of fill, type of fill, and wetland type. In addition to these permits, the State of Wisconsin has an additional step in obtaining a wetland fill permit: NR-103 Water Quality Certification. To fill a wetland in Wisconsin, one needs to procure one of the federal permits and state water quality certification issued by the Department of Natural Resources (DNR). When applying for a federal 404 wetland fill permit and state water quality certification, documentation needs to accompany the permit application showing that the applicant has looked at alternatives to filling the wetland and for minimizing impacts caused by the filling. If a wetland fill is under two acres in Wisconsin and for a relatively routine types of activity, a federal nationwide permit is issued by the COE. This permit is relatively easy to obtain. State water quality certification is not as easy. In their review for water quality certification, the DNR looks at all the functions of a wetland to determine if the particular wetland filling proposed will be detrimental. They also look at the practical alternatives to filling the wetland. If alternatives exist, chances are slim for the DNR to issue water quality certification even if a federal permit had already been issued. This two step process has been criticized for being confusing and too stringent on the state’s part. The regulations and permitting process have been challenged as violating the Fifth Amendment to the United States Constitution. The Fifth Amendment states: “…nor shall private property be taken for public use, without just compensation.” The challenge comes from the argument that if a wetland can not be used as the owner wishes, then a taking of property has, in effect, occurred. The takings issue has a long history in state and federal courts. The majority of these takings cases do not involve wetlands and were argued prior to any wetland regulations in this Country; however, these are the cases that are returned to and quoted, time and time again, in modern day wetland takings cases. Statistics will be provided in this thesis for federal and state permitting. In Wisconsin, the majority of wetland fill permits issued were for road projects. The second largest amount of permits granted were for Wisconsin Department of Transportation highway projects. The third being utility construction. The majority of permits denied were for residential development. This thesis will explain and examine wetland regulations themselves at a federal and state level, scrutinize the regulation’s true impact on business development, and blend in Fifth Amendment property rights issues. The end result will be a position on the effect of wetland regulations on business development. The findings of this thesis conclude that the federal 404 program works and is generally accepted by people who deal with it from a permit application point of view. NR-103 may need more flexibility. An evaluation of potential harm to uplands due to a policy of “hands off wetlands” needs to be completed. The potential for mitigation in Wisconsin should be explored. Based on the research, the author has found that impacts on business development due to wetland regulation under the CWA are minimal and the CWA works in the needed protection of wetlands. The significant beneficial results of wetland preservation through the CWA outweigh the burden to property owners.

Hoffman, Peter R. “Improving the Effectiveness of Product Development”

March 1995, 120pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: With the unrelenting force of global competition driving industrial organizations, many organizations are attempting to turn their new product development process into a competitive advantage in the marketplace. Many companies have employed individual tools to improve the effectiveness of the design development process but few have employed them within the framework of a guiding set of principles or philosophy. This paper attempts to tie the various tools into a new product development philosophy based on set of principles so that the philosophy can be used to guide the entire new product development process. This paper discusses the applications, advantages, and disadvantages of a set of five tools. These tools include activity based accounting (ABC), concurrent engineering (CE), design of experiments (DOE), quality functional deployment (QFD), and design for manufacturability (DFMA). These five tools are then incorporated into a design philosophy in an attempt to improve the new product development process based on a set of eight principles. Applications of the tools as they support the principles are discussed to obtain an understanding of one type of progressive new product development process. As background, the paper discusses the various functional responsibilities in a modern industrial organization and the importance of early market entry when launching new products.

Holak, Thomas Joseph “A Method for the Allocation of Energy Consumption”

May 1981, 88pp
Archival copy only

Hospel, Aloys W. “Technological Forecasting, A New Tool for Management”

May 1970, 39pp
Archival copy only

Hrdlicka, Scott J. “Sparkplugging: Jumpstarting and Managing Brands in an Over-Proliferated Market”

Oct. 18, 2007, 116pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Sparkplugging is a process of developing and jumpstarting brands that stand out and out perform the competition. It builds focused brands and promotes these brands in ways that minimize the common costs associated with marketing. Sparkplugging draws many parallels between small and large businesses because marketers can learn from the large marketing budget mistakes of many Fortune 500 companies. Although, Sparkplugging strategy is designed for small and medium businesses, large organizations can also benefit by using a Sparkplugging strategy when launching new and emerging brands. For those looking to advertise, like Microsoft, Starbucks, and Subway, Sparkplugging will demonstrate that advertising is not the marketing activity that made these companies successful. The Sparkplugging process begins with branding, and then it takes marketers on a journey that endows brands with personality, identity, and a brand experience. In addition to the internal development of a brand, Sparkplugging addresses brand development in the external environment by giving marketers strategies for positioning brands that will lead their category. After marketers Sparkplug their core brand, Sparkplugging offers the marketers a revolutionary approach to promoting their brands by using public relations and Internet marketing as alternatives to classical advertising.

Hubbard, William W. “New Product Planning”

May 1974, 55pp
Archival copy only

Hug, Gregory C. “Developing a Strategy for Implementation of Lean Concepts in Job Shop Environments with a Blend of QRM, Lean Manufacturing and TOC”

Aug. 2006, 208pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Introduction — SPI history and products — Types of manufacturing environments — Job shop environments — What is Lean? — Main types of Lean – Quick response manufacturing (QRM) – Just in time (JIT) – Toyota production system (TPS) – Theory of constraints (TOC) – Six sigma — Push versus pull MRP systems for manufacturing — Lean systems for the job shop — SPI comparisons and differences to job shop and standard assembly — How could the small manufacturer/job shop benefit from Lean? — Expected organizational gains — Interviews of organizations utilizing Lean — Recommendations: what is the best “Lean” choice for SPI? — Implementation plan for SPI — Conclusion. The thesis defines what Lean Manufacturing is and recommends a Lean strategy that should be implemented for job shop type environments with a wide variety of product offerings and mixed volumes. From the research and practical applications in use today, the data describes what Lean initiatives are best suited for this type of manufacturing environment. In manufacturing settings where wide variety, low volumes, and unpredictable product mix occur the standard Lean principles and concepts do not conform to the “normal” job shop environments. The thesis proposes a strategy and demonstrates how lean can be adapted successfully to the unique job shop/small manufacturer environment. Several job shops/small manufacturers utilizing “Lean” concepts will be analyzed to determine what principles and methods create success and failures. Applying a mix of onventional Lean principles, Quick Response Manufacturing (QRM) and Theory of constraints (TOC) methodologies can provide the solution to meeting the organizational goals. Additional research is presented for successful implementation and the improvements in throughput. The thesis strongly recommends total organizational support to follow the process described by QRM, Lean Manufacturing, and TOC for successful implementation. From the information gained, the applications will be applied to SPI (Service, Performance, and Innovation) Lighting. SPI, located in Mequon, Wisconsin, is a manufacturer of indirect lighting for custom lighting products. Typical applications are light fixtures in shopping malls, churches, schools, and industrial locations. What is unique about the product offerings at SPI are the low products volumes and the unlimited varieties a customer can have. SPI also builds products to suit individual customer needs in a build-to-order environment.

Hulsebus, Randy Kevin “Management Training Opportunities Available in Volunteer Organization”

Feb. 1999, 56pp, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: Today’s organizations have flatter organizational ladders. Managers are charged with more responsibility. They must be versatile, have good communication skills, and good leadership skills. Lateral promotions, project management, and volunteer work are ways to gain experience to be a successful manager. Volunteer work should be included in one’s career plan. The time committed to volunteer work should not detract from one’s personal life or paid work. Seeking meaningful volunteer work is important so that one remains committed to the extra effort. People volunteer for a variety of reasons. New careers can be investigated without jeopardizing the financial security of one’s present position. Usually the volunteer gets a feeling of satisfaction from doing something worthwhile in return for their efforts. Corporate volunteer programs have survived prosperous times and difficult economic times. Volunteer programs improve a company’s image, improve community relations, build teamwork, and increase worker productivity. Some studies have shown that people that volunteer are happier, have higher self-esteem, are more successful, and live longer. Volunteer work can also make the transition to a new community smoother. I started a volunteer clearinghouse at my place of employment, Bemis Manufacturing Company, Sheboygan Falls, WI. The steps used to start the clearinghouse are detailed. Articles published in the company newsletter featuring local volunteer needs are included in the appendix. A survey was conducted on people’s views of volunteerism. Respondents were asked to rate findings in the literature regarding the benefits of volunteerism. Some people’s comments on their views of how volunteerism has affected their careers are listed. Most people felt that volunteer work helped improve skills that would be useful in management and would encourage others to volunteer.

Huntzinger, James R. “A Lean Accounting System for Manufacturing Companies: Establishing Flow Enables Simple, Cost Effective Manufacturing- Lean Cost Management”

Nov. 11, 2004, 419pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: A major objective of a business can be stated as securing profits both in the present and the future. The manner in which a business accomplishes this is to provide customer satisfaction, furnish reliable products and services at a reasonable price and cost, and quality and features consistent with or exceeding the customer’s expectations. Today’s accounting systems are inadequate to provide information required to meet and support these objectives. Accounting has been a business staple for as long as most can recall. But this has not always been the case in business, particularly in manufacturing. Present managerial and cost accounting methods do not provide the information actually needed in operations. They most definitely do not supply a lean manufacturer with information needed to properly manage flow operations. The purpose of this paper is to discuss the failure of traditional cost and managerial accounting methods using both current and historical context; develop the importance of the relationship between the physical lean enterprise and accounting (or in the terms of this paper, cost management); and present specific methods and how and why they function effectively for a lean enterprise. This thesis presents an overview of flow manufacturing or lean manufacturing along with an overview of why current managerial accounting methods fail and from where they evolved. Also, a review of performance measures will be presented. They are an important part of operations and also a significant reason management accounting techniques came into common use, particularly standards and overhead allocation. These overviews will create a context to better explain the methods that have been developed to support a lean operation with the information it needs to operate more successfully.

This paper will prove that traditional cost and managerial accounting does not fulfill the needs of a lean firm and that three main criteria must be established to develop and execute an effective cost management system for the lean enterprise. First is the absolute need to design, implement, and establish flow manufacturing as a business practice and method of operation with emphasis on understanding what is behind the “right-design” of a lean system. Second, as Alexander Hamilton Church developed, is the direct and accurate application of costs to products and product lines. This application is also associated with the current concepts and methods of value streams or focus factories, and understanding the direct incidence of costs. The third criterion, which unfortunately was not available to Church, is the basic personal computer and spreadsheet software — both are broadly available, simple to use, and very inexpensive.

A model factory will be constructed to illustrate an operational example to which the new lean accounting methods will be applied. The operation factory model will be a small engine manufacturer which machines and assembles small air-cooled single cylinder engines for commercial and industrial use. Crankshaft machining will also be “zoomed-in” on to illustrate physical flow operations to which critical understanding of how the costing methods will be applied must be visualized. The key to achieving lean cost accounting (or cost management) through understanding the physical operation is discussed and will be absolutely essential to applying the costing techniques presented and discussed throughout this paper. Although repetitive manufacturers are also the focus of this paper the writer believes that the methods, ideas, and procedures presented in this paper can be applied across many different types of manufacturing scenarios although they are not discussed in the context of this paper.

With the development and implementation of focus factories, value streams, and cellular manufacturing, direct and accurate cost associations are simple and substantially fewer in number. This philosophy and method developed and discussed in this paper is a combination of Coase’s Theory of Transactions and Dennis Butt’s analogy of the Toyota Production System being a system of gear trains. The method developed to achieve this takes an updated version of Church’s philosophy and methods and applies it to the philosophy and systems of a lean manufacturing environment. In accomplishing this method both Coase’s Theory and Butt’s analogy become a reality within the focus factory and value stream environment. This paper will travel through past, present and future to prove what changes must take place and what design foundations are required to understand and implement both the techniques and principles required to have an effective cost management system for the lean manufacturing enterprise : right-designing the system, properly executing the system, and continually improving the system.


Hying, Clement F. “A Three Step Marketing Process for Technologists”

April 15, 1998, 108pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: In today’s business environments, technologists are often called upon to do more than just analyze some function or determine the performance parameters of a product. This is especially true in the small business environment where people wear many hats. It is therefore crucial for the technologist to possess a broader understanding of many other areas of business in order to contribute to the success of the company. The role of marketing in the development of winning products is particularly important. With that in mind, this paper proposes a Three Step Marketing Process for Technologists. This three-step process is derived from the writings of several noted authorities on product development and marketing and is intended to provide an understanding of the necessary elements for successful development of new products. Each step addresses one of three key elements, timing, knowledge and action, that contribute to the growth of the business. Timing, the first step, is related to the who, what and why of the business. What and why relate closely to the management’s reasons for being in business in that what is the product offering and why is the overall goal of the owner. The factors surrounding who relate directly to the customer and start to clearly define the product offering. In order to coordinate the timing aspect, the who, what and why must be understood. After all, no one succeeds when they try to take a profitable, saleable idea to market too early or too late. The second step in the process is related to the gathering of knowledge. It takes the technologist through several methods for obtaining information regarding the customer. In this age of information the amount of raw data that can be collected is phenomenal. There are also many different methods for gathering the information from many different sources. In order to avoid being buried under this pile of data, the technologist must be able to sort through the processes available and choose the one with the most “bang” for the buck. To that end, a chart comparing various properties such as cost, relative information and time frame is provided. The third step combines the essentials of timing and wisdom of knowledge into a plan of action. This element is the culmination of all the efforts that went into understanding the customer. Without action, nothing gets done. A great idea will not survive if it is not acted upon. It is therefore crucial for technologists to have an understanding of the action plan as well as contributing to its execution. The four elements come together to form a tetrahedron which can be defined as a basic business element. This element is held together by technology with the role of the technologists to balance the unit so the company can prosper in a sustained manner. This process is then applied in a case study to illustrate how the marketing can be understood. This understanding will allow the technologist to make better decisions with regard to design and production, which will in turn reduce the time to market and increase the likelihood of success. Therefore the technologist will enjoy greater productivity through a more comprehensive approach to both marketing and product development. Finally, the following statements form a set of fundamental thoughts for the technologist to remember: Action is power. Growth is the future. Knowledge is promise. Timing is everything else.

Ihlenfeld, Russell Edwin “The New Product Force: Sources or the Creation of New Product Ideas”

Aug. 1971, 44pp
Archival copy only

Ingalls, Kenneth “A Study of the Business Policies of Graham Transmissions Company”

June 1977, 47pp
Archival copy only

Janssen, David Carl “Measures of Survival Profit- An Operational View”

Oct. 1990, 1 vol., various pages
Archival copy only

Jarosz, Michael J. “Higher Performance Work Organization (HPWO) and New Product Development: Requirements for Efficient and Confidential Interaction”

May 18, 1999, 116pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Companies are incorporating the concepts of a High Performance Work Organization (HPWO) with the goal of improving product quality and increasing process efficiencies. This is achieved by “flattening” the organization and empowering the front line workers to make daily decisions about the operation. This type of organization is becoming more prevalent in companies with a union hourly workforce. The union believes a partnership between themselves and management will be more beneficial than an adversarial relationship. Companies that have incorporated some type of HPWO system have outperformed similar companies on average of 30% to 40%. A HPWO is most beneficial in an environment where the resulting product(s) usually do not change or only contain minimal change each model year. However, many companies rely on new products to ensure their future in the market. The question arises, how can a company utilize the concepts in HPWO to improve the new product development cycle? Will the knowledge and expertise gained on the manufacturing floor provide an advantage in developing new products? A concern with involving additional people from the manufacturing floor is that new product information will not remain a secret or confidential. To most companies, keeping new ideas or products confidential until the introduction date provides a competitive advantage in the market. If a new product is revealed early, a company may not obtain its full financial reward, or possibly not recoup its development cost. HPWO is an enhanced form of empowerment. The main difference is that instead of just having people control their own work area, the front-line (union) workers, through their elected officials, participate in organizational, structural and corporate decisions. HPWO develops a partnership between the hourly and salaried workforces. The goal is to get from unilateral decisions (management or labor decides independently) to joint consensus. Ray Marshall identified eight key elements of a HPWO which are: effective use of all company resources, concern for quality of products and services, participative management style, flexibility, positive incentive structure, leading-edge technology, well-trained and educated workforce, and an independent source of power for workers (union). In a HPWO, workers are placed in self-directed work teams. These teams are responsible and accountable for their daily activities that are centered on achieving the company’s objectives. Teams can handle greater amounts of responsibility than an individual, thus outperforming and achieving greater results. Within a team, some members are given additional assignments that allow them to participate in cross-functional, organizational teams such as safety or quality, which address corporate issues, policies and initiatives. The expected outcome of a HPWO environment is not only increased productivity and product reliability, but also a satisfying and trusting working environment. The idea is to have a collective team working to provide a service or product to the market that overcomes the real threat – Competition. New product development groups have traditionally worked away from the manufacturing sector of a company. There are some companies that practice concurrent development where the design and process are developed simultaneously. Regardless of the engineering structure (traditional, functional, project / product orientated, and matrix), engineers have a desire to design and develop a new system / product, and then ‘hand it over’ to manufacturing to produce. In fact some engineering organizations are not structured to interact or involve the manufacturing sector until late in the process. This late interaction usually results in increased start-up costs and a less than optimal process and / or design. Keeping information secret or confidential is a challenge for most companies. The reason for this challenge is people. Many people have a tendency to discuss aspects of their lives with others. And since a great portion of people’s lives is centered around work, confidential information may be revealed consciously or inadvertently. What companies fail to do is develop safeguards to ensure vital information is kept secret. First, companies need to recognize which information (such as a trade secret) should be confidential, and which information can be general knowledge. Then, companies need to develop a system that ensures vital information is kept away from both internal and external third parties. Confidential information should be revealed on a need-to-know basis. If people are exposed to confidential information, not only should confidentiality agreements be in place, but a reminder of confidentiality and its importance (and the consequences if information is revealed) should be periodically presented to all employees. Integrating the HPWO concept with new product development is a challenge because there is a clash of cultures and ideals. The HPWO work teams strive to make the current process better by improving efficiency and consistency. New product engineering creates change in the current manufacturing environment by implementing new products and processes. Workers get frustrated because ‘nothing stays the same,’ while engineers are frustrated because manufacturing resists change. So how can a HPWO environment be meshed with the product development environment to create an improved and efficient product development cycle? The importance of new products must be communicated to the whole organization by the leadership. Once everyone understands the importance of new products, work teams will need to budget time (with the help of the organization) and give some priority to new products, and be willing to become involved in the development process. To accomplish this, each work team should assign one member to be a new product representative. This person would interact with product and process engineers concerning future changes to their work area for the incorporation of future products. The attitudes and roles of engineering personnel must also change. Product engineers will need to improve their relations with the manufacturing floor and involve workers early in the development process to obtain feedback regarding future designs. Manufacturing engineers need to evolve from a process decision-maker to a decision coordinator. The work teams need to have input on future changes to their respective work areas. In fact, the product methodology process engineers follow when executing a project should include provisions which ensure there has been involvement of work team members and the manufacturing sector. A healthy relationship between the engineering group(s) and the work teams is essential to ensure proper information transfer and to obtain the desired product development outcome. Also, proper information transfer is reliant on a known path of communication (or contact) between the groups. Without a known path, frustration may set in, causing a stressful relationship or the development process proceeding with limited or improper information. The organizational structure in the product development world will need to be conducive for information flow. A structure that ensures proper interaction between the product engineers, process engineers and work team new product representatives needs to be in place. One method to create this interaction is to have process engineers that are dedicated full time to new products. These engineers, known as new product manufacturing engineers (NPME), would be the liaison between the design engineers and the work teams. These NPME’s can either report functionally to the manufacturing sector or the engineering group. Finally, the evaluation and reward system should be modified to include measurable targets for each department for implementing new products. The whole workforce should benefit if the targets are achieved, or be penalized if the targets are missed. If new product implementation is important to a company, then an appropriate reward system should be established to take this into account. To keep new products confidential in a HPWO environment, or at least minimize exposure, certain requirements should be established. First, all employees, union and salaried, must sign a confidentiality agreement. Without agreements for everyone (with appropriate consequences), the importance of secrecy may not be established for all workers. The leadership must also remind employees periodically the importance of confidentiality to ensure the health and long term objectives of the company. New product information should be conveyed to people on a need-to-know basis. Projects would be divided into sub-projects, with interaction between engineering and a particular work team(s) limited to the appropriate topic(s). There is no need to convey information on details of a project to a work team or an individual, especially if no feedback expected. A company needs to limit the ‘for information only’ participation. Most companies have a product development facility or designated area that separates engineering from other operations. Although the facility may be secure to keep outsiders from gaining access, the procedures to keep information secret may not conceal pertinent information from others within the facility. Prototype parts, drawings, calculations, etc. should be segregated by projects, and steps taken to keep project information on a need-to-know basis in tact. The manufacturing facility must also take steps to conceal new product components and systems from internal third parties. Manufactured new product parts should be stored in a separate, secure location away from current production items. These parts should be removed from this location and staged at the assembly points just prior to a preliminary build, thus minimizing the time on the floor. If possible, it would be beneficial to conduct preliminary builds in a secure (remote) location away from current production. If not possible, the build should be conducted on an off-shift. The goal is to minimize exposure of the new product(s) to the whole manufacturing facility. Overall, there are many benefits of integrating the HPWO environment, especially the front line workers, into the product development process. Improved information flow and knowledge transfer can improve the chances that a new product will be manufacturable when product launch occurs. However, these benefits may be counteracted by the probability that confidentiality will not be maintained. Although companies can take steps to minimize exposure to information ‘leaks’, the involvement of additional people in the development process has decreased the chances of keeping new products confidential.

Jeter, Mark L. “Ice rink management and youth recruitment: a study of youth development strategies in speed skating”

September 29, 2008, 158pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this research study is to determine if age is a determining factor in participation levels of youth in entry-level speed skating programs. The investigation of ice rink facilities’ management strategies and the administration of surveys to elementary and middle school skating participants make this study both a qualitative and quantitative research effort. The survey data collected represents the quantitative portion of the study. The data suggest that age of recruitment is not a determining factor in the participation levels of youth under the age of fifteen.

The qualitative interview data collected from ice rink management suggest that youth development is either not a focus of operations or that widely-used methods in the field of after-school sports programming have not been adequately adopted to enhance the success of the programs.

This study gathers a wide variety of information about speed skating, rink management, facilities management, and youth activities programming. The study can aid the various rink facilities (short track and long track oval), US Speedskating, and the United States Olympic Committee who may use this information to further their goal of fostering the Olympic aspirations of underrepresented groups such as minorities and inner city youth. The author offers suggestions for further research in areas identified as critical to future program success.


John, Shajan Mathew. “Improving Work Center Utilization Through Effective Production Scheduling”

May 1994, 105pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Johnsen, David S. “Customer-Centric Innovation: An Invented or Reinvented Marketing Best Practices Model”

March 30, 2007, 82pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Products become successful in the marketplace through the alignment of an infinite number of variables. Most often the critical variables to the product’s success were difficult to predict and plan upon. Yet, when critical variables come together and synthesize into innovation, success shines down upon the product and those marketing the product into new business trends and possibly new business models. Firms are constantly on the lookout for these new business trends and new business models to aid the innovation process. One process has recently come to the forefront that addresses a company’s aversion to innovation. It is called Customer-Centric Innovation (CCI). CCI uses a customer-focused approach that fosters a mutually beneficial partnership where the key customers enjoy perks and developmental input and where the company enjoys valid metrics and forecasted current and future sales. This thesis researches other customer active processes, such as, customer-active paradigm (CAP), lead users, design inspired enterprise, customer integration, and experience innovation to determine whether CCI is either inventing or reinventing a best practices model for marketing new products and reaching success. Additional research conducted for this thesis looks at innovation strategies, such as the strategy wheel and the market development life cycle. Research innovation strategy sheds light on the fact that a firm must immerse itself in innovation to reap the rewards. A final element of research studied Malcolm Gladwell’s The Tipping Point: How Little Things Can Make a Big Difference to provice a sociological angle on CCI. Analysis of the research shows that companies continuously look for ways to be more competitive. This intense competition is most noticeable to organizations that vie for the leadership position in mature markets. Mature industries find that their focus on cost-cutting and quality strategies do not bring them to the leadership position. Producing nearly identical products, competitors in mature markets often find themselves in a damaging price war, which may lead to a slow decline for a company. Furthermore, the research conducted shows that CCI is based on similar theories: Von Hippel’s CAP and Lead User, Lojacono and Zaccai’s Design-Inspired Enterprise, Fischer Frankemö, Pape, and Schween’s customer integration, and Prahalad and Ramaswamy’s experience innovation. The common thread among the researched models remains this truism: the customer who has done the groundwork to provide the appropriate information for use by a company becomes the customer who possesses innovative concepts and products that he or she created himself or herself. To seek our new trends, new ideas, and new product developments not easily copied by the competition or even identified by the competition is the way of CCI, a reinvention of a customer-driven best practices model. In the author’s opinion, CCI is a reinvention due to a predominate thread of seeking out customer interaction to produce profitable innovative product ideas found in similar business process models mentioned above. The researched business process models all preceded CII. In the author’s opinion, it is not that customer-centric innovation is revolutionary, but that our business environment is hyper-revolutionary such that the tried and true theories are no longer valid. Customer-Centric Innovation reinvents itself as a best practice strategy centered on the customer as it adapts to the ever-evolving marketplace.

Johnson, Donald Vernie, Jr. “A Discussion of the Effects of Inflation on Engineering Economy Studies”

Feb. 1987, appendix
Archival copy only

Johnson, Keith A “Implementing Lean in a Small Organization: Is it Worth it?”

July 22, 2005, 164pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Lean and other organizational improvement initiatives such as Six Sigma and Theory of Constraints are the hot topic among organizations looking to improve their competitive advantage. This is especially true among organizations that are facing stiff competition from low wage countries such as China and India. The books and articles that document this trend, the methodologies of implementation and the success stories mostly focus on large organizations. This leaves the small organization wondering if Lean is also for them or is it just a theory that applies to larger organizations? The focus of this thesis is therefore to prove that Lean is advantageous for small organizations and its implementation is worth the effort. Lean, simply stated, is a methodology for eliminating waste from an organization’s processes and operation. Waste is often defined as any activity that does not change the shape or function of the product or an activity that, if listed separately on the customer invoice, the customer would not be willing to pay for. Lean seeks out this waste and works to eliminate it using several different tools. These tools include 5S, set up reduction, total productive maintenance, error proofing or Poke Yoke, work cells, and of course, value stream mapping. Each of these tools can provide significant benefit to the organization by streamlining processes, improving the flow of work through the organization, and eliminating waste from the processes. All of these tools have been documented as having significant impact in large organizations. Their impact on small organizations can be just as profound. Implementing Lean is not without its challenges. The most significant of these is changing the organizational culture. This typically does not happen without top management support. Top management support is especially critical in small organizations due to the likely involvement of the ownership in the day to day operations of the organization. Failure to gain this support will result in certain failure for the implementation. In the end, it will be proven that Lean can be implemented in small organizations and that the efforts required are worth it. This proof will be offered through the primary research conducted for this thesis in which the concepts of Lean were put to the test in small organizations with satisfying results.

Johnson, Robert Charles “The Criteria for the Selection of Middle Managers in Manufacturing-Type Organizations”

1981
Archival copy only

Johnson, Roger Wayne “The Just-in-Time Philosophy of Manufacturing”

Nov. 1986, 65pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: A revolution is happening in American manufacturing. It started in the 1970’s and is gaining momentum in the 1980’s. The roots of the revolution lie in the need for businesses to be internationally competitive. The impact will spread from the factory production floor, through stockrooms, suppliers, labor and unions, engineering, marketing, and ultimately to the consumer. Few aspects of traditional business methods will be untouched by the revolution. The prize of success will be the survival of manufacturing in the United States. The culture and resource conditions of Japan have given birth to a manufacturing concept that is humbling in its simplicity. It is logical, rational, and beautiful. It is the reason Japan can produce at significantly less cost than the United States. It is the relentless pursuit of waste elimination. It is the “Just-In-Time” concept. This document will describe the international market conditions, and how they developed, followed by a basic explanation of the Just-In-Time principle. The final chapter will address JIT implementation with its advantages, pitfalls, and problems. The goals of the document are to convince the reader that there is an immediate need for American manufacturing to change, and to offer guidelines for designing and implementing the JIT philosophy.

Jorgensen, David G. “ISO 9000 Certification: A Contrarian View”

Oct. 28, 1998, bibliography, appendices, tables, figures
Available for checkout
Abstract: ISO 9000 certification has been a popular topic within international business circles since its inception in 1987. The certification, once (erroneously) billed as a ticket to entrance to the venerable European Community, has now become as controversial as it once was vogue. The main criticisms and concerns are over the content, benefits, and administration of ISO 9000 certification as it has evolved over the last several years. There have been many pages in business and academic journals allocated to discussion of the benefits of ISO 9000 implementation and certification. This thesis briefly reviews these well-documented attributes, and thoroughly explores the “down side” of ISO 9000 certification. Several different mixes of ISO 9000 program development and certification pursuits are discussed and evaluated. In the author’s opinion, a viable middle ground exists. This consists of implementation of the elements of ISO 9000, but not pursuing the actual certification with its associated costs and overheads.

Jungbluth, Leroy F. “A Small Company’s First Formal Market Plan”

May 1972, 37pp
Archival copy only

Jurkowski, Keith O. “A Product Development Guide for the Small Company”

Aug. 1978, 43pp
Archival copy only

Kachelek, Robert “Commercialization of Electronic Oil Injection for 2-Cycle Marine Engines”

Dec. 2001, 112pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The products that we use today were once just an idea. An individual with a vision for the future, or a solution to a problem, recognized the possibility to do something differently and took action. Take an idea and add opportunity, motivation, education, and some skill and you have the ingredients necessary to develop and commercialize a new product. This thesis is a case study in how to start a business around an idea for a new product. The idea is Electronic Oil Injection for 2-Cycle Marine Engines. And, the business that was formed is Marine Solutions Incorporated. The thesis, the product, and the business developed together. All of the efforts that went into developing the product and starting the business went into the thesis. All of the research for the thesis contributed to the development of the product and starting the business. The thesis explores and details the process used to help develop a new product and start a new business. The first step in the long road from an idea to saleable product is engineering development. Designs, working models and tests are required to see if the idea is feasible. Materials and suppliers need to be identified and costs need to be estimated. A patent search is conducted during development to assure that the idea does not use technology that is already protected by patent. Successful development is a prerequisite to continue the process. The second step is to survey the market to check for interest. A market survey is conducted to learn how buyers would respond to the idea under development. The survey gathers information on initial reactions, potential market size, competition, price, and distribution channels. Brochures explaining features and benefits, photos, and working models may be necessary to help buyers answer the survey questions. A positive market response here is the next prerequisite to continue. The third step is to consider a structure that will enable you to conduct business. A business structure is needed to buy materials and services, sell products, pay wages, limit personal liability, and pay taxes. There are several structures to choose from with ownership, tax, and liability issues being some of the major concerns. The fourth step is to finalize designs, and develop and implement production and marketing plans. Product costs, production plans, selling price, sales goals, distribution channels, and promotion methods all have to be finalized. A market test with a limited number of products may be desirable before committing to mass production. The fifth and final step is to commercialize the product by making it available to the general market in significant quantities. New product announcements, magazine articles, and advertising promote the product and the company. Patience is required to develop and nurture customers. Each sale is important and prompt service and support is essential in building relationships and a good reputation. Persistence and frequent contact is absolutely required to make initial sales and repeat sales. In practice developing a new product and starting a new business is not truly a series process. The series process outlined here and described in detail in the thesis only helps to assure that important steps are not overlooked. Many things happen or must be attended to concurrently. Final tests must be finished before the product can be announced. Announcements must be made in time for the selling season. Product must be built while arranging for advertising and reading mailings from the Internal Revenue Service. Installation questions must be quickly resolved while calls to develop new sales are waiting to be made. Personal stress levels rise, and relationships are strained as the hours spent on the product and on the business increase. However, despite all of the work, and all of the additional stress, new products and new businesses are successful because of good planning, careful execution of plans, and persistence. This case study thesis explores and details the process used to develop the Electronic Oil Injection product and start Marine Solutions Incorporated. The completed work is a valuable reference for others with an idea, and the opportunity, motivation, education, and skills to develop a new product and start their own company.

Kakoczki, Richard J. “Managing the Threats and Opportunities Provided in this Era of Environmental Awareness”

July 25, 1992, 121pp, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: Protecting the company from environmental threats is one of the most pressing problems facing the manager today. No longer can maximizing profits be the only or even the major concern of management. Currently, the manager faces pressures from the government, which passes new laws regulating the emissions from the company’s plants and its products, from the environmentalist who both harass and sue the company and from its customers who are demanding environmentally safe products. The impact of the environment affects everything the manager does. The manager must consider the environment when deciding on new plant sites, suppliers selection, product performance, waste disposal, and shipping of the product. This paper looks at the currently known environmental problems including air pollution, water pollution, toxic waste, acid rain, stratospheric ozone depletion and the greenhouse effect and their effects on management’s decision making. However, this paper deals with management strategy to survive and prosper in these environmentally conscious times. It’s not a paper on environmental law. Managers must become more actively involved in the environmental movement. They must be involved in the legislative process to make the company’s views known, must work with the press and the public they represent to keep them informed of the company’s environmental efforts, must have a strong R&D competence to take advantage of market opportunities caused by people’s concern for the environment. Lastly, managers must establish a zero emissions target for its products and manufacturing processes because the environmental protection standards are collapsing so fast that any target greater than zero will not be acceptable to the government and to the environmental groups in the future.

Kandler, James. “Market and Investment Potential of a Blood Pressure System Tester”

April 1983, 54pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: There has been a new medical product developed that has never been marketed before. The market projections show a small market that is expanding at .65% per year. Peak sales of $60,000 per year occurs after four years. This small market will not allow competition to enter the market easily. It will also not allow much margin for commissions or large sales efforts. Therefore, mail order sales is considered to be the optimum method of distribution. To finance this product introduction the entrepreneur will have to obtain $25,000. The use of a loan for 80% of the required capitol will allow the investment to be leveraged to produce a greater rate of return. Incorporation under subchapter S will further the rate of return since corporate losses can be used to reduce tax obligations. A 29% internal rate of return or net return of $7,620 then is projected over and above the 15% cost of capitol.

Kandler, William C. “A Case Study: Implementation of Simultaneous Engineering in a New Engine Project”

May 1993, 113pp
Archival copy only

Karnopp, Paul H. “Business Recommendations for Pacific Equipment, Inc”

May 16, 2004, 127pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: In this paper, the author developed general business recommendations for an organization called Pacific Equipment. Pacific Equipment is a new, small, entrepreneurial firm attempting to enter the foundry equipment market. In this paper, the author studied two areas in detail in order to develop effective recommendations. These two areas of detailed study include the foundry industry and entrepreneurship. The first area of detailed study is on the foundry industry. This author studied not only the history, but also the current state of the foundry industry. According to the review of literature, the foundry industry is one of the oldest industries known to man with its roots in the beginning of known civilization. Today, the modern foundry carries out three major functions, which include mold making, metal melting and pouring, and casting cleaning and preparation. The United States and China dominate the foundry industry today with a total production of 28 million tons of castings. The foundry industry serves a diverse group of customers including the automobile industry, housing industry, railroads, and construction industry. Even though the foundry industry serves a diverse group of customers, the foundry industry is a low growth industry with production expected to increase only 1.2 percent over the next few years. Large, multinational corporations with large capitalization characterize suppliers of equipment and supplies to the foundry industry. The second area of detailed study was on entrepreneurs. Entrepreneurs create new products or services, identify and gather resources to produce and see that product or service, and take on personal financial risk in order to sell that product or service. Entrepreneurship affects and is affected by four areas of business which include strategy, marketing, organization, and management. According to research, entrepreneurs should pursue a differentiation strategy in order to increase their chances of success. In order to define and communicate a strategy, entrepreneurs should develop an effective mission statement. In addition, entrepreneurs should pick industries and trends that will allow them to support growth. Entrepreneurs should also use tools such as SWOT analysis and the five forces model to analyze their market environment in order to compete effectively in it. Although not important in the beginning, entrepreneurs should work at developing both organizations and management competencies that will support their strategy and growing business. This author provided recommendations to Pacific Equipment to increase its chance for success. First, because of the large size and capitalization of its competitors, Pacific Equipment should pursue a differentiation strategy in order to avoid direct competition with them. Pacific Equipment should develop its organization and management competencies in order to support that strategy. The organization that Pacific Equipment should pursue should emphasize its R&D and marketing functions over that of manufacturing. In addition, Pacific Equipment should try at this time to strengthen its current sales agreement in order to sell its products to a worldwide market. Other items that Pacific Equipment should pursue include developing web support for its products, development of an effective mission statement, and development of stronger management capabilities.

Karwowski, Anthony J “The Effect of Sustainable Development on Strategic Business Decisions”

May 1996, 122pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: A movement based on Sustainable Development has recently been gaining momentum in the global business community. It is meant to tie economic growth with environmental protection. Proponents of this movement feel that industrial activity can be successfully promoted around the world within the framework of sound economic growth, environmental protection, and social equity. During the 1992 United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, the Business Council for Sustainable Development was created to formulate a global strategy for Sustainable Development and establish guidelines for its implementation. In fact, 120 nations agreed to these guidelines at the Earth Summit held in Rio de Janeiro, during June of 1992. Sustainable Development has simply been defined as development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their needs. The commitment shown by the many nations at the Earth Summit in 1992 to Sustainable Development is proof of its growing importance to the world marketplace. It is the intent of this thesis to study the effects of Sustainable Development on the strategic decisions businesses make to position themselves to be more competitive. The product of this paper will be a device to help in making strategic business decisions, called the SDD TOOL (Strategic Development Decision Tool). The SDD TOOL is intended to be used by business managers to analyze their opportunities to participate in business strategies based on Sustainable Development. The paper will begin in Chapter 1 with background information on different business strategies and a description of Sustainable Development which will contain information about its origin, substance, goals, and implementation. The concept of the SDD TOOL will be introduced later in Chapter 1 as a tool for business managers to better manage the many complex issues and demands of Sustainable Development. Also in Chapter 1 the issues that form the major parameters of the SDD TOOL will be presented. Additional chapters will follow that will detail and prove the importance of the major parameters to the SDD TOOL. The six major parameters are: • Chapter 2 – Laws & Regulations • Chapter 3 – Management Philosophy • Chapter 4 – Market Expectations • Chapter 5 – Costs and Design • Chapter 6 – Competition • Chapter 7 – Perceived Benefits. The six chapters on the major parameters will be interwoven to develop the SDD TOOL in Chapter 8. Chapter 8 will present some of the key factors to successfully follow Sustainable Development business strategies such as relying on sound economic profit motives and having a committed management philosophy towards sustainable business practices. An argument will be made to justify the disparity of involvement among firms in following a path towards greater Sustainable Development. Some firms will be in a position to become very proactive and be more sustainable than others. These firms will correctly meet the demands of the major parameters of the SDD TOOL to be successful in following Sustainable Development business strategies. But there will be firms, because of their market position and management philosophy, that will not react towards implementing sustainable business practices. These firms may be cash poor and cannot afford to make a strategic change towards sustainable manufacturing or product design. Or the market they compete in cannot support a major product change to become more sustainable. For some reason these firms cannot meet the many demands of the major parameters of the SDD TOOL to become major participants in the move towards Sustainable Development. The strategic choices of all of the above firms is based on their respective competitive positions in their market structures at a particular point in time. And these competitive positions are in a constant state of flux as the markets expand and contract based on technological innovations and consumer purchasing attitudes. Therefore the firms must constantly review their strategic positions towards Sustainable Development. The strength of the SDD TOOL, as it will be shown in the later chapters of this thesis, is that it can be used as a management tool to help make these strategic reviews and choices. The SDD TOOL is a survey based tool consisting of a set of questions for each of the six major parameters of the TOOL as outlined in this paper. The answers to the questions will be placed into a matrix format that will facilitate scoring the relative importance of the parameter to the firm’s ability to follow sustainable business practices. Each answer will be assigned a rating weight based on its importance to the parameter. And each answer will receive a competence level based on how favorable the answer is towards following sustainable business practices. The sum of the products of the rating weights times the competence levels for the answers will yield the matrix score for a firm. Higher scores will indicate a more suitable match for a firm to follow sustainable business practices. In summary, the SDD TOOL will be presented as a powerful and flexible tool to be used as a catalyst for more in-depth analysis of any firm’s market position and its ability to effectively participate in business strategies based on Sustainable Development principles.

Kasper, Linda S. “Workplace Diversity: Management Strategies for Realizing the Benefits of Employee Diversity”

Aug. 1994, 161pp, bibliography, appendices, notes
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to explore the challenge facing organizations in dealing with workplace diversity and to offer methods to effectively manage it. This paper presents a case for recognizing diversity trends in business and making strides to embrace it for competitive advantage. Guidelines are given for developing management strategies to tap the benefits of employee diversity. The research method utilized here is a contemporary literature review with reinforcing information gathered from professional and business journals. Since worker diversity is a relatively new management theme, periodicals comprise a fair portion of the bibliography sources. Emphasis is placed on the most current findings and philosophies surrounding the diversity topic as seen from the legal, moral, social, and economic vantage points. The findings of this thesis include management strategies for realizing the benefits of employee diversity. These general strategies include: • managing the change involved with diversification of the work force through careful planning and anticipation of the barriers to diversity. • cultivating specialized managerial skills to effectively deal with diversity, • generating long-term commitment to diversity efforts by achieving and maintaining support at all organizational levels. Recognizing the opportunity inherent in a differentiated work force is the first step to gaining from diversity. Then, through a systematic approach, the benefits of diversity can be tapped. New workplace realities require managers to become diversity leaders within their organizations and be proactive about diversity issues. They must learn to harness the potential of a nonhomogeneous workforce and cultivate workers as individuals. Managers need to embrace diversity by systematically implementing programs and policies that support worker differences. The failure to plan for employee diversity will render an organization unfit to compete in today’s global economy. Indeed, diversity management is the strategic business imperative of the 1990s.

Kaufman, Brian, Sean Moran, Drew Van Norman, Edward Wilbert “Improving Industrial/Construction Distributor Business by Strengthening Relationships and Building Value”

July 13, 2004, 250pp
Archival copy only

Kellen, Francis John. “An Evaluation of the Business Potentials of the Allis Chalmers Power Conditioner”

May 1971, 54pp
Archival copy only

Kennedy, Matthew (see Coffey, Anthony)


Kernwein, Donald A. “A Study of Business Policies of Chrysler Outboard Corporation”

March 19, 1976, 69pp
Archival copy only

Khurshid, Amer “Analysis of Risk in Projects and Investments”

June 29, 1994, 111pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper discusses the application of risk analysis to different project environments. Starting with the basics of risk analysis, it covers the requirements, benefits and tools of risk analysis. The concept of probability distribution and technical problems in running risk analysis, e.g. sampling, convergence, correlation, are discussed. The classical methods of risk analysis, which include sensitivity analysis, parametric method, decision trees, utility theory and management perceptions, are discussed with their advantages and shortcomings. Next the advanced methods of risk analysis, which include probability distribution, control interval and memory method and analytical hierarchy method, are discussed in detail. The middle part of the paper addresses risk analysis to complex engineering and construction projects and risks in new high technology products (the two types of projects which exhibit most risks). Same kind of analysis can be used for other types of projects with some exceptions perhaps. Application problems using @Risk software demonstrating hypercube sampling distribution is shown. The second application problem demonstrates application of analytical hierarchy process technique to construction project environment. The next part of the paper covers some special strategies to reduce risk for bringing new high technology products to the market. It focuses on research and development (R&D) and marketing risks associated with new technology-based products. For industrial products the concept of the technology life cycle in comparison to the conventional product life cycle is emphasized. The later part of the paper covers background needed for investments, profitability criteria, and cash flow analysis. The last part of the paper gives conclusions and recommendations from the thesis. This paper demonstrates the use of risk analysis using discounted cash flow profitability criteria for evaluating complex engineering and construction projects and new product development projects in the face of high uncertainty in the economic environment. The risks covered are primarily economic and financial. Risk contingency planning, various tools and techniques available for risk analysis and important strategies for dealing with risk investments are covered in detail. A professional software called @ Risk is used as add on to Lotus to evaluate a risky situation.

Kiekhaefer, John H. “Technological Change and Screen Printing Technology”

April 1996, 229pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This essay discusses the ramifications of future technological change for the screen printing industry. In this case, technological change (or technology progression) refers to future improvements that may be made in screen printing technology and other printing technologies potentially competitive to it (A total of eight technologies and twenty-one technology subsets are involved). Historical technology progression curves of screen printing technology and potentially competitive technologies are generated from data collected of cumulative patents over time. It is argued that cumulative patent data is becoming increasingly more useful in plotting technology progression as computer data bases of patents improve and are made more broadly available. A stepwise method is suggested by which to predict the future of the screen printing industry. This method is then applied to the situation of the U.S. screen printing industry. Aiding this analysis is proposed market segmentation of sixteen screen printing product specialties as well as technology progression curves, market dimensions, and technical considerations of the printing technologies. The viewpoint drawn from analysis is that in the next twenty years, a substantial portion of business that is currently produced by screen printing technology is at risk of being lost to competitive printing technologies. The potential for loss varies with product specialty from none to 100%.

Kissel, Douglas Brian. “Productivity: A Function on the Quality of Work Life”

Nov. 1981, 41pp
Archival copy only

Klinger, Jeffrey L. “New Process Development, NProcessD, as a Growth Strategy for Small Contract Manufacturers”

Sept. 18, 89, 229pp, bibliography, appendix, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: A small contract manufacturer can strategically growing its manufacturing capabilities through identifying a new process development method designed to use their restricted amount of resources efficiently and effectively. A contract manufacturer’s product line is dependent on the customer’s outsourced product. For small contract manufacturers, process development and the manufacturing processes of new products is crucial to a businesses growth in sales, profit, and manufacturing capabilities. Small manufacturers must challenge resource constraints differently than medium to large business’s. Their resource constraints can include cash, equipment, direct and indirect labor. Some small businesses have a difficult time building manufacturing processes because cash flow and management’s commitment to investment is so restrictive that the equipment requisition cannot be justified within the time period required for approval. The current shift in the manufacturing industry is to outsource non-core competencies. The customer has chosen to outsource their product line to provide a cost benefit, to acquire new skills, to eliminate headaches, and to supplement staff. The contract manufacturer markets itself to the larger companies that have these issues by having a specialized focus in a manufacturing method or process. It is in the contract manufacturer’s best interest to design a decision making process and a manufacturing development process to efficiently use the available resources to receive new business. Any inefficiencies can cost the small business valuable profit opportunities and potential loss in revenue. This thesis will be from the perspective of the small contract manufacturer who is receiving outsourced products from a larger customer. The thesis will design a New Process Development (NProcessD) model that will be a modification of Robert Cooper’s New Product Development (NPD) model, but focusing on process development stages rather than product stages. The NProcessD model can be used to introduce new product processes that the manufacturer may not currently provide as a business growth strategy. One method that will be discussed is having the contract manufacturer outsource the product temporarily to justify developing the manufacturing process internally. The NProcessD model will also compare its phases to the NPD model, and how the models relate to the contract manufacturers point of view of developing the process not the product. An integration strategy will be developed to identify the indirect components and benefits of a successful new process development process which will be followed by a case study of a cable harness contract manufacturer and the challenges to implement the process model.

Kluge, Terry B. “Current Techniques for Assembly Line Balancing”

1981, 49pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper describes the basic considerations required to generate and manage an assembly line balance within a manufacturing facility. The problem of balancing an assembly line is observed in the form of a deterministic line balancing method. The purpose is to search academically and experientially for improvement in the process of balancing production assembly lines. The assembly line balance concepts are discussed in a predetermined hierarchy of importance as realized from the author’s experience with, and analysis of manufacturing organizations. The suggestions throughout the study are intended to provide management personnel with a sense of self-imposed objectives and perspective on the proper evaluation of the whole system and its components. Methods, diagramming, and modeling are inclusive essentials to support this research. Some theoretical models (algorithms) will provide a solution which does not necessarily make it practical for answering the problem because of cost, storage, and time constraints. Conversely, there are models (heuristics) that solve problems short of optimal results and thus begin to lose the practical use of their application. The individual theories tend to fall short of sufficiently addressing practicality toward achieving solutions. The techniques that have utilized algorithms and heuristics together are demonstrating a positive step in the endeavor to gain practical results from theoretical models.

Knie, Uwe, Ghaith Daoud, Jonathan Marten, Jennifer Wisniewski “Examining the Business Case of Millwood, Inc.”

Feb. 13, 2007, 99pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis includes a business analysis of Millwood Inc.’s Cudahy, Wisconsin facility. The project team spent two days on-site, working closely with Millwood personnel and conducting research on the company, concentrating on the corporate and local organization that included an evaluation of the organizational structure, customer/supplier relationships, strategic management process, process flow, change management, and existing human resources and quality systems. Using the information obtained from the site visits along with additional secondary research conducted by each student, the project team is making recommendations on process and system improvements that will allow Millwood Inc. to increase throughput while also increasing quality and employee motivation. The team recommends reversing the direction of repair line to increase the continuity of the product flow. This will allow workers to access the current bulk lumber storage area instead of having to restock individual lumber carts throughout the day. Expected results include an increase of repaired pallet throughput and a decrease of non-value added time, such as material handling activities. A partial reallocation of a material handling position to a quality control function further allows implementing a quality audit system, potentially increasing product quality and thus strengthening the customer-supplier relationship. Changes to the handling of scrap wood are also recommended by moving dumpsters closer to the repair workers and providing screen shields to address employee safety concerns.

Knight, Sidney G. “A Factors of Production Data Systems for Management Decisions”

May 1972, 64pp
Archival copy only

Knuese, Teri “Creating Brand Equity Across Multiple Marketing Channels: A Case Study of Sta-Rite Industries, Inc.: Water Systems Group”

Oct. 12, 1998, 163pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis will identify and analyze how manufacturers create and manage brand equity across multiple distribution channels. The primary analysis used will be a case study presentation of Sta-Rite Industries, specifically the Water Systems Group and its particular brand strategy. In other words, they manufacture and market multiple products across multiple channels to reach multiple markets; and they employ multiple brands to achieve these objectives. The first part of the thesis will address the role of brand management within the manufacturing organization. The key objective of this paper is to define steps, create an action plan for the manufacturer that will enable the company to manage their brand(s) for long-term sustainability within the markets in which they compete. Significant time will be spent defining brand equity; how it is created, maintained, nurtured or even reinvented. The cornerstone for the brand equity analysis will be David A. Aaker’s brand equity model which defines five asset variables that determine brand equity: brand loyalty, brand awareness, perceived quality, brand associations and other proprietary brand assets. Time will be spent defining each of these dimensions. Once definitions are complete, the paper will focus on the role of the integrated marketing communications program in establishing and maintaining long-term brand continuity. Specifically, sales support programs such as rebates, dating, co-op advertising, promotions and discounting will be reviewed in order to demonstrate the relationship between such external programs and brand management. In addition, a review of packaging, at-shelf merchandising, advertising and other marketing and sales support elements will also be presented as core components in managing brand equity. Several case histories will be presented demonstrating the role the integrated marketing communications program holds in securing brand dominance in today’s cluttered marketplace. The balance of this thesis will present a summary overview of the current and proposed brand system for the Water Systems Group of Sta-Rite Industries. Subject matter presented in this section will include: industry overview, market analysis, review of the channels of distribution serving each market, competitive market positioning within each channel, current brand and S.W.O.T. (Strengths/Weaknesses/Opportunities/Threats) analysis by market and channel; and finally, recommended changes to the existing brand system to achieve maxim brand equity impact and sustainability. The author of this thesis is presently a Senior Product Manager within the Water Systems Group of Sta-Rite Industries. She has been responsible for spearheading efforts within the organization that will aid in the achievement of maximum market penetration within each of the business group’s core markets. Brand equity development is recognized as the single most significant strategic objective for the organization.

Kochiu, Halil “Management Roles and Tools for Global Information Systems”

May 9, 1997, 126pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper presents the administrative roles and the tools needed for Global Management Information Systems. The area of greatest need upon which this paper will focus is an effective management guideline for firms that compete internationally. Software processes currently in use and their relationship to the executive management function of an international organization are presented. Software tools to be evaluated include the ISO standard for software development and purchase, and the Capability Maturity Model for process maturity evaluation. The contribution will provide an analysis and guideline for management roles and practices. A guideline, based on models reviewed, follows. The guideline will outline what senior management needs to know in managing software professionals, projects, vendor products and hardware technology in the international marketplace. The guideline will be of use to both service and manufacturing organizations. The audience for this paper is senior managers in multinational organizations; senior managers of large and medium domestic organizations may find much of the research and analysis useful. The emphasis on the multinational firm is based on the unique information requirements of this type of organization. The guideline used for the multinational firm can more readily be extrapolated for domestic managers of large scale management information systems. The selection of the multinational enterprise and the determination of its role in software assurance are attempts to provide a basis for technology management in organizations that no longer compete and produce within local markets, but rather in the new world markets that are expanding. Another motive for using the multinational enterprise, is the unique information a firm with this structure requires.

Kohl, Andrea “Utilizing Portal Technology for the Architectural, Engineering, and Construction Industry”

August 2011, 87pp, bibliography, figures, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract: The architectural, engineering, and construction (AEC) industry is a paper-laden and communication intensive industry, where no two projects are identical. Project teams are formed specifically for the building project only. Collaboration of drawings, specifications, bids, submittals, are a necessity and everyone needs to work with the most current information with all of the available products providing a concise, single point, user-friendly product.This paper examines the current AEC industry’s processes and project participants, where technology is used and where it could be applied to improve the overall industry and the collaborative process. The recommendation is for an AEC portal that provides four module options: Project, Communication, Team Members, and Search to remedy the data transfer between project collaborators. Review of existing products and issues are brought to light. Additional requirements for a successful portal include focusing on the user, their capabilities, and providing flexibility for accessing the project data. A recommendation of the AEC portal is then provided for firms in the industry.

Kohlman, Thomas Scott “A Guide to Selecting the Proper Motivational Technique”

Nov. 1990, 79pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Managers must understand what motivates each employee for the organization to operate at the optimum level. This has not become easier over the years as have many technical challenges, due to the complexity of individuals and the increasing number of motivational theories. Adding to this problem, many managers have tended to ignore the people aspects of management because motivation is a “soft” science rather than a “hard” science. Managers must begin to utilize the largest untapped resource in many organizations: people. This will be the difference between success and failure in the nineties. A method to identify motivational techniques for individuals is outlined to aid managers in selecting the proper approach. The assumption is made that people can be grouped into general classifications, realizing this is only done to provide a foundation for helping to generate ideas for motivating them. People cannot be so neatly grouped in real life, but managers need a starting point and this approach provides that. To identify typical motivators, four fundamental types of people are defined according to their needs and values. Common links are drawn between the various theories of work motivation for a clearer understanding of what they are stressing. The manager’s role is also explored to aid in understanding why managers are needed and common mistakes made. Understanding people’s needs and values is much easier said than done. Communication skills such as speaking, writing, and listening are essential for understanding employees. This will take time and is not something that can be set aside once you understand someone. People’s needs and values are constantly changing and this is the only assumption managers can safely make.

Kolar, Anton J “The New Product Development Process”

Aug. 2000, 89pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: With the speed at which information is exchanged there is an unprecedented increase in global competition. Organizations must learn how to function in every aspect of their business effectively and efficiently to stay competitive. An organization must utilize best practices throughout the organization to meet the target market needs to stay ahead of the competition. An organization’s new product development structure and strategy must be in line with the organization’s vision. Organizations that have better control over operating costs have a competitive edge and can provide products or services at lower costs or higher margins. This paper surveys many of the topics and areas of expertise related to the New Product Development process. The survey is limited to New Product Development with respect to platform technology. The areas that are surveyed are the following: new product development, project management, the project team, risk management and contingency planning, processes and tools to manage project planning, and the different types of organizational structures and project strategy. Further organization XYZ’s New Product Development process was evaluated and team members from organization XYZ were surveyed to determine the effectiveness and efficiency of organization XYZ New Product Development process. From the evaluation and surveys recommendations were made on how to improve organization XYZ’s New Product Development process.

Kondreck, Patrick J. “Small business transformation through technological innovation”

Jan. 5, 2009, 118pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The primary focus of this thesis addresses the ways in which technological innovations continue to change the traditional small business model. More specifically, this thesis analyzes how Internet-enabled technologies and marketplaces, such as eBay, have radically altered the way small businesses are started and operated, which has leveled the playing field between new online sales businesses and traditional retail sales organizations.

Kopperud, Lawrence Edward. “Test Service Corporation: A New Venture”

May 1985, 35pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Kore, Alexander V. “Simulation models of the Firm and Industry and their Application to Business Decision Systems”

June 1969, 94pp
Archival copy only

Kosmatka, Stanley M. “An Investigation of the Paradox in Small Business Planning”

May 1970, 29pp
Archival copy only

Kouhestani, Taj M. “Planning and Control Problems in Developing Countries”

July 1980, 10pp
Archival copy only

Kozlowski, Brian J. “An application of Bayesian Decision Theory to New Product Development”

Jan. 1971, 34pp
Archival copy only

Kraft, J.V. “Introduction to the Market Areas of Application for Gantry Cranes”

Dec. 1971, 27pp
Archival copy only

Krainz, Robert J. “Investigation of the Acquisition of a Small, Privately-Owned Custom Plastic Molding Company”

Aug. 1984, 81pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The small business environment is very competitive and unstable. This statement is true for custom plastic molders as well as all other small businesses. The plastic molding business is affected by technological changes, replacement products and materials and rapid market shifts. The operation of a small custom plastic molding business must be planned carefully from inception. These plans must be flexible to deal with continually changing markets, products and technologies. This essay will discuss the general considerations involved in the acquisition of a small business and particularly a small custom plastic molding business.

Krause, Frederick J. “Optimum Production Run Size Determination for Plastic Injection Molders”

1981, 39pp
Archival copy only

Kressin, Ronald W. “Integration of R&D and Manufacturing”

July 7, 1974, 50pp
Archival copy only

Krishnamurthy, Gopal S “Bundling as a Customer Relationship Management Strategy”

July 16, 2003, 77pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Bundling, pervasive in almost every industry, is widely used as a pricing and promotional strategy throughout the world. Customers experience bundling in various forms, ranging from value meals at fast food restaurants to customized personal computers from Dell. Bundling occurs when one transaction from one service provider results in one price with one bill for two or more products or services. Volume transactions through bundles create economies of scale, scope, cost, time, and effort for both companies and their customers. They result in significant cost savings for companies and attractive discounts for customers. In addition, customers are attracted by the convenience of conducting their business with just one company. Companies’ ability to promote customer satisfaction and customer convenience has increased the consumers’ acceptance of bundling; this contradicts critics who see bundling as an anti-competitive and anti-consumerist strategy. Bundling now offers customers strategic flexibility: with more choices and more variety, they can get exactly what they want. As more and more customers demand it, industries are rushing to create bundled deals that have not existed in the past. Some advantages for companies include operational improvements in bundled transactions, efficient market segmentation through customized bundles, surcharges for custom integration, volume purchase commitments, the ability to promote bundles as new products, and leverage to extend market power from one market to another. As a multifaceted strategy, bundling allows companies to manipulate their numerous products and services to deploy existing capabilities in an efficient and effective manner. When using a bundling strategy, companies focus on price, promotion, integration, customization, and/or strategic alliances. The SWOT (Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threads) analysis of the bundling strategy reveals how it can simultaneously counter competition, promote other products, enhance operations, and promote customer satisfaction. Offering an alternative to traditional pricing models based on cost or competition, bundling can change companies into market leaders. The strategy’s major weakness is its legal and ethical implications. When bundling results in reduced competition with little or no benefit to the customer, it has invariably led to antitrust suits. Infamous tie-in-sales models (such as IBM’s coupling of mainframe computers and punched cards, and more recently, Microsoft’s bundling of Internet Explorer with its Windows operating system) have tarnished the image of bundling as a customer-friendly strategy.

Krol, Lawrence Edward. “Effective Project Management”

Nov. 1982, 90pp
Archival copy only

Kronhelm, Gar D. “Organizing Project Management for Automated Control Systems”

Nov. 1983, 115pp
Archival copy only

Krueger, Judith Muriel. “Design Considerations for a Computerized Part Number Forecasting System”

May 1974, 36pp
Archival copy only

Kuchta, Darrell G. “Project Management as Applied to a New Product Program at John Deere Horicon Works”

Jan. 1984, 78pp
Archival copy only

Kuckuk, William R. “Making the Transition from an Engineering Field into Management”

May 1990, 88pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Many professionals will, at sometime in their career, aspire to move from their degreed background into a management position. In a study reviewed by Badaway (1982), 68% of all engineers are employed as managers by the age of 65. In contrast, only 37% of engineers in their first 5 years have some management duties. However, 73% of engineers between the ages of 45 and 50 have significant management responsibilities. Because so many engineers are moving into management positions sometime in their career, it is important that they are effective in that position. The engineer’s professional and personal experiences help him prepare for this move. However, not all jobs prepare the individual adequately when it comes time to make this important move. Prior training of engineers and other technical people can make it difficult for them to make this career progression (Barcley, 1986 [Finneiston, 1980]). When an engineer finally makes the transition into management, often he will fail to make the move successfully, both in the sense of being effective for the organization and in fulfilling a self satisfaction of doing a good job. The problems of effectively preparing the technical person for a managerial role lie not only with the individual but also with his direct management and the company itself. This paper will look into many of the preparation needs of the engineer, the reasons behind failed transitions, and offer suggested steps that the engineer, his management and his company can take to make his venture into management a successful one. The first two chapters concentrate on the manager’s and engineer’s job descriptions and their professional roles. The types of individuals that take on these roles, and the types of skills needed to be successful in these two professions are also examined in some detail. Chapters 3 and 4 deal with preparation and skills development activities that are needed to make a successful transition into management. These chapters are meant to be a guide for career planning and skills development for those engineers that plan on becoming a manager sometime in their careers. In Chapter 5, several of the key reasons behind failed transitions into management are examined. In some cases it’s just a matter of bad timing. However, many times the engineer can’t make the personality changes required to deal with business politics, non-technical people or other non-tangible factors. Finally, Chapter 6 examines several ways that the engineer’s company and direct management can help prepare him for a move into management positions. Company backed programs, such as, mentoring, Dual Ladder systems and formal training will be looked at in some detail. Informal methods that can help the engineer make a successful move into management will also be discussed. Many works and studies will be cited which investigate the problems of this transition. These works look not only into the engineer’s responsibilities, but also those of their manager, and company. The conclusions will be highlighted by the author’s personal experiences as he reviews the topics discussed, and will also make recommendations for those engineers that feel that they will someday have the chance to move into management.

Kuehneman, Bret A. “Global Management Strategies for Entering the Chinese Market”

Spring 1998, 138pp, bibliography, illustrations
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to demonstrate the need for a proactive strategy plan for foreign companies to develop and introduce new products into the Chinese market. By having a formal and structured strategy plan as the foundation for their business needs, these organizations may use this format to customize a business plan that meets the objectives of their company, and the needs of the target market their new products are being sold in. The global market is a fairly new economy which has resulted from changes in the social, political, and economic environments of many of the major nations on the planet. Also, the rapid changes in technological advances has decreased the product life cycle of many of the traditional products sold domestically and internationally. Like most countries that foreign companies try to conduct their business activities in, the business environment in The People’s Republic of China has as many obstacles as opportunities. This report will confront some of these issues, and offer a plan for addressing these challenges by utilizing information and strategies from other similar foreign countries that are applicable to the objectives that are discussed. The rationale for this thesis is to offer a structural plan for entering the Chinese market through any variety of methods available to the manufacturer of a product. This plan is meant to cover the basic objectives necessary to meet the requirements for legally and effectively penetrating any barriers the foreign producer may encounter, and to assist in successfully offering their products and services to the proper Chinese market category and consumer. The sources of information used for this paper are drawn upon from scholarly journals and publications, information from corporate sources, statistics and data from the United States Federal Government and The People’s Republic of China, and various articles from business journals. The student contribution to this report is to relate the basic information provided from other sources on China, to the information available to the public regarding current and various management strategies applicable to the international business subject.

Kuepper, Rebecca J. “Project Transitions”

June 2002, 75pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Project transitions involve the transferring of a project from one entity to another — the entity can be a department, a functional group, or a researcher. The transition can be managed a number of ways including handing the project over with virtually no information (“throw it over the wall”), having a member or members of the receiving entity participate in the project before the transition point (“participation before transition”), or having a separate project team which would minimize or eliminate the need for transition points (“specific project personnel”). Each of the these transition techniques has advantages and disadvantages, workplace issues, management considerations, and personal implications associated with it.

Each of the transition techniques involves managerial implications such as resource allocation, success criteria, project ownership, and project management — each of these must be considered when deciding which transition technique should be utilized. The optimal response depends on the ability to use the best people, to match job skills to motivation, to allow people to grow, to build balanced teams, and to manage the team mix. A manager should be aware and involved in the project transition steps to help continually improve the project transition process and minimize conflict.

Project transitions are made more complicated by personality, communication style, and ethical differences. Each of these is a nebulous, intangible item that determines how one discriminates, processed, and handles information, situations, and negotiations. Understanding how others view the related project transition can help all researchers involved work better together as well as diminish conflict and achieve success. Transitions and ethics can be considered utilizing common ethical concepts — there are three theories that correlate to the above-mentioned transition techniques. These correlative pairs are “throw it over the wall”/egoism, “participation before transition”/utilitarianism, and “specific project personnel”/ empiricism. Each of these transition types has parallel characteristics with its respective ethical theory.

Project transitions are a necessary part of project management; however, they do not have to be thought of negatively. With proper management, project transitions can form the groundwork for career development, personality and communication training, and success criteria. Transitions are needed to transfer responsibilities from one entity to another, but research teams can determine which technique works best depending on the focal element(s) of the project as well as past experience. Projects and transitions can be successful but need sponsorship and support from management and the involved researchers.


Kukuljan, Zdravko V. “Equipment and Process Development for a New Product Line”

1976, 84pp
Archival copy only

Kumar, Vivek “Competition in the Deregulated Telecommunications Industry”

July 30 2000, 132pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The passage of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 has spawned a new era in the communications industry that is bound to transform the way the world communicates and conducts business. The Act’s basic premise is to increase competition in the industry by easing the Federal Communication Commission’s (FCC) control. The increased competition is to deliver customers with enhanced products and services at competitive prices. Most telecommunications service providers have resorted to various strategies to gain and retain market share from one another. This paper elaborates on the key phases of deregulation faced by the telecommunications industry and compares it with the airline industry. Based on the comparison, a few significant predictions suggest that the telecommunications industry is heading towards an oligopolistic competition model. This thesis looks into the various strategies deployed by the players in the hyper-competitive telecommunications marketplace. Most strategies have been the traditional mergers and acquisitions, strategic alliances, new product development, and integration of solutions that primarily focus on the convergence aspect of the products and services offered. This thesis also identifies that a few technologies may be helpful in providing exceptional customer service, time and time again. Most service providers also need to examine the different technologies, such as DSL, VPNs, ASP, Broadband Wireless, and Optical Networking, which are being deployed in the marketplace so that they can provide the most effective solutions to their customers. Today, convergence is the key focus in technologies and services. Even though, customers’ voice, data, and video needs are trying to be met on a single platform, research claims that customers are demanding a one-on-one market relationship from their product/service providers. In simple terms, the customers are demanding for customized solutions that fit their needs. Therefore, the marketing world is experiencing a period of divergence. Another revolutionary concept learned during research is “Creating a community of Customers.” This thesis highlights the importance and benefits of this valuable concept that should be adapted by service provider to leapfrog their competitors in the marketplace. Several researchers have identified customer satisfaction and loyalty as the primary drivers of increasing market share and, hence, increased revenues and profits. Even though most telecommunications firms realize that customer satisfaction and loyalty as the key to their success, they have not been successful in devoting enough resources in this area. Most service providers are deploying Operations Support Systems (OSSs) to streamline their processes and improve operational efficiencies. The service providers need to look beyond this short-term fix, and, hence, experiment with Customer Relationship Management Systems (CRMs). CRMs are applications designed to help organizations understand their customers’ behavior and needs. Providing superior customer service eventually leads to customer satisfaction, loyalty, and that results in probable long-term retention. The thesis study concludes that most service/product providers and technologies are converging to provide a simple platform for information sharing. However, the service providers are not necessarily focusing on the customers’ specific requirements. Instead, they are keen in providing boilerplate solutions. Increasing customer specific demands and different behaviors will require service providers into looking into flexible solutions such as Operations Support Systems (OSSs) and Customer Relationship Management (CRM). These solutions, when integrated and implemented effectively, will enable the service providers to be more nimble and responsive than their competitors, hence, providing more value to all stakeholders in the business.

Kurniawan, Rini “An Alternative Economic Development Program for Indonesia in the 1990’s”

1976, 84pp
Archival copy only

Lackore, James Roger, Jr. “The Justification of Accelerated Endurance Testing of Heavy Duty Trucks and Buses”

May 1, 1996, 100pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to create an understanding of when and how endurance testing can be financially beneficial to manufacturers in the heavy duty truck industry. The author has been employed by two truck manufacturers of medium size over the past eleven years, and has found it difficult to financially justify such testing. This paper begins by reviewing the theory of accelerated endurance testing. Most of the major truck manufacturers use endurance testing routinely, and several operate their own facilities. The benefit of this study is therefore directed primarily at the small to medium sized manufactures, typically those with sales volumes of less than $500 million annually. This can include truck-chassis manufacturers as well as body builders. Since companies in this size range will typically contract with established test facilities, a description of those facilities capable of testing heavy duty vehicles and willing to contract with private corporations is included. As an aid to manufacturers who cannot justify full vehicle testing, a section is included which describes alternatives such as finite element analysis and shaker testing. These methods can be considered in addition to endurance testing, but will never provide the real-world simulation possible with a well-conceived accelerated endurance test. The reasons for considering endurance testing include testing financial payback from reductions in warranty, recall, and rework expenses. It is also possible that the increased product reliability produced by an endurance tested vehicle can reduce the risk of product liability litigation. Further benefits accrue from the use of test data in advertising and the creation of a positive company image. Finally, it is useful in developing a basis for the safety certifications required by government regulations. To justify the cost of testing, corporate management must be convinced that the project will produce a financial payback with an attractive rate of return, and the payback must be measurable. Since the cost of warranty and recall expense can be tracked by product model fairly easily, the reduction of these expenses can be used as this measure. The difficulty in this approach is created by the need for risk assessment during the early stage of product design. The combined costs of quality must be estimated for the product both with and without the endurance test. The real benefits of the test will not be apparent until after the money is spent, and any costs of warranty that would have been caused by design errors, and were revealed by the test, have come to light. The process of estimating these costs before hand is referred to as risk assessment, and an overview of this theory is presented as well. A talented and fortunate engineer might occasionally design a product that works perfectly the first time. Since the justification of a test program involves assessing the risk that the new design will not work perfectly the first time, the justification must involve estimation – and estimation is always suspect. To improve the credibility of the estimation process, this paper presents a method of organizing the estimations of risk and translating them into a monetary value. The detailed nature of this method should increase the accuracy of the estimation at the same time that it lends credibility to the estimator. The proposed approach involves dissecting the elements of a new design into the smallest practical parts. Each bracket, component, and system must be considered individually, and then labeled with the degree of confidence in its reliability. The cost associated with the failure of each detail, along with the probability that an endurance test would reveal the failure, can then be combined to create a bottom-line monetary value associated with the test. A second approach to justification can be obtained by considering past projects, and estimating whether the known costs associated with actual design flaws could have been avoided if the product had been tested. Research into this method involved extensive searches through the product recall files at the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) library in Washington D.C. Recall campaign data for six truck manufacturers is presented in Appendix C. This data includes all the particulars surrounding the extent of each recall as well as summary descriptions of each failure, and the corrective action taken. For the vehicle design engineer, this section makes for informative reading aside from its usefulness in test justification. The original intention of this thesis was to develop a simple formula by which any heavy duty truck manufacturer could determine the probability of whether endurance testing would prove to be financially beneficial. After much study and consideration, it became evident that the factors involved are more complex than is practical for a simple formula to define. These complexities include, among others, model mix, degree of product customization, engineering department sophistication, customer expectations, and details of the company’s warranty policy. Although the construction of a formula seems impractical, a general trend can still be established. Risk assessment modeling using broad assumptions indicates that it is unlikely that small, or diverse, manufacturers (less than 100 units per model per year) will ever realize testing paybacks, while larger more standardized manufacturers (over 400 units per model per year) probably always will. Analysis of the historical data supports this conclusion as well. This leaves most medium sized producers caught in the gray area where each project must be considered on its own merit.

Lafee D., Santos Alfredo “Establishing a Small Business”

May 1980, 73pp
Archival copy only

Lang, Howard Arthur. “Pricing Policy of George J. Meyer Manufacturing Company”

May 1973, 25pp
Archival copy only

Larsen, Edgar Robert. “Implementing Industrial Marketing Planning”

May 1984, 119pp
Archival copy only

Larsen, Herbert A. “Preventative Stress Management: An Organizational Audit Technique”

May 1998, 70pp, bibliography, appendix, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: Management problems occur if excessive levels of job stress go unrecognized and uncontrolled. Managers and supervisors of employees are in a unique position to recognize and react to symptoms in their people. A stress audit technique was developed as a tool that can be used by managers to assess levels and sources of organizational stress affecting employees within the audit’s scope. Once assessed, managers can weigh the risks of these stressors, compare them with moderating factors being employed by the company and take actions as believed appropriate. Some actions may be applied directly while others may be recommended to upper management or Human Resource department implementation. The stress audit process, best completed in a collaborative effort with others, follows five steps. 1. Internal and external stressors affecting the organization and employees are tabulated in an Occupational Stressor format. Each item is weighed and scored according to its impact on the organization. 2. Existing moderating factors, both organizational and individual are listed in a Moderating Factor table. As with the stressors, each moderator is weighed and scored. 3. Key stressors and moderating factors are next posted in a Stressor / Moderator Summary format and evaluated. The outcome of this summary are the stressors and moderators believed most influential on the company or department. 4. Needed interventions are undertaken. This is a collective judgment by those participating in the audit. 5. Repeat the audit after some time and make course corrections as needed. Furnish ample amounts of feedback with employees, seeking their continued input. Use of the proposed stress audit technique by managers and supervisors in an informal and periodic manner will increase the likelihood of early problem detection. Intervention at an earlier stage can be much less costly, avoid Workers’ Compensation and promote greater employee happiness.

Lauterbach, Kevin J. and Brian J. Williams “Maintaining Industry Competitiveness Through Outsourcing Innovation and New Product Development”

May 12 2006, 102pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The researchers look to investigate outsourcing innovation within traditionally structured businesses to an innovation firm to maintain and create industry competitiveness in new product development. The researchers first attempt to understand the demographic trends within the marketplace. Because of the nature of the ever-increasing global economy, the demographic data may not determine the viability of an organization, but should provide insights into the current economic climate as well as the effects of outsourcing in four counties in Wisconsin: Brown, Dane, Milwaukee and Waukesha. Using census data from 1997, 2000, and 2002 the researchers focus on population, education, employment patterns, manufacturing industry, information technology industry, and economic projections. The data is used to compare counties to each other as well as the state as a whole to determine strengths and weaknesses in each of the four counties. In the industry focus section, researchers focus on the professional, scientific, and technical services category of the census data. With the foundation of data provided by the census, the researchers investigate the effects of engineering services and information technology occupations on the economy of the state and the four counties. Further, the researchers focus on the potential for these occupations to be outsourced and the effects of this outsourcing on the state. The researchers then delve into developing a case for outsourcing based on the research of outsourcing throughout history. The researchers highlight outsourcing from the inception of the United States, but focus on the intense globalization of the world over the last 50 years. Over this time, outsourcing has transformed into an important factor in organizational strategy. As outsourcing increased in strategic use, innovation emerged as a necessary component of organizational viability. The researchers investigate the importance of creating internal innovation strategies ingrained in the everyday operations of an organization. In addition, realizing that most organizations cannot sustain innovation in-house due to the global landscape, the researchers investigate the outsourcing of innovation. Noticing a trend in industry for organizations to outsource innovation, the researchers stress the creation and use of an ‘innovation firm.’ This innovation firm is tasked with understanding and predicting trends in industries and acquiring knowledge of the firms it is contracted with. In addition, the innovation firm establishes and maintains a pool of resources, knowledge, and technological savvy to meet the new product development/R&D/innovation needs of the organization. This joint strategy not only reduces costs, but also introduces innovation at all levels of development, allowing the organization to be extremely flexible and able to react to the hyper-competitive global markets. Utilizing an innovation firm also creates product and process improvements, increases market share, and creates wealth and jobs for economy. The researchers then review the potential future markets within the engineering and information technology industries in the four counties mentioned above. Using a PEST (Political, Economic, Social, and Technological) analysis, the researchers investigate the current outsourcing landscape. This leads to an understanding of markets in which the innovation firm may provide the necessary tools and resources to maintain and create new market share, wealth, and opportunities. A final review of the data demonstrated two separate paths for continued research. While these paths have differing goals independently, the researchers demonstrate the need for both roles and propose a scenario in which they work together to provide a complete strategic innovation solution for the customer. The first path identified is a direct result of a consistent trend in productivity of the industries examined within the geographic boundaries as limited by the research. The data clearly demonstrated the value added benefits as defined in the research have continually decreased in all occupations researched for the periods examined. The lower value of the services provided offers an opportunity for hiring firms to outsource a portion of their innovation creating resources to an organization designed to optimize new product development. The second path identified throughout the research is a need for an Innovation Manager/Consultant. This role, identified through the observation that organizations are getting leaner and more focused on day-to-day operations may lose sight of creating new market space, which inherently makes the organization vulnerable to disruptive forces. The researchers contend the group fulfilling this role will collaborate with the firm to determine what the firm’s innovation needs entail and how to fulfill those needs.

Lawonn, Richard Emmett. “Performance Evaluation and Merit Rating”

July 7, 1971, 47pp
Archival copy only

Lawrence, Doug and Dan Peltier and Steve Witucke “Radio Frequency Identification: A Potential Future Business Growth Opportunity for Tailored Label Products”

Oct. 1 2006, 93pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: RFID is a huge opportunity for companies to enhance their business processes with new information about how efficiently the organization is operating on a global scale. Use of RFID with accompanying support software will enable companies to track items and enhance the visibility of their supply chain; however, the RFID technology itself is in a state of transition. Standardization has not yet come to this technology, and companies who are early adopters do so with great risk. TLP, in the business of making custom labels for use in specialty environments, is looking to enhance their growth potential by leveraging their considerable knowledge and capabilities in unique label production to provide unique label solutions to customers looking to affix RFID tags to items. Through a survey and market analysis, the authors have identified members of TLP’s existing customer base as well as other potential market sectors where TLP could enter the label market. The authors also offer alternative methods for entering the market including integration with the existing operations, creation of a new business unit and creating a joint venture with another company. Finally, the authors urge caution, reviewing TLP’s core competencies and abilities today, and reflecting on the cost and risk involved in such a market move.

Lawrence, Marc K. “Managing the Risks Associated with Manufacturing in China”

Feb. 25 2005, 109pp, bibliography, appendix, map
Available for checkout
Abstract: Western managers conducting business in the People’s Republic of China are faced with many challenges. Obstacles related to culture, education, government, World Trade Organization commitments, foreign investment strategies, supply chain management, and quality can be especially complicated and difficult for Westerners to evaluate for many reasons. Understanding these reasons and proceeding with knowledge will provide management with tools that will increase their chances for success in this blossoming economy. Understanding the philosophies and history that have shaped the Chinese business culture, the state of the educational environment, the impediments created by its communist government and fledgling judicial system, the constant and rapid change created by its WTO commitments, the variety of strategies used to invest in this enormous market, the road blocks that will be encountered in the supply chain, and how to implement safeguards to ensure quality will provide foreign investors with a competitive advantage. Organizations that apply management skills to create innovative solutions based on a thorough understanding of China’s unique qualities will have a competitive advantage that can propel them ahead of their competition.

Layanun, Virut “Design and Improve Plant Layout and Work Method”

Nov. 1982, 61pp
Archival copy only

Lazar, Lawrence W. “Project Management in Industry”

Aug. 10, 1984, 65pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper provides a background for industrial organizations contemplating the implementation of a project management system. The various organizational, personnel, and customer concerns are discussed together with the project manager’s role with them. Present project management methods are discussed and suggestions for better industrial application are offered. Additionally, this paper sets forth a method for the engineering manager to evaluate the time for completion of engineering projects using resource limitation techniques.

Lein, Ronald J. “Organizational Structures: What is Needed for the American Corporation to Survive”

May 1989, 90pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This nation’s inability to compete in worldwide competition is an all too often told story. American corporations have been struggling to stay in business and be profitable. The American corporations have invested millions of dollars to upgrade their technology in order to become more productive. But it has not helped in all cases. This paper explores some of the causes that placed the American corporation in its present state with respect to organizational structures, and proposes a solution. Historical and present day organizational philosophies have been explored and reported on. The advantages/disadvantages of each design structure is documented. In addition, the organization’s evolutionary process and the internal and external factors affecting the organization are reported. This information was utilized to formulate a base to make some assumptions on why the American corporation’s lack of productivity and competitive position is the way it is. Furthermore, examples of successful corporations have been analyzed to discover their formula for success. This information provided the insight to propose the “Formula for Success” triangle that describes four key facets. Conscientiously addressing these four facets will not assure prosperity and growth, but it will provide a solid foundation for the corporation to build on.

Leitzke, DeAnna L., Shauna Boyer and Michael Siwek “Knowledge Management in the Construction Industry”

July 23, 2008, 98pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is commonly accepted that knowledge is an important asset in today’s organizations. Businesses are starting to apply knowledge management theory in an effort to remain competitive in the dynamic environment of the 21st century. The construction industry has struggled to find ways to effectively embrace knowledge management and maximize its potential. This paper focuses on utilization of post-project reviews in an effort to aid in facilitation of this objective. First, the uniqueness, project delivery methods, and challenges associated with the construction industry are considered, as well as how these characteristics affect knowledge gathering and retention. Next, communication and the vital role that it plays in regard to knowledge management is investigated. The concept of post-project reviews is then presented as a means to implement knowledge management within this unique industry. Finally, primary research was conducted through a survey to gauge the current practices and perception of knowledge management and post-project reviews among construction professionals. The results of this study support the hypothesis that post-project reviews are an effective means to facilitate knowledge management in the construction industry. Additional conclusions are explored and recommendations for further research in the field are suggested.

Lelou, Gerald J. “The Effect of Empowerment on Engineering Careers”

1998, 81pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper will review the relationship between employee empowerment and engineering career development in industry. The advancement of an engineering career is linked to empowerment in industry. Empowerment in the organization will have a positive impact on the career of an engineer. Empowerment encompasses all members in the organization including engineers and the members of the workforce, and it forces decisions onto the work force which is assumed to improve the business. Empowerment in the organization will provide the dynamic working relationship between the engineer, the employees and management of the organization, and the empowered engineer will have a greater impact on the organization. Engineering career development will show progress or decay during the career cycle and life cycle. The career cycle includes the novice, middle, and late stages of an engineering career. Daniel Levinson’s book “Seasons of a Man’s Life” reviews the adult life cycles, and Steven McCrary expands these life cycles concept onto the career stages to produce a matrix for adult development. This adult career development will be linked to empowerment in the organization. The dynamic relation between the engineer and the members of the organization provides improved development of an engineering career. This paper will confirm that dynamic relations between empowered employees, managers and engineers have benefits for themselves and others in life as well.

Lemke, Robert “Creating an Equity Investment Fund for the Firststar Corporation”

July 1999, 106pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to create the Firstar Equity Investment Fund and develop all the necessary tools to effectively operate Firstar Equity Investment Fund. The need to create this Fund became evident during the last community Reinvestment Act Compliance Examination by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC). This examination pointed out substantial community investment deficiencies by Firstar. The idea to undertake this thesis came as a result of this OCC examination. Firstar was well aware of this undertaking and encouraged this work, not only during my employment at Firstar but after leaving Firstar and completing this work.

Lesperance, Lawrence M. “A Business Plan for the Marketing and Manufacturing of the Programmable Controller/Loger ALS Corporation”

Feb. 1976, 66pp
Archival copy only

Libby, Scott A. “Concerns of Managing a Christian Workforce”

Jan. 14, 2005, 154pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Business news has recently focused in inappropriate conduct of corporate leaders. From Enron to Martha Stewart there are few current publications that do not contain stories about business leaders’ activities that are outside the boundaries of social acceptability. When considering the relative complexity of the various circumstances, a broad view needs to be taken. From an objective perspective it would appear that the governance systems in place should be publicly active in opposition to this type of criminal behavior. Corporate failures implicate companies, leaders, and employees as well as the society in which they exist. What are the common denominators of such failures? What can be done to improve this situation? How can the modern manager be effective in this environment? To better understand these concerns, an investigation will be made into values as they relate to the corporation, to management, and to the individual. This investigation will consider the branch of philosophy called ethics. Ethics is the study of things that are good and right as opposed to bad and wrong. Various ethical theories will be discussed that approach this central question from different perspectives. The issue for managers then becomes one of determining appropriate actions in the light of these varied philosophical approaches. The common denominator in this complexity is human intention and choice. Given the statistical information that a high percentage of citizens of the United States of America claim to be Christians, a study will be made into the elements of Christianity that deal with these topics. The intent is to gain a deeper insight into the value and moral system that a significant percentage of Americans claim to believe. This insight can then be considered as the values and morals of the individual are projected back to the manager, and then back to the values of the corporation. Understanding what constitutes the basis of the system of values provides insight into the individuals that make up the group. These insights provide the foundation for a more comprehensive understanding of right conduct. Recognizing that the study examines the connection between action, values and a specific ethical theory, Christianity, it is hoped that the thought process will provide an insight into human conduct that will be beneficial for the manager. Management is the discipline of optimizing resources for the purpose of achieving a desired output. It is hoped that insights gained will give managers a deeper and clearer perspective into conduct in business activity and the complexity of humans in organizations. There is a compound benefit from gaining such insight. Every interaction in an organization is connected with a person. Workers are people, managers are people, leaders are people, customers are people, shareholders are people; people are truly a common denominator in success or failure in any organization. It is hoped that the quest to understand the person will be a benefit in the endeavor to effectively manage in the world in which we live.

Lichty, John A. “Macintosh Integrated Software Techniques for Sole-Proprietorship Management”

May 20, 1989, 98pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The advent of micro- or personal computers has done more to revolutionize the practice of small business than any invention since the adding machine. With a personal computer, it is possible for the fledgling entrepreneur to do alone what would have previously taken a staff of at least three. The reduction in manpower means a reduction in risk and a reduction in costs. Thus the entrepreneur is more free to pursue ventures and market niches that at one time would have required more start-up capital than he was willing to risk. If the venture should prove successful, the entrepreneur already has the organizational mechanisms in place to allow for the natural growth of his business that would in turn allow for the hiring of additional people. The personal computer is not a panacea, however, and requires careful organization and utilization. As the common computer adage goes, “Garbage in, garbage out.” The computer is a tool, not a savior, and it is important that the entrepreneur understand this from the outset, or his investment in the latest technology could end up as “an executive paper weight.” With this in mind, the thesis that follows is an exploration into personal computer techniques that are designed to organize a small business with the minimum amount of time and effort on the part of the entrepreneur or sole proprietor. Everything that the average small businessman might require, from daily to-do lists to income tax forms, is covered. It is based on the personal business experience of the author. He has used each of the presented techniques on a daily basis for approximately two years to bring them to their current level of refinement. It is his wish that the reader find these techniques valuable and utilize them in his or her own small business.

Lockery, Donald “A Study of Strategic Proactively Targeted at the External Environment”

Oct. 2004, 121pp, references, appendices
Available for checkout

Lombardi, Jim. “The Voice Unheard: The Perspective of Southeast Wisconsin High Tech Industry on Government and University R&D Technology Programs”

Jan. 1996, 120pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Results from this study show less than 10% of Southeast Wisconsin high tech companies felt that federal and state government funds was important for them to form R&D alliances with universities. Furthermore, only 52% of companies have ever worked with a university and less than 20% actively pursue university alliances. Generally, companies stated the main impediment to forming a university alliance was that they believed such alliances were too time consuming. Study recommendations are: (1) increase awareness to all sizes of high tech companies regarding available government R&D funding resources in order for government funds to effectively serve as a catalyst; (2) Southeast Wisconsin universities should improve their technical relevance and credibility so that more high tech companies become interested in their offerings; and (3) more importantly, universities should offer to solve industry’s concurrent needs instead of attempting to promote their own expertise. The subjects were 57 top executives and 31 managers and engineers from Southeast Wisconsin high tech companies employing more than two employees. Standard Industrial Classification codes used by the Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Labor Statistics define the organizational format of the study.

Lorenzi, David E. “Motivation in Engineering- A Management Problem”

June 1970, 36pp
Archival copy only

Lotfi, Mohammad Reza “An Investment Guide to Iran”

Dec. 1972, 52pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this essay is to evaluate the economic potential of Iran for foreign investment, particularly the United States. A study in depth of the economic characteristics is further enhanced by direct comparison to two Middle Eastern countries: Turkey and Pakistan. The scope of this study covers: location, physical features, population, political stability, education, manpower, and economic growth. When compared to its neighbors, Turkey and Pakistan, Iran has the lowest birth rate, is the most stable politically, has the highest growth rate in education, and has an excellent supply of highly skilled labor at competitive rates. Inflation is under control. Iran has achieved the highest growth rate in economic history during 1971. This quite typical since Iranian growth has always been higher than forecasted except for agriculture. All in all Iran has all of the economic characteristics that should attract large industrial operations.

Ludwig, Daniel L. “Market Analysis of the Racine Construction Tool Company’s Hydraulic Concrete Breaker”

Aug. 1978, 62pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Lukitsch, Walter J. “A Financial Case Study of the Motor Controls Industry”

Aug. 1977, 68pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Lund, Ruth Ann and Kari Lynn Gundrum “Case Study: Magnetek Shipping Team- Causes, Analysis, and Cures of Psychological, Physiological and Behavioral Responses to Team Stress in an Industrial Environment”

Fall 1999, 190pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Cecilia Macdonald, a Sacramento-based speaker and corporate trainer, says, “Employees report that job stress seems to be running their lives, making them feel hurried, irritable, and frustrated.” Stress touches everyone’s life in today’s world on a much greater scale than in the past. The increase in stress has resulted in an increase in stress-related illness and insurance claims. The large sum of money involved in stress claims and loss in productivity has prompted further investigation into the area of stress management. So, stress has risen, the costs of stress have risen and, therefore, stress research has increased dramatically in recent years. According to research by University of Wisconsin, Green Bay Professor John Harris and Lecturer Lucy Arendt, “High levels of stress, if not understood and reduced, predictably result in high levels of employee dissatisfaction, illness, absenteeism, turnover, low levels of productivity, and, as a consequence, difficulty in providing high-quality service to customers.” John Ford, owner of Charlotte-based Leading Well, asserts that, “stressed out employees do not make good employees or family members and indirectly, but in a real way, negatively affect profits.” Stress is a serious matter for employers in the 1990s, and companies are looking for ways to manage it. This thesis is a case study of the MagneTek shipping team. Stress was a factor evident from the onset, so the authors decided to try to reduce stress while increasing the effectiveness of the team. To accomplish this, they chose to facilitate various training sessions in goal setting, communicating, and problem solving. The results of the case study show an improvement in team effectiveness and a reduction in stress. The thesis first provides an introduction and lays a foundation based on stress research before discussing the case study. Chapter Two contains the stress research that includes information of stress terminology, stress models, causes of stress, responses to stress, stress within teams, and the relation of stress and job performance. Chapter Three contains a detailed account of the work Gundrum and Lund did with the shipping team starting with an outline of the original case study plan, a discussion of meetings, and in-depth analysis of the surveys, and ending with recommendations for MagneTek. The closing chapter contains the final observations, conclusions, and recommendations for industry. Stress research is quite young and, therefore, researchers still have a lot of work to do in this field. So far, mainly people associated with the psychology field have contributed to stress research. Gundrum and Lund see their work as an important step in involving people from industry to start providing urgent solutions required by companies. It is critical to bridge the gap between business management and the stress researchers. Bringing together people from industry and the psychology field to conduct studies in stress research will strike a balance, providing research based in solid psychological science and solutions from an industrial perspective. Industry is in dire need of solutions as the costs of stress soar.

Mallett, Gregory “EVA and MVA Financial Measurement Techniques Used to Measure Restructuring Performance”

Aug. 1997, 101pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout

Mantone, Anthony “Functionally Linked Strategy to Deliver New Products Globally”

May 5, 2007, 123pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: An organization can define its mission through the use of a business strategy. In order to generate a business strategy, the organization must clearly identify what it strives to accomplish. A common method of doing this is through the development of business goals. Upon establishing strategic business goals, the organization then needs to effectively communicate these goals to the entire workforce. The communication should include a clear delineation of the business goals as well as an organizational plan on how it will attempt to attain these goals. A failure in either the business plan, through misguided goals, or in the communication of the plan can often lead to organizational chaos and poor results. Additionally, an organizational structure incapable of achieving the goals may lead to poor results. There are two main objectives of this paper. The first objective is to identify and support solid business goals based on research with regard to the current business climate. The second objective is to present a framework that guides the organization in the communication of the goals and facilitates a cohesive execution towards these goals. The strategic business goals presented in this paper are a continual process of new product introduction and a drive towards business globalization. New production introduction and globalization are quite popular topics in academic research regarding business organizations and rate highly as reasons for success and failure of many organizations. This author will attempt to show that a business plan based on successfully implementing the strategic goals of new product introduction and globalization provides an organization with solid short-term prospects as well as favorable long-term positioning. Once the goals are identified and clearly understood, an organization then has to align its business functions to cohesively execute towards the goals. Day-to-day functional execution towards the goals is accomplished through initiatives developed for each of the business functions. These functional and programmatic initiatives must be chosen and developed to support the business goals. A six-element organizational framework is presented to help guide an organization in identifying a comprehensive set of initiatives to support the strategic business goals. The relatively simple organizational structure comprised of a three-by-two matrix is designed to encourage an organization to consider initiatives surrounding the market, the product, and the organization from both internal and external perspectives. It provides a framework with which an organization can focus initiatives in support of its intended goals. The framework is purposely general in structure. The goals that an organization chooses is the driving force to create detailed initiatives within the structure. The initiatives proposed in the matrix were chosen based on research regarding new product introduction and globalization. Alternative goals may change the initiatives within the elements of the matrix. The underlying assumption is that an organization serves various markets with specific products.

Markiewicz, Robert “Direct Marketing in Agriculture: The Future of the Family Farm in the United States”

May 2003, 80pp, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis examines the history of agriculture in the United States, current farm characteristics and structures, and the opportunity to establish an organization to direct market beef. Agriculture has been an important industry for the United States since colonial times with family farms being its cornerstone. Great numbers of immigrants were attracted to the farming opportunities in the United States due to the ability to own property and the abundance of land. Many of these immigrants settled in established regions of the country and left the development of the American West to experienced farmers who yearned for more fertile land. Following the Civil War, the pace of settlement in the Midwest and the Great Plains quickened with the westward expansion of the transcontinental railroad. The railroad provided a cost effective and efficient transportation system for the delivery of crops to market and the return of production inputs. Agriculture continued to develop through the twentieth century with innovations in mechanization, crop and livestock development, chemical engineering and genetics. These innovations have increased output, efficiency and turned a labor-intensive lifestyle into a highly automated process. Vertical integration of the food industry and the development of commodity crops have led to a shrinking share of consumer food dollar for American farmers. Each farm organization in the United States differs based on the vision of management and is driven by factors such as the objective of the owner, management preference, financial resources, and geographic region. The United States Department of Agriculture has segmented farms into three categories: Rural Residence farms, Intermediate farms, and Commercial farms. Each farm segment utilizes different management practices and is driven by different ethical perspectives to accomplish its goals. In a comparison of the segments, it was found each organization fills a need in society and the business model of each has its strengths and weaknesses. The final section of this report develops a business model to direct market the beef production of several local farmers. The objective of Wisconsin’s Best Beef cooperative is to increase the producer’s share of the consumer dollar spent on beef by direct marketing a premium quality and consistently flavorful beef product to the consumer. This will be accomplished by creating a marketing cooperative, which will pool the production of several beef producers, add value through contract processing, and market the finished product directly to consumers. The beef-marketing cooperative allows the producer to retain ownership of the product until it reaches the consumer. The outline of this business model features the major areas of an organization including, but not limited to, organizational design, finance, marketing, and supply chain. Direct marketing agricultural products may help overcome some of the business challenges facing the American family farmer’s share of the consumer food dollar spent. This increased revenue should then allow these farmers to compete and survive in an increasing globally-competitive agricultural sector.

Marnocha, Thomas J. “ A Corporation Must Satisfy All of its Primary Stakeholders to Provide Optimal Return to its Stockholders”

April 15, 1996, 168pp, bibliography, appendices, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: As global competition intensifies, corporations need to satisfy each of their primary stakeholders to optimize stockholder value. For several decades corporations have focused on core competencies typically satisfying only one stakeholder. In the information age, stakeholders are more informed and capable of comparing how different corporations are meeting their needs. The research available, prior to this thesis, centers around satisfying a specific stakeholder. This thesis will integrate the needs of the total primary stakeholder environment to demonstrate how a corporation can optimize stockholder value by satisfying this total primary stakeholder equation. The total primary stakeholder environment consists of the stockholder, employee, customer, government and supplier. Although at first the author thought the community was a primary stakeholder, he learned that the community did not meet the characteristics of a primary stakeholder but rather that of a secondary stakeholder. As defined by Max Clarkson in A Stakeholder Framework for Analyzing and Evaluating Corporate Social Performance, “A primary stakeholder group is one without whose continued participation a corporation cannot survive in the market.” This thesis demonstrates that through the satisfaction of each primary stakeholder, improved stockholder value is realized. The ability to optimize stockholder value is recognized when a corporation achieves the highest return while leveraging its expenses. Furthermore, some primary stakeholders need to be partially or completely satisfied to successfully satisfy another primary stakeholder. By demonstrating primary stakeholder satisfaction leads to improved profitability thus stockholder value for the corporation, this thesis disproves the current prevailing corporate belief that optimal stockholder value can be achieved by focusing on satisfying only one primary stakeholder. To achieve optimal stockholder value, a corporation must not merely satisfy the interests of a few of the primary stakeholders but must integrate all its primary stakeholders.

Maron, Brian “An Analysis of Undertaking a Short Term Expatriation of a United States Citizen to the United Kingdom”

Dec. 19, 2005, 100pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The overall benefits of an expatriation assignment to the United Kingdom outweigh the overall costs, when the expatriation is undertaken using criteria which will be detailed in this thesis. This thesis will consider all measurable costs but will also consider costs and benefits that are less tangible on the surface. In addition, there is an extensive examination of how the social and business cultures in the United Kingdom relate to each other and how they are very different from those in the United States. The impact of social factors on the overall costs and benefits of an expatriate assignment is as significant as the tangible costs and benefits themselves. This is a point that is often overlooked when considering expatriate assignments. Because of this, a significant amount of personal experience from the author, a current expatriate, is also shared in this paper. In the end, it will become evident that with proper planning and in the appropriate situation the benefits of a short term expatriation outweigh the costs. The failure rate of American expatriates on assignment in the United Kingdom is higher than that of any other country. Social adaptation and cultural adaptation are the biggest factors in the success or failure of an American expatriate relocating to the United Kingdom. This thesis includes extensive background information relating to British social and business culture and how these are related to American social and business culture. The ideal candidate for expatriation to the United Kingdom is one who has a partner and no children. The second tier of candidates would be those who have a partner and preschool aged children. The candidate must possess a strong ability for social and cultural adaptation. The following items significantly improve the changes of a successful expatriation: cultural training, continued training while in the host country, and being expatriated to an office with an existing infrastructure and human resource network. This thesis is based on extensive existing literature research along with first-hand knowledge of the subject. The literature research includes sources from both North America and Europe. The personal experience is based on the fact that the author was expatriated to the United Kingdom in 2004 for a professional position. This position was within a company that the author had been employed by for nine years prior to expatriation. The primary target audience for this thesis is an American company considering sending American employees to the United Kingdom on short-term expatriate assignments. The secondary target audience is an American employee who is considering an expatriate assignment in the United Kingdom.

Marr, Michael J. “Continuous Discounting Applied to the Ranking of Capital Investments”

1983, 41pp
Archival copy only

Marshall, David A. “Master Production Scheduling: An Overview Towards Implementation”

Nov. 1983, 45pp
Archival copy only

Marten, Jonathan, and Jennifer Wisniewski, Ghaith A. Daoud, and Uwe Knie “Examining the Business Case of Millwood Inc.”

Feb. 13, 2007, 99pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis includes a business analysis of Millwood Inc.’s Cudahy, Wisconsin facility. The project team spent two days on-site, working closely with Millwood personnel and conducting research on the company, concentrating on the corporate and local organization that included an evaluation of the organizational structure, customer/supplier relationships, strategic management process, process flow, change management, and existing human resources and quality systems. Using the information obtained from the site visits along with additional secondary research conducted by each student, the project team is making recommendations on process and system improvements that will allow Millwood Inc. to increase throughput while also increasing quality and employee motivation. The team recommends reversing the direction of repair line to increase the continuity of the product flow. This will allow workers to access the current bulk lumber storage area instead of having to restock individual lumber carts throughout the day. Expected results include an increase of repaired pallet throughput and a decrease of non-value added time, such as material handling activities. A partial reallocation of a material handling position to a quality control function further allows implementing a quality audit system, potentially increasing product quality and thus strengthening the customer-supplier relationship. Changes to the handling of scrap wood are also recommended by moving dumpsters closer to the repair workers and providing screen shields to address employee safety concerns.

Martin, Donald L. “Introduction to the Management Process as a Network”

May 1972, 40pp
Archival copy only

Martin, Jason John William “The Economics of Sport: The PowerAde Iceport’s Economic Impact on the City of Cudahy”

June 9, 2007, 107pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The sports industry is a diverse market with many types of participative sporting events. The involvement of government with expenditure and taxation creates revenue. These revenues can be contributed to the elite or professional sector and the recreational sector of sports. Both sectors receive subsidies but the professional sector may only account for 10 percent of industry revenues. The other 90 percent of this industry’s revenues can be financially attributed to the public market. The PowerAde Iceport is one of these facilities that attempted to gain a large portion of the hockey market in the Milwaukee area. The connection of personal time, monetary funds, composition cost, and the risk of injury are the influencing aspects of sports participation. For hockey, the composite cost and risk of injury are the major aspects that dissuade participants. This high contact sport may cause serious injuries, especially in older participants. Also, the high cost of equipment, registration, and ice time negatively impacts the participation rate in the United States. Despite this, the designers of the PowerAde Iceport, Sportsites, LLC, believe they could be successful in a low participation market, south-eastern Wisconsin. The business plan provided to the city of Cudahy by Sportsites could be considered misleading. Sportsites proposed that the facility would be financially successful by the second year while increasing profit margins each year with large debt to the city and bank investors. This was very doubtful from the view of the industry experts. In addition, it has been alleged that Sportsites provided manipulated data that changed from year-to-year. The changing data would lead most people to believe that this was management-poor developer. These characteristics play a role in the management’s failure to attract clients for the use of their facility. The facility’s management believed in using poor or deceptive business tactics to entice the youth and adult hockey players in the area to join the PowerAde team. Management did this knowing quite well that these players already belonged to an organization; and in addition, the PowerAde Iceport had previously used unethical negotiating tactics to bully the SHAW organization to join the PowerAde team. By the time the city’s Common Council met to converse about the termination of the project, the Sportsites management team had pressured the hockey participants through the use of questionable business practices, which resulted in the rising up of Cudahy residents in order to speak out against the facility. At this time, the Common Council terminated the project due to the controversial past relationships between both parties. The termination of the project was the end result of a poorly managed and implemented business plan. In addition, the misunderstanding of the hockey market in the south-eastern Wisconsin area and the economic status of the city of Cudahy were indicators of the potential failure of the facility before it was built. The lack of an economic analysis of the area and of the opportunity costs of the land resulted in the city’s loss of taxpayer money, as well as the loss of revenues from that land in that time period.

Matthews, Terrence M. “Application of the ‘Self-Solve’ Process and its Organizational Impact”

April 21, 1997, 70pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The objective of this thesis is to prove or disprove whether Sidmond C. Williams’s dissertation, entitled “Self-Solve: Enabling Employees Through Conflict Self-Management,” is successful in a work environment. “Self-Solve” is a form of mediation that is applicable in a business setting for resolving interpersonal conflicts. “Self-Solve” uses peer mediators and a highly structured process to accomplish this. In preparing to evaluate the merits of the “Self-Solve” process, my research efforts were directed towards establishing a “Self-Solve” mediation program at the organization where I am employed. The President of A&E Manufacturing Company allowed me the opportunity to conduct my research and thesis project at the facility. The thesis project was to last one year at which time the project would be evaluated. Employees were informed of the project by letter indicating that it was for a trial basis of one year and that it was part of my thesis research. The letter stated that the mediation program would be termed “Peer Mediation In The Workforce” and if successful, it would supplement our current progressive disciplinary policy. A team of six employees throughout one company was selected and trained in the use of mediation skills. These people then became mediators within the company. They eventually conducted nine successful mediations over the twelve month period of this study. A before-and-after survey of the company’s employees was conducted using the Likert management system survey. Likert’s Survey Number One (long version ) was given to each employee at the start of the project to establish a baseline for monitoring changes in organizational development. A second survey, Survey Number Two (Likert’s short version), was given to all employees at the conclusion of the project. My thesis project produced several significant findings. The findings include the following: • All mediations undertaken were successful. • There were no reoccurrences of the problems encountered. • There were no other employee conflicts during the last six months of the thesis project. • There were greater employee involvement in projects. • There is evidence of increased problem solving skills by lower level employees within the organization. • The organization has become more participative as indicated by an analysis of the Likert Survey results. The Likert Surveys show that our organization realized minor improvements in all areas (e.g., motivation, etc.) and that there was a definite movement from Likert’s System 2 to System 3 as a direct result of the peer mediation project. This means that our company is a benevolent-authoritative system and entering a consultative system. Employees showed a slight improvement in regards to the confidence in leadership and communications. There was no change in the perception of who employees believe to be making the decisions. One conclusion of my thesis is that “Self-Solve” or “Peer” mediation is very successful at providing the basis for problem solving. It forces the disputants to solve their own problem(s) or fail and suffer the consequences for their action in the future. The implementation of peer mediation apparently altered employees’ perception of the company. In our case, the organization is beginning to gradually move towards a more participative environment. This is important because with this type of movement comes a greater ability to solve problems in the areas of relationships, interdependence, and cooperative relationships. The peer mediation program appears to be successful for our organization, its employees, and the working environment.

Mayer, Lawrence Neal “Developing a Medical Equipment Preventive Maintenance Department in a Hospital”

Nov. 1982, 96pp
Archival copy only

McBeth, Richard Reid “A Product Line Planning System”

Aug. 1970, 37pp
Archival copy only

McCormack, Gregory James “An In Depth Analysis of the Academic and Market Acceptance of the Master of Science Degree in Engineering Management at the Milwaukee School of Engineering”

Feb. 1990, 159pp
Archival copy only

Mehail, James J. “The Strategic Marketing And Finance Mix: A Quantitative Method for Evaluating, Planning and Controlling Marketing Expenditures Based on Tangible Historic Company and Marketing Data”

Oct. 1997, 108pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Strategic marketing has historically had a problem with inconsistent and subjective financial planning, evaluation and control, which indicates a need of a practical objective quantitative analysis method. It currently is a very elusive, qualitative managerial discipline and is even more elusive when coupled with traditional strategic financial quantitative analysis. Strategic marketing is an aspect of strategic management (planning) which has had much focus, enhanced by total quality studies, but not necessarily in the area of general marketing quantitative financial planning, evaluation and control. The marketing department of a company may use numerous mathematical techniques for specific sales projections resulting from mutually exclusive advertising campaign expenditures. Yet the assignment of a quantitative means to gauge the marketing department’s strategic effectiveness is still vague at best. There is an obvious quantitative need in business for the application of controls and feedback to the marketing department performance measures. This paper meets this need and recommends a curve fitting and equation generating technique applied to marketing expenditures versus sales. The historic challenge that marketing faces is the annual submission of a budget request based on subjective, experienced-based decision making. While this opaque qualitative amount may serve the marketing department from year to year, it is increasingly viewed with contempt by other functional departments and top-management. A mathematical method of budget request submission would carry more credibility and be well received by the finance sector of a corporation. The purpose of this marketing-budgeting process scrutiny is developed by the objective analysis of the historic, subjective and strategic marketing process. This thesis addresses the problem of strategic marketing department performance analysis, its quantitative planning, evaluation and control. The main purpose of this paper is to demonstrate objective, quantitative graphical and mathematical methods for strategic marketing financial planning, evaluation and control. This thesis investigates why the subjective situation exists and prescribes a graphical/mathematical method to remedy the situation. There are alternative subjective qualitative techniques which are applied to specific tactical decisions and can also be applied to strategic decisions. However a quantitative method is the focus. This method incorporates an objective means of assessing the effectiveness of the efforts of the marketing department, rather than just specific tactical advertising campaigns. This thesis will not only indicate the historic effectiveness of marketing efforts through a graphical means, but also offers a mathematical method of strategic planning with equations that will be more accurate than the traditional methods such as a linear ratio method. It critically examines the marketing for practical incorporation into this process. The mathematical method for marketing performance analysis is the fundamental premise of this thesis. It results in the successful establishment of limits as well as measurement and accounting categories. This mathematical method can then be used for strategic managerial marketing financial planning, evaluation and control. It is specifically applicable to new top-level managers who are not seasoned and do not yet have the experience or “feel” for the future of a company both short and long-term. The specifics of this method apply linear mathematics to curvilinear (non-linear) equations describing the horizontal parabolic distribution of sales vs. marketing expenditures. This curvilinear distribution analysis method is more accurate than a simple linear ratio method. It analyzes historic marketing department performance data and predicts future performance results of planned expenditures. With higher accuracy, this mathematical method is also applicable to contemporary problems which include downsizing, global marketing, restructuring, reorganizing and reengineering, each of which can have tremendous impact on a company’s performance. This method affords accurate performance mapping which in turn allows the company to be even more fiscally competitive. Only by continued refinement and attention to detail can a company anticipate remaining competitive in today’s, and the future’s dynamic business environment. This mathematical method will certainly be of use in more than just the marketing area of strategic management. It can also be used for analysis of a product life cycle which possesses a similar curve distribution but different contrasting data. The current status of industry strategy development is primarily qualitative. A quantitative curvilinear strategic marketing appropriation budget method has not been developed, applied or recorded in most companies. This thesis draws the conclusion that strategic marketing performance is in strong need of a quantitative analysis method which is answered by the graphical and mathematical method as displayed in this paper. This paper’s recommendation is that corporations should apply this procedure as an augmenting tool for strategic management’s evaluation, planning and control associated with a corporation’s marketing department.

Meshinesh, Khader “Alternatives to Corporate Downsizing”

Spring 1996, 137pp, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: In the business world, change has become the norm. The steady, predictable growth of the 1950’s through the 1970’s has given way to changes that have no historical precedent, such as global marketplace competition, radical innovations, limited natural resources, and major shifts in attitudes about work, employees, and leadership. Change is one of the foremost issues in today’s business world. On the one hand, it represents growth, opportunity, and innovation. On the other hand, it represents threat, disorientation, and possible loss of business. Over the past few years, many firms have resorted to the strategy of downsizing to improve profits without addressing the fundamental issue of company inefficiency or exploring other viable alternatives to improve their company’s profit. This thesis demonstrates that there are alternative ways to reduce costs other than the downsizing strategy. It shows how these alternatives are applied to a particular business to optimize efficiency and improve profit. Chapter 2 identifies the factors that affect the organization and causes the loss of profits. These factors are explained in detail to lay down the foundation to formulate the right alternatives for the particular business problem. With the foundations established, Chapter 3 and 4 deal specifically with business strategies to offset loss of profits. In Chapter 3, an overall description of the downsizing strategy is presented. This includes the positive effects of downsizing (economical and organizational benefits), negative effects (employee’s morale, loyalty, and productivity), and the effect on the quality of service or product itself. Chapter 3 also shows how a firm can deal with such negative effects by improving communication and redefining the Human Resources function. For those firms who have to downsize, Chapter 3 presents the best methods to execute the downsizing strategy. This includes execution strategy, early retirement incentive, hiring freezes, voluntary temporary leave, and reduction in work hours. The chapter also discusses the limitations of the downsizing strategy. In Chapter 4, the different alternatives to downsizing are presented. The first portion of the chapter shows how the firms must rethink their business strategies relative to their market position. Execution strategies for market challengers and avoiders are identified and presented. In the second portion of Chapter 4, the author defines the criteria of implementing alternatives to downsizing by presenting definitions of good business conditions (no crisis situation) and poor business conditions (crisis). The last portion of this chapter is designated as the introduction of the alternatives to downsizing and how they help the firm in terms of cutting costs and improving profits. These alternatives are: (1) re-engineering strategy (elimination of bureaucracy, work teams, core competencies, elimination of non-value added tasks and contracting out non-core activities), (2) use of Failure Mode and Effect Analysis method (FMEA), (3) Value Management Technique (VM), and (4) other strategies (centralization, use of information technology, suggestion plan, improvement of delivery of service or product, improved productivity, flexible workplace, Total Quality Management, and continuous improvement strategy). Companies are better off if one or a combination of these strategies can be implemented to improve quality, process efficiencies, and market share gains. Once the alternatives to downsizing are identified, guidelines for selecting the appropriate strategy mix for a particular business is presented in Chapter 5. In this chapter, the author shows how alternatives identified in Chapter 4 can be applied to a particular business. For simplification, the author chose to describe and analyze existing practices of a company he is familiar with. To complement Chapter 5, a description of the profitable and efficient organization is given in Chapter 6 (profitable organization such as Xerox and unprofitable business such as Litton Microwave). The efficient firm focuses on the customer, innovative products, flexibility, and cost containment techniques that help sustain profitability. Finally, it is recognized that a great deal of further research is required to fully shed light on how firms can further enhance their profits in this era of change. In Chapter 7, three areas in particular are suggested for further investigation. These areas are: the psychological aspects involved in the strategy of downsizing and how it affects earnings, establishment of downsizing alternatives relative to company size, and research to identify factors that maximize company efficiency. In summary, the thesis showed the limitations of downsizing strategy and identified viable alternatives to reduce costs, thus improving profits with minimum or no layoffs.

Meyer, Andrew E. “Synthesis of Six Sigma, Lean and Theory of Constraints: A Holistic Approach to Business Management”

Feb. 5, 2003, 74pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The quality movement of the early eighties has successfully elevated the quality conscience of American business organizations. In the movement’s wake remains a legacy of quality programs. The most pervasive of the quality concepts adopted is that of continuous improvement yet businesses struggle with sustaining continuous improvement. Today, three approaches to continuous improvement are practiced under the names of Six Sigma, Lean, and Theory of Constraints. The author acknowledges that these improvement methodologies are equally relevant to all types of businesses but limits the focus of this paper to for-profit business organizations. Each approach has demonstrated an ability to generate a successful outcome, however none is a panacea. Organizations can avoid choosing one at the exclusion of the others by choosing instead to synthesize the three approaches. The author argues synthesizing Six Sigma, Lean, and Theory of Constraints is possible but requires that one understand organizational expectations for continuous improvement, each method’s philosophic positioning, and the capabilities of the tools available with each methodology. The author conducts assessments in each of these areas and rationalizes that synthesis is best accomplished using TOC and constraint management techniques to focus the tools of Six Sigma and Lean. The author concludes that synthesizing the three methodologies yields a holistic approach to business management. Synthesizing provides a platform for merging divergent conceptual viewpoints giving practitioners a broader perspective from which to make management decisions. The broader perspective allows managers to be effective outside the realm of process improvement. As such, the synthesized approach to improvement becomes a holistic approach to business management, effecting more than just manufacturing systems.

Michalski, Paul A. “Changing Employee Work Values- A Problem that Faces Management”

May 1980, 56pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: For most of this century, U.S. employee work values have remained basically the same. As a result of employee work values not changing significantly, employers and management did not have to pay much attention to them. Techniques used to motivate employees to perform were seldom, if ever, changed because there was no need to do so. Then in the late 1960’s and early 1970’s, employee work values began to change. Because employers and management were unprepared for this change, problems with motivating and satisfying employees with their work arose. By the end of the 1970’s many employers and managers had failed to respond to the different employee work values and the problems of motivation and job satisfaction worsened. As a result, workers became alienated from their jobs and the growth rate of productivity decreased significantly. The purpose of this essay is to systematically study how employee work values have changed over the years; to study the implications of worker alienation caused by employee work values not being responded to by employers and management; to examine two companies’ work improvement programs, which they used to respond to contemporary employee work values, and to show a model which depicts the similarities of the programs; and finally to discuss the role of tomorrow’s manager, which will be required if the model becomes widely used by companies to develop work improvement programs in the future.

Miller, Brian J. “Learning from Japan”

May 1994, 111pp, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: In summarizing, this paper analyzed and evaluated how Japan rose in economic power from a nation that produced cheap and poor quality products following World War II, to one of the most productive and economically powerful nations in the world. Many factors helped to contribute to Japan’s “surge” in economic prosperity, including: Japan’s homogeneity of its people; their people’s powerful sense of self-identity and pride; the aid of their sophisticated political and government institutions linked directly to their business culture; a well-educated population; an acute awareness to continually learn from abroad; a group oriented society that practices collective responsibility and group consensus; the positive repercussions associated with the offering of such employee benefits as lifetime employment; their business executives focusing on long-term objectives and goals; the yen/dollar exchange rate incongruities; relatively low military expenditure; few unemployed; and, a government that encourages spending less and saving more. Japan’s production management methods and organizational/management developments were researched and outlined, with the resulting contributions from these strategies being quite positive and significant for Japan. These Japanese concepts/methods, and their accompanying attributes, included: 1) JIT – the elimination of “wastes”, and the continuous improvement in productivity, quality, customer services, cost reductions and people development; 2) JIT purchasing (single sourcing) – a long-term commitment between both the buyer and the seller that stresses frequent deliveries in small quantities, no variability in amounts shipped, and exceptional quality; 3) Quality management – the catching of errors at the source, defect prevention methods; “everyone” has primary responsibility for quality, beginning with the actual makers of the products; and, to sustain the habit of quality improvement and to continually work towards the target of quality perfection with such facilitators as Quality Circles and employee training in quality; and, 4) Total People Involvement – the Japanese believed that the most critical factor of success in an organization is the development of people; by giving action-point people responsibility and allowing them to participate in decision making, employees’ feelings of self-worth and satisfaction are increased, the quality of decisions are improved, and resistance to change will decrease; this Japanese teamwork approach also promotes job involvement and improves company communications. Japan’s organizational disadvantages and a few of the problems currently facing Japan which may require the Japanese to alter their management style were explored. Some of these problems included: 1) excessively long working hours, and consequently a lack of leisure time and time spent with their families; 2) lack of opportunities for women; 3) underpaid shareholders; 4) a lack of concern for the quality of life for the average Japanese citizens; 5) financial market woes – continuing collapse of the Tokyo stock market; impending real estate bankruptcies; higher capital costs; the rising value of the yen; declining asset values of banks; and, massive bad-loan problems; and, 6) persistent labor shortages. The implications of these problems on Japan’s management style and practices will most likely be significant. It also becomes apparent that Japan is now vulnerable to many of the same market forces that shape the economies of other nations. From now on, Japan will most likely compete more like the “rest of the pack”. The following changes should be made by the U.S. if they are to successfully compete with Japan: 1) an attitude adjustment away from protectionism and the idea that Japan is so uniquely different and superior, to one in which intense efforts are made at improving the U.S.’s delivery of high-quality goods, designed for consumer taste, accompanied by superior service, and at competitive prices; 2) a U.S. management style is needed that promotes quality improvement and incentives tied to these advancements, a long-term focus, JIT and people development principles, and upper management pay linked to employee wages; 3) U.S. must adopt an offensive strategy; 4) cooperation must be fostered between U.S. industry, government, and labor; 5) an improved educational system; and, 6) the U.S. government must cut excessive spending and promote saving. In conclusion, there is much the U.S. can learn from Japan, examples of U.S. companies that have adopted and benefited from Japan’s methods are given. While many of Japan’s “ways” are constantly changing and may not be translatable nor beneficial for each and every U.S. business, Japan should be studied with an open-minded willingness to learn and adopt what particular aspects of their system may prove beneficial. The U.S. should stop “pointing fingers” and feeling sorry for themselves, and start searching for ways to continually improve their own business environment, even if it means learning from Japan.

Miller, David Joseph “The Marketing and Financial Justification of an Investment into a Small Business Located in the Milwaukee Metropolitan Area and Specializing in the Engineering, Sales, Installation and Servicing of Residential Electric Heat Pumps”

Aug. 1970, 37pp
Archival copy only

Miller, Douglas P. “Strategic Perspective to CAD/CAM Justification and Implementation”

Dec. 1984, 69pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Miller, Gregory H. “A Guide to Product Planning”

Aug. 1971, 66pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Miller, Patrice L. “Technology and Labor: An Impact Case Study”

May 1992, 138pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: For well over three decades, computerization has brought about various changes in the work place. Already second and third generation automated techniques are finding their way from the office to the plant floor. The typewriter is now replaced with the word processor, the drafting board with a CAD station, and in many instances, the forklift operator with an automated guided vehicle. Technological advances, which increase productivity, improved quality, and enhance overall flexibility, appear endless. Unfortunately, along with such changes are social repercussions, such as, work place reorganizations, employee resistance, and of course, unemployment due to work force adjustments. As unintended and undesirable as it might be, the reality is that automation often produces these exact results. It is the intent of this paper to examine the effect automation has had on the work force. An examination is made of a group of operators, whose jobs were directly altered as a result of automation, as to how their jobs and attitudes were affected. An analysis of data, obtained through questionnaires and interviews, is presented reflecting various opinions relative to the automation in general, the implementation methods utilized, and employee acceptance. Comparisons are made in an attempt to extract additional information for assessment. In addition, a review of the company and the automation implemented will be presented. Underlying this entire analysis is the view that less than anticipated results will occur if technological change is designed and implemented in such a way which excludes input of the ultimate user.

Miller, Robert John “Changing the Corporate Culture in the Electric Utility Industry”

Nov. 1995, 143pp, references, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The electric utility industry is experiencing significant changes, it is being deregulated and becoming more competitive. Deregulation is forcing utilities to reassess their strategies, structure, and culture. In the early 1990’s the environment electric utilities operate in began to change and this has led to changes in their strategies and structures. Their challenge now is to change their corporate culture so it is aligned with the new strategies and structure. This thesis has three main objectives. First, to explain the changes that are currently taking place in the utility industry. Deregulation, market forces, and technological advancements are the forces of change that are increasing competition and requiring utilities to change their culture. The second objective is to identify what managers can do to support a cultural change. Role modeling, positive reinforcement, communication, union involvement, recruitment, training, coaching, fostering goal setting, and providing more opportunities for employee growth and development are strategies and tactics that managers can use to change the culture. The third objective is to determine if the process of changing the culture in the utility industry is different than what is used in other industries. The process is not much different but there are three essential areas that utilities must focus on if they are going to be successful in their change efforts. First, utilities must provide training for their managers and first line supervisors. The training should focus on improving their communication and motivational skills, including how to manage those employees who resist change. Topics of the training should include coaching, setting goals, reinforcing good performance, and developing teamwork. Second, utilities must focus on improving their marketing skills and strive to gain a better understanding of their customers’ needs. The third area is utilities must provide current information to employees on what changes are happening in the industry and why and how they have to change. The Lewin development model is used as a guide to organize the process of changing culture. Unfreezing is the first step. Employees will resist changes because they look upon changes as a personal criticism, they fear the unknown, they don’t see how the changes will benefit them, or the changes may involve new technologies and employees feel incompetent. Transforming is the second step and is the step in which change actually occurs. Employees begin to adopt new attitudes and behaviors. In the refreezing stage, the third and final step, all the changes that occurred in the transformation phase become stable and permanent. As results are achieved, the focus shifts to sustaining and reinforcing the new positive culture. Contracts with outside change agents are terminated and the new attitudes, values, and behaviors are integrated into everyday processes and procedures.

Miller, Roy G., III. “An Analysis of Automated Information Systems”

July 1970, 59pp
Archival copy only

Minesal, Thomas John “Energy = MC2 = Conservation and Development”

May 15, 1979, 39pp
Archival copy only

Misiak, Thomas L. “An Operating Plan: The Eastwork Facility”

Aug. 1977, 49pp
Archival copy only

Mixdorf, Jon “Entrepreneurial Agricultural Management: A Case Study of Farm Service Agency Borrowers Educational Needs for At-Risk Farmers”

Sept. 1998, 87pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The traditional family farm is being financially challenged by rapidly emerging corporate farming, resulting in many family farmers becoming dependent on the government for financing. The U.S. Department of Agriculture, Farm Service Agency (FSA) is responsible for issuing non-standard loans to farm borrowers unable to obtain credit through commercial banks. The borrowers are required to attend 33 hours of management training to qualify for the loans. The problem facing the management educators and the subject of the thesis is how best to utilize the mandatory training to reach optimum training success and, in turn, success in farm management. After identifying the problem, the second step was to gather information as to the specialized educational needs of the target learners. The FSA approved a survey directed to the 41 FSA Loan Officers who service the borrowers in Iowa. Upon completion of the survey, the results were shared with educators familiar with FSA borrowers and agricultural managerial education. The solution to the problem identified in the thesis involves applying the systematic design of instruction model developed by Walter Dick and Lou Carey as the paradigm for creating the FSA curriculum. The first step in the instructional curriculum was to identify the instructional goals based on the survey results and expert evaluation. The survey data provided information necessary to evaluate learner entry characteristics. Performance objectives and instructional analysis were also prepared in accordance with the instructional model using survey data. The survey was used to provide direction and analysis in all phases of the instructional development model. The need for instructional material specifically prepared for the target audience was revealed through the survey process and expert evaluation. A set of instructional materials specifically designed for the target group is included in the thesis appendix.

Mollgaard, Anton N. “Scheduling of Engineering and Development Departments”

Nov. 1970, 46pp
Archival copy only

Montague, John “Case Study of a Small Business: Peterson Industries Fredonia Wisconsin”

Jan. 1979, 152pp
Available for checkout

Montgomery, Shellise “Managing the Link Between Research and Development and Customer Satisfaction: Creating a Competitive Advantage”

Jan. 1979, 152pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Businesses invest a large percentage of their operating budget into research and development. The high risk involved in a prospective venture may prove profitable through introducing innovative technology and achieving business goals. However, a substantial amount of research and development efforts fail to gain profitable results. Therefore, research and development managers must re-align their strategic business objectives to become more flexible and adapt to the changing environment. There is a drastic need to change the framework in which research and development is currently being managed. Managing the link between research and development and customer satisfaction will improve America’s present economic condition. This demands motivating employees, and properly fitting the key factors – structure, business strategy, performance, customer services and R&D – into a comprehensive plan that focuses on the firm’s mission and objectives to create a competitive advantage. It is the intent of this thesis to first propose a realistic strategy that focuses on utilizing effective management techniques, and understanding the framework in which research and development evolve. This will allow corporate, business, and functional units to work together effectively and efficiently from the initial stages of a project to its final stages. Second, the discussion will incorporate a method to improve communication along the research and development continuum. Third, it will restructure research and development to become a continuous process within the business unit and to strategically align itself with top management’s vision and goals. Finally, it will present a case study of the Saturn Corporation to examine the techniques which allowed them to successfully accomplish; research and development, sales, and customer service goals in an competitive automobile industry. Providing an approach to improve business growth, economic stability, and technological innovation will be the main objective of this paper. Also, it will establish a foundation to develop a framework in which research and development can be managed effectively and efficiently to react to market changes and customer needs within a specified time frame.

Moran, Sean (see Kaufman, Brian)


Morehouse, Jeremy “Business Strategies for Operating a Structural Insulated Panel Business”

October 3, 2008, 107pp
Archival copy only

Morgan, David “E-Commerce and the New Economy”

June 1999, 110pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: E-commerce is growing quickly; commercial transactions using the Internet started in 1996. It is projected by the year 2002 the Internet will be used to conduct more than $300 billion of commerce between businesses. The sale of goods and services electronically is likely to be the largest and most visible driver of the digital economy. Leaders in e-commerce like Amazon.com have demonstrated that existing business models can be rendered obsolete in a very short period. Anyone who is involved in the buying, selling or distribution of goods or services needs to be aware of the potential impact e-commerce could have upon their business. E-commerce is a major new force in the external environment of all companies. The response to this new force must be strategic in nature and driven by the executives of a company as it affects many business functions and possibly the underlying business model. This thesis will review the current state of e-commerce and describe the changes it is causing the external environment. The author will then discuss some potential strategies for managing this new environment.

Morgan, Ned L. “The Engineer’s Attitude and Behavior When Confronted With the Roles of Professional Engineer, Manager and Union Member”

1977, 40pp
Archival copy only

Morrison, Carl “Sales Engineering Management”

Dec. 1981, 54pp
Archival copy only

Muench, Frank J., Jr. “Innovation: The Role of the Customer, the Returns and How Companies and Individuals Can Foster it”

May 25, 1995, 167pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis is a study of innovation. The initial focus is on striking a balance between the popular teaching to only create what the customer wants, and the historic perspectives. These perspectives indicate that breakthrough innovation is driven by individuals using their understanding of technology. It explains why innovation is critical to a company. An examination of the advantages that smaller companies have in innovating, leads to recommendations on actions that larger companies can use to improve the process of innovating. The actions: structuring the organization, accessing technology, empowering employees, rewarding actions, keeping focus on innovation, improving contacts with customers, and developing internal systems used to control innovation are discussed at length. The document presents recommendations for corporations in each area of action. It also provides guidance to individuals who wish to promote innovation in their own environment. The study is based both on extensive research and on 25 years of experience in guiding and directing innovation, working within an organization and with suppliers and customers.

Muhr, David “Elements of Total Quality Management that are Necessary for Success”

March 9, 1995, 111pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Total Quality Management is a topic that has no absolute agreed upon definition. Total Quality Management books are showing up on the shelves by the hundreds. With the advent of global marketing and ISO 9000 Quality System Standards, Hundreds of experts and consultants are stating their views of a Total Quality Management Organization. Instead of focusing on their differences, this essay will extract the common elements that noted experts of the Quality field all mention in their writings. Four Quality experts: Joseph M. Juran, Armand V. Feigenbaum, W. Edwards Deming, and Kaoru Ishikawa, were researched to determine their philosophies, theories, and views as they relate to the topic Total Quality Management. The findings are summarized and outlined in a matrix style format which points out a common framework exists within all four of the experts teachings. One of the commonalities is a Quality System has to exist. This led to an investigation of the requirements as stated in three published Quality System Standards; ISO 9000, MIL-Q-9858, and Ford Motor company. The essay will show that in order for Total Quality Management to exist, an internal Quality System of established procedures must be followed.. Supporting that system are seven management principles that are basic elements necessary for a Total Quality Management Organization; Human Relations, Effective Leadership with Direction, Defined Responsibility and Authority, Continuous Improvement, Use of Statistics, Education & Training, and a Definition of Quality.

Muszynski, Alicia L. “Motivating Generation X in the Professional Work Environment”

March 14, 2004, 105pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Generation X is different than any generation before them. They are diverse. They tend not to follow trends. They even view work differently than generations before them. To members of Generation X (Xers), work is important, but they want more from life. They will even forgo a promotion to maintain a proper work/life balance. Xers view work as an extension of the rest of their life. In addition, many are not intimidated by authority and will treat leaders similar to peers. As a result, methods for motivating Xers can be different than prior generations. Motivating employees can be a challenge. It can be even more of a challenge if they are from a generation other than your own. This is because generations often differ from each other, specifically in their underlying values. Generational differences occur due to a variety of factors, such as historical events, parental influences, culture, etc. For example, many Xers were disappointed as children. They were disappointed by their country’s leaders, whose flaws were revealed through increased media coverage. Many of their parents disappointed them, when they became divorced. In addition, many Xers completed higher level degrees and were unable to find jobs. This thesis specifically studies members of Generation X, who they are, their history, and what they expect. The primary purpose of this discussion is to understand Xers in order to motivate them in the professional workplace. Specific and practical motivational tips for this generation are described in detail.

Mwandia, John Musili “Business Organization”

Fall 1980, 49pp
Archival copy only

Nechvatal, Henry Joseph “Sales Performance Evaluation of an Electrical Equipment Manufacturer”

March 1980, 31pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this essay was to evaluate the sales performance of an international manufacturer of electrical equipment. The evaluation was made from two perspectives, performance of the company as a whole, and product line sales performance. The primary concern was whether or not industrial control products were getting their “fair share” of the company’s selling efforts or market concentration. A survey was sent to sales offices in the United States to determine personnel and distributor market concentrations. Sixteen of the twenty offices responded, representing 10% of the total. During the survey period, 1972 to 1977, the company achieved a successful 15% average increase in sales each year. Sales were split among three major product groups – 45% distribution, 35% industrial control and 20% power systems. Penetration was 14.1 % for distribution products, almost twice the 7.1% for industrial control products. Sales personnel concentrated in three major market segments – industrial, construction and utility. Individual concentrations varied due to different job responsibilities, but the majority (55%) concentrated on the construction market. There was a slight shift from the construction market to the industrial and utility markets. The majority of distributors (59%) concentrated on the construction market, also. Most of the company’s sales (84%) sent through independent electrical distributors. Even with a 12% increase in distributors, the average sales per distributor increased 21%. Of the company’s total sales distributors sold 97% of the distribution products, 83% of the power systems products and 69% of the industrial control products. Industrial control products appeared to be getting their “fair share” of the selling effort, since the industrial market concentration of both the company personnel and the distributors were higher than the percentage of sales achieved. However, industrial control product sales penetration was very low, almost half the penetration for distribution products. The company should concentrate more on the industrial control products, because of their growth potential. The market for industrial control products is 1.5 times larger than the market for distribution products. To protect its share of the distribution product sales, the company should continue to use distributors as the main sales channel and have them concentrate on the construction market. To take advantage of the growth potential of the industrial control products, the company should add sales personnel specifically to concentrate on the industrial market. Additional distributors and additional personnel at existing distributors concentrating on the market segment would be also helpful.

Neuman, David A. “Building an Intellectual Capital Strategy for a Professional Services Organization”

Dec. 19, 2002, 96pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The Information Revolution ushered in a New Economy in which the keys to generating value are not the same as those in the Industrial Economy. The foundation of the New Economy will be knowledge, or intellectual capital, more so than physical capital and manual labor. Many have written and presented theories, techniques, and strategies for maximizing an organization’s knowledge and ability to generate value from that collective knowledge. However, these strategies need to be integrated into a single intellectual capital strategy focused on creating the workforce of tomorrow. An intellectual capital strategy is a multi-faceted strategy that targets the intellectual capital-based capabilities of an organization. An intellectual capital strategy that includes the aspects of organizational maturity, organizational learning, communities of practice, and performance management will increase an organization’s ability to generate value from its intellectual capital. The maturity of an organization sets the workforce foundation that allows the other aspects of the strategy to be implemented. Organizational learning focuses on the development of intellectual capital both at an individual and organizational level. Communities of practice provide the informal organizational structure that allows knowledge workers to collaborate across the organization for the benefit of the community as well as the organization. And finally, new performance management methodologies make it easier to measure and manage an organization built on an intangible asset–knowledge. Professional service organizations are purely human capital organizations whereby value is generated when human capital is converted into tangible services consumed by its customers. Successful service organizations of all sizes must focus not only on the delivery of services, but must equally focus on the continuous development and expansion of their human capital in order to be able to respond to the needs of their customers in the future. Rockwell’s Automation’s Global Manufacturing Solutions business is a global professional services organization that provides eight different service capabilities to its customers, and delivers these services through an organization that spans geographically around the world. An intellectual capital strategy as defined in this paper would support its continuing transformation into an agile multi-capability organization that can make its intellectual capital a competitive advantage. The strategy would help the management team build a distributed knowledge organization, build expertise, manage multiple capabilities, and measure and manage human performance more effectively. Therefore, this paper provides recommendations on how to implement an intellectual capital strategy within Rockwell Automation’s Global Manufacturing Solutions business to maximize its effectiveness as a knowledge-intensive service organization.

Neuman, Michael W. “Reverse E-Auctions and Their Negative Effect on the Buyer/Supplier Relationship”

Jan. 2007, 90pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Emerging World Wide Web technologies are presenting procurement professionals significant new transactional efficiencies in their sourcing activities. Today many buyers are using the Internet as a tool to facilitate the use of online reverse e-auctions in their negotiations with suppliers. Although these reverse e-auctions often yield significant cost savings, the savings can be outweighed by buyer-seller relational strains that are a result of the process. Before implementing a reverse auction model, seasoned procurement professionals need to apply a complete cost-benefit analysis to each situation they identify for reverse e-auction implementation. The misuse or perceived misapplication of the tool can lead to irreconcilable damage to the buyer-supplier relationship. This paper serves to understand reverse auction: the history, application, perceived benefits, and detrimental impact on the buyer-supplier relationship.

Neuzerling, Leon F. “Fundamentals of Reliability Management in the Manufactures of Complex Military and Commercial Systems”

May 1971, 21pp
Archival copy only

Newell, Kristine J. “Product Liability Issues in the Natural Gas Industry: Are Natural Gas Distribution Companies Effective in Approving Pipeline Components?”

March 24, 1998, 115pp, bibliography, references
Available for checkout

Nordquist, Thomas G. “Packaged System for Air Compressor Water Cooling Product Development and Marketing”

June 22, 1973, 40pp
Archival copy only

Noruk, Jeffrey S. “Introduction of an Improved Robotic Justification Method”

Sept. 6, 1988, 109pp
Archival copy only
Abstract: The successful introduction of automation into America’s factories is essential if we are to remain competitive. Identifying the most appropriate areas to automate requires proving both the feasibility and benefits of such action. Feasibility is the domain of the engineer and has been handled quite effectively through the years. Once past this hurdle, the project engineer must then prove to management that this automation can be implemented with a proper return on investment. This justification phase of the project is where most of the mistakes are made.

Cost justification techniques have been around for years and until recently have worked fairly well. The available techniques range from the simplistic payback analysis to the more accurate and involved Net Present Value(NPV) method. However, the success of any of these techniques requires accurate information be available for both costs and benefits. This was easier in the days when labor costs made up 50% of the product’s cost. Today however, direct labor only comprises 5-20% of the final product cost. Thus, cost justification of automation done solely based on direct labor reduction will be hard to justify. This paper attempts to take into account all costs and benefits associated with the introduction of automation in the form of arc welding robots. These items are defined both quantitatively and qualitatively and then brought into an all encompassing spreadsheet format. The accuracy of the NPV calculations will be improved by the proper weighting of all pertinent factors. This information is then put into a “user friendly” computer spreadsheet program and its effectiveness tested using actual robot automation case studies. Implications of this work along with recommendations for future study are then discussed.

The need for good justification techniques, applicable to the real world, has been recognized as one of the biggest problems facing many top executives. The purpose of this paper is to clarify the problem and offer a constructive means of performing more accurate cost justifications in the area of arc welding robots. It is hoped, that some of the results of this research will be applicable to other areas of automation, such as Flexible Manufacturing Systems(FMS).


Ofori-Mattmuller, Andre “Price Can be Used as a Critical Factor in Determining What Foreign Market Entry Alternative Will be Most Profitable””

Sept. 6, 1988, 109pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to provide organizations with a decision making tool on how to enter a foreign market. In today’s status quo of globalization, it is vital that organizations are equipped with methods that will guarantee or sustain a reasonable level of profitability. This method will enable organizations to analyze the country’s market potential, and make calculated adjustments to minimize the risk and establish a level of profitability. Numerous questions have to be asked as an organization decides to go global. What are the cultural differences? What is the global strategy? What is the targeted market? How does price play a role in various foreign countries? Is there understanding of foreign government laws and regulations? Who are the competitors? What options are available for entry into foreign markets? Can an organization compete against local government sponsored monopolies? In this report different methods of foreign entry alternatives and potential barriers will be explained. Illustrations include how pricing at different levels can determine which entry alternative is most profitable. The objective is to help organizations understand the importance of quantifying all related costs (fixed & variable) to determine the acceptable price that will provide profitability and fit the organization’s global strategy.

Oldenburg, Jeff “Manufacturing Bandwidth: The Political Economy of the Telecommunications Industry”

May 15, 2005, 90pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The telecommunications industry has rapidly evolved since its inception in the 1800’s. The industry has been subject to numerous government subsidies and Federal Communication Commission (FCC) regulation. The most controversial of these regulations include the AT&T breakup in 1984 and the passage of the Telecommunications Act of 1996. This paper elaborates on the key aspects and impacts of the regulation and recent deregulation within the telecommunications industry. This thesis studies the various strategies deployed by the largest players within the highly competitive telecommunications industry. Strategies include mergers and acquisitions, strategic alliances, bundling service offerings, new product development and deployment, and discounted leasing strategies. The future of the telecommunications industry looks promising for consumers, suppliers, and carriers as the industry begins its recovery after a dismal recession. For the first time since the passage of the Telecommunications Act of 1996, carriers are competing on a level playing field as the government regulatory agencies have removed most roadblocks allowing market forces to establish pricing and innovation. Regulatory agencies must continue their deregulatory practices to allow more competition within the telecommunications marketplace so that consumers can enjoy better services at lower costs. Mergers and acquisitions, strategic alliances, and bundling service offerings are becoming the norm for carriers within the telecommunications industry. Several researchers have identified customer satisfaction and loyalty as the primary drivers for increasing market share and revenues. Carriers must improve in exceeding customer expectations to develop the required consumer loyalty and satisfaction. Service providers need to look beyond technological advances and deployment strategies to understand what the consumer demands and expectations are. Service providers need to become more dynamic and responsive to these consumer demands in order to establish their service as a differentiator over competitors, thus creating increased stakeholder value. Today, most telecommunications conglomerates are not dynamic enough to establish themselves as service differentiators.

Olsen, Curtis W. “Behavior Modification and Human Resource Accounting as They Relate to Productivity”

May 1984, 74pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Behavior modification techniques are the most readily available and cost effective means for improving productivity. This paper discusses the most important of the techniques, relating all topics to the individual employee and offering specific steps for the development of a more productive environment. Current management styles minimize the value of employee input to decision making and treat workers as disposable commodities. They simplify human behavior, ignoring the complexities of emotional response, and undervalue the importance of performance measurement and its impact on the profitability of the firm. Management time, under present conditions, is spent confronting problems caused by inadequate planning and the lack of personnel motivation techniques. Employment of the following behavior modification techniques will increase worker and management time in such a way that more time will be available for long range planning and personnel development. The building of effective communication and team relation skills lead to positive leadership qualities and ability to respond correctly to various situations. Building self image through positive reinforcement leads to greater worker flexibility in terms of willingness to take on responsibility and accept new tasks, resulting in reduced training time and better employee relations. Formal training programs with recognition of achievement and career guidance demonstrates commitment to employees, boosting employee morale and loyalty. Objective performance review programs help evaluate individual talent and serve as a guide to developing skills which benefit the company as well as aiding in the evaluation of current programs. Implementation of these methods can be expected to improve productivity and profitability of a firm at a minimum cost within a limited amount of time. Planning is required, but the results are well worth it.

Olson, Harlen C. “Quality”

April 1983, 70pp
Archival copy only

Omdahl, Richard A “Strategic Corporate Planning: A Concept and Structure”

May 1982, 34pp
Archival copy only

Onsager, Michael Gordon “The Use of Survey Techniques to Analyze and Project Technology Trends in the Mining Industry”

Jan. 1990, 118pp
Archival copy only

Onuoha, Damian “Planning and Implementing a Manufacturing Process Improvement Process”

May 1999, 119pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Project management experts have identified the essential ingredients for a successful project. These ingredients include the appointment of a capable and effective project manager and the selection of appropriate project organizational structure. The choice of these two success factors may be influenced by the project type (new or independent versus improvement of dependent project types). For the project manager to be effective in managing the project, he or she must join the project in the early stages and participate in defining the project. This timely participation is critical for him or her to be effective in implementing the project. The project manager must have a complete understanding of the goal and objectives of the project. He or she must lead the effort to develop project schedule and budget, as well as in the selection of project team members. In the absence of project manager’s early involvement and leadership, a great amount of energy will be spent later fighting over project scope issues and direction. The ultimate outcomes of this wasted effort would be a project that falls behind schedule, encounters cost overruns, and that does not satisfy the performance requirement of project customers. The danger for projects to be unsuccessful because of scope creep and inadequate coordination is greater on improvement projects than on new projects. This is so because improvement projects typically involve more people and have to accommodate existing and ongoing operations. Another factor critical to the success of any project is the selection of the project organizational structure that fits both the personnel and expertise basis of the hosting organization. Before deciding on one type of project organization type versus the others, it is very important to understand the pros, cons, and the underlying assumptions for each type. For a turnkey (project organization) method to be successful, the host or client departments must have the ability to operate and maintain the new system being turned over to them. This requires that the necessary skills and experience be available in the client’s organization or that the project team develops this expertise foundation as part of its objectives. It is also very important that the operation or client departments be actively involved in defining the desired state (new system) as to pro-actively consider the impacts on the existing organization infrastructures and resources. For a turnkey project to be successful, both the project leaders and the client departments must work closely together through project initiation, definition, planning, and implementation.

Orgovan, Andrew Joseph “The Role of Cognitive Biases in Strategic Decision Making and Ways to Avoid Them”

May 1992, 100pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The strategic decision records of many corporations are very often stories of failure. Although there are many reasons offered in the management literature for this poor performance, little mention is made about the cognitive limitations of the executives who must make complex decisions. The overall goal of this essay is to increase the awareness of the role of individual cognitive biases in producing poor strategic decisions. These biases are identified and some approaches are suggested to try to avoid them. Chapters 2 and 3 deal specifically with strategic decision making itself. In Chapter 2 each stage of the strategic decision making process is reviewed. These stages include: environmental scanning, strategy formulation, strategy implementation, and evaluation and control. By understanding the strategic decision process, as it is commonly followed today, it then becomes possible to explore how cognitive biases may influence that process. In Chapter 3, the three different models of strategic decision making are presented which show the various perspectives that strategic decision making can be viewed from. In this chapter it is shown that in addition to cognitive limitations of the individual decision-maker, there are political and organizational factors that can also impact the quality of strategic decisions. The seven main steps in the individual decision making process are then examined in Chapter 4. The focus of this chapter is to review how individuals make decisions; from establishing goals and objectives to evaluating how well decisions have been implemented. It is at the level of individual decision making that cognitive biases form the basis for influencing organizational, or strategic, decisions. The manner in which individual managers prefer to gather and process information are influenced by their biases. One such approach to information gathering and processing is decision making in groups. In Chapter 5 of this essay three main techniques of making decisions in groups are examined. The strengths and weaknesses of each technique are discussed as well as the value each has in developing sound decisions. With the foundation laid by the previous review of strategic, individual, and group decision making, 10 cognitive biases are identified in Chapter 6 which can affect the strategic decision making process. These biases not only influence the way decision-makers gather and process information, but also how they establish selection criteria for choosing an alternative strategy. The way decision groups can exhibit certain biases are also examined. These group biases, also called choice shift effects, are linked to the cognitive biases of the group members. In an attempt to improve the quality of strategic decision making 3 approaches to avoiding cognitive biases are presented in Chapter 7. Top management must be committed to understanding why cognitive biases exist and how they can affect decision making before there can be true progress in avoiding biases. Finally, it is recognized that a great deal of further research is required to fully shed light on the role of cognitive biases, and limitations, of corporate executives on strategic decisions. In Chapter 8 two areas in particular are suggested for further investigation. These two areas are: the role of decision groups in avoiding cognitive biases in strategic decision making; and the connection between Jungian personality types and cognitive biases. Understanding the nature of this “linkage” may help in avoiding biases at the various stages of the decision process.

Osiecki, Roger Steven “Managing for Productivity”

Jan. 1989, 74pp
Archival copy only

Papp, Joseph “The Effect of Demand Variability on Manufacturing Control Systems”

Nov. 1993, 210pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Paradis, Michael A. “Developing Technical Managers for Maximum Effectiveness”

1980, 39pp
Archival copy only

Parr, Rebecca A. “Development of Clean Room Markets for a Print-on-Demand Identification Systems Manufacturer”

May 2000, 107pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: A fictional company, Parr Label & Tape, is a manufacturer of print-on-demand identification systems. These systems use software, a printer, and adhesive-backed labels to print barcode and variable information that can be used to identify parts in a manufacturing process. The company is evaluating whether to enter the clean rooms market with particulate clean identification systems. The major markets that are included in the total clean rooms market are semiconductor and medical. Medical is made up of medical devices and pharmaceuticals. The total worldwide markets for semiconductors, medical devices and pharmaceuticals are: Semiconductor $174 billion in 2000 Medical Device $145 billion in 1998 Pharmaceutical $271.9 billion in 1999. Parr Label & Tape is familiar with the clean room requirements of a semiconductor fab, but does not currently supply the medical market and is not familiar with medical clean room requirements. The author assumes that the reader has a general knowledge of semiconductor clean rooms but not of medical clean rooms. For that reason, most of the information on semiconductor clean rooms is contained in Appendix A. A copy of the new ISO/TC209 standards, which covers both the semiconductor and medical clean rooms, is in Appendix B. A detailed analysis of medical clean rooms is the topic of Chapter 6. All of these markets show growth opportunities in the next several years, and will become good strategic fits for Parr Label & Tape. The author includes a strategic market plan for Parr Label & Tape to follow in the next five years. Highlights of the strategic marketing plan are: 1. Supplying both the semiconductor and medical clean room markets requires the same drivers; global supply, one stop shopping, meeting new cleanliness demands, individual tracking systems, minienvironments, improved contamination detection, and price. 2. Parr Label & Tape should develop the semiconductor and medical clean room markets within the next two years. The plan includes market segmentation strategy, development of B2B, development of distribution channels, and marketing mix strategy. 3. Markets are at different stages of knowledge and acceptance for print-on-demand bar code labels. The semiconductor industry completely understands the technology. The medical industry is just starting to learn about the technology. Other markets like flat panel displays and food processing will need to learn the technology. Parr Label & Tape can use the knowledge it gains in the semiconductor market to educate the medical, flat panel display, and food processing markets. 4. The company needs to become involved in industry organizations. This is part of the promotion strategy, and will enable the company to guide where the industry is going. 5. The company should look at bundling products and services. For example, the company supplies not only the particulate clean identification system for a semiconductor clean room, but also provides general labels and tapes for the entire facility. Flat panel displays and food processing are two future markets for particulate clean identification systems. The author recommends that Parr Label & Tape develop these markets in the five-year time frame. Parr Label & Tape can use their expertise gained in the semiconductor and medical markets to quickly enter and develop the flat panel display and food processing markets.

Pastella, Glenn D. “Total Quality Management and Continuous Improvement in an Automated Electronic Assembly Environment”

June 1994, 150pp, works cited
Available for checkout
Abstract: Quality in America has been declining since World War II. After the war, quality gurus, such as Deming and Juran, traveled to Japan to teach and explain quality and quality management to the Japanese engineers, managers and corporate executives. In thirty years, that war devastated country, rose to become a world leader in quality. Since then, Japanese businesses have outperformed the United States companies in quality. This has put many United States’ companies either in a secondary business position to their Japanese counterparts’ or has put many companies out of business because they could not compete. Unsuccessful attempts were made to copy and implement the Japanese philosophy and systems into American manufacturing. It was not until the 1980s that there was an awakening by business, and the consumer, that the American quality and business advantages had slipped away to the Japanese manufactures. Something had to be done to become competitive again in the evolving global market and economy. The quality philosophy and management that emerged is “total quality management.” What is presented here is the history of and the need for quality in manufacturing. The concept of Total Quality Management is examined from various viewpoints and then defined. This presentation looks at management from the corporate level, those who define, not only the corporate goals, but also the quality vision, direction and policy. The term “Total Quality Management” is broken down into its various elements so that middle level management might implement it. Of course, there will be problems encountered along the way. Many of these problems will be described. A manufacturing example, an automated facility which assembles electronic print be used to illustrate many of the points of total quality (and continuous improvement). The points that are discussed in this section are management’s commitment to quality, customers, education, leadership, involvement, design and process quality, process and continuous improvement and benchmarking. The last section presents a summary of the future quality areas that organizations will need to address over time.

Pausch, Terrance Joh “In Search of a Computer Aided Design System”

May 1984, 79pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to act as a guide in the steps that a business may pursue to determine if computer aided design (CAD) is a practical method of improving the productivity of its engineering department. I will limit my discussion to those businesses that do not have a need or a desire for computer aided manufacturing (CAM) because CAM is another, although related, subject. CAD is the use of computers in an interactive graphics computer system to assist in the process of conceptualizing, analyzing and documenting designs. This statement leads to another definition: an interactive graphics computer system is one which interacts with the operator. That is to say, that while information is being added to the computer’s data base by the operator, the operator is fed information from the computer system to continually update the operator’s understanding of the level of completion of the task. An interactive graphics computer system interacts so closely with the operator that the computer system can be efficiently and economically used as a design and drafting tool. A CAD system is a computer system of specialized hardware (physical components) and software (written programs to direct internal computer operation) designed specifically for engineering design, drafting, analysis, and manufacturing engineering. Using a CAD system, designers, draftsmen, and engineers can develop, analyze, and manipulate engineering designs on a television-like display terminal. Different views and perspectives of a design can be obtained, small sections of a design can be magnified for closer inspection, dimensions and weights of a design can be calculated automatically, engineering analysis can be quickly performed and parts lists can be generated automatically. Most CAD systems are modular. Hardware components and software programs are selected according to user requirements. A typical CAD system includes a computer and mass memory for processing and storing information, one or more input terminals or workstations for creating and observing designs, and one or more output devices for converting information stored in the system into drawings and reports. With claims of productivity increases of 8 to 1 for electrical design and 4 to 1 for mechanical design the manufacturing business cannot ignore CAD because these productivity increases would obviously mean reduced costs per sales dollar. To determine the practicality of the purchase of a CAD system, the manufacturing business needs to answer several questions about itself and about CAD. These questions center around three broad categories of information: 1) what are the manufacturer’s needs? 2) what hardware is available to meet the manufacturer’s needs? 3) what software or programs are available to meet the manufacturer’s needs? To help answer the questions above, there are many articles in trade magazines, seminars and vendor literature available. I have found, through investigating the purchase of a CAD system for the manufacturing business for which I work, that the most difficult task facing me was to develop and assimilate all of the information available from the above mentioned sources into an organized decision making structure. In other words, to know what is available and from whom and to know the steps necessary to reach a correct decision. This paper, then, will attempt to guide the reader through this maze of information and thus shorten and improve the decision making process.

Peltier, Dan and Doug Lawrence and Steve Witucke “Radio Frequency Identification: A Potential Future Business Growth Opportunity for Tailored Label Products”

Oct. 1 2006, 93pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: RFID is a huge opportunity for companies to enhance their business processes with new information about how efficiently the organization is operating on a global scale. Use of RFID with accompanying support software will enable companies to track items and enhance the visibility of their supply chain; however, the RFID technology itself is in a state of transition. Standardization has not yet come to this technology, and companies who are early adopters do so with great risk. TLP, in the business of making custom labels for use in specialty environments, is looking to enhance their growth potential by leveraging their considerable knowledge and capabilities in unique label production to provide unique label solutions to customers looking to affix RFID tags to items. Through a survey and market analysis, the authors have identified members of TLP’s existing customer base as well as other potential market sectors where TLP could enter the label market. The authors also offer alternative methods for entering the market including integration with the existing operations, creation of a new business unit and creating a joint venture with another company. Finally, the authors urge caution, reviewing TLP’s core competencies and abilities today, and reflecting on the cost and risk involved in such a market move.

Pergolski, Rodney J. “Expanding Horizons: The Impact of Due Diligence and the Art of Successful Mergers and Acquisitions”

May 8, 2007, 139pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The worldwide marketplace steadily becomes a more complicated and competitive arena for companies to participate in. In an effort to be more competitive, firms must develop new and innovative practices to improve costs, quality, speed of delivery, or throughput, and responsiveness to the customers’ needs. As simple as that sounds, it becomes more and more difficult to be different from the rest when literally everyone is doing many of the same things to improve their market position. In certain cases, some companies are just not in a position to be able to compete on their own without some sort of external help. When no more answers can be found within the framework of the company as it exists, the answer must lie within another. This is what leads companies to consider the possibility of merging with or acquiring another. Regardless of the consolidation option chosen, the end result is to create synergy that makes the value of the combined companies greater than the sum of the two parts. This synergy exists when the value created by business units working together exceeds the value those same units create working independently. The first hurdle is determining which variety of consolidation is the best for the interested company in its specific industry. Management must understand what varieties exist and what makes any one of them a better option than the others. A merger is a strategy through which two firms agree to integrate their operations on a relative co-equal basis. An acquisition is the strategy employed through which one firm buys controlling interest in another firm making it a subsidiary business within the parent company’s portfolio. A joint venture is a strategic alliance in which two or more firms create a legally independent company to share some of their resources and capabilities to develop a competitive advantage. When trying to meld two separate and distinct companies into one cohesive unit, the odds tend to be stacked against a successful union. A variety of factors account for these failures, such as buying the wrong company, paying the wrong price or buying at the wrong time. The most important tool neglected too often, however, is due diligence. Due diligence is the act of fully evaluating the target firm from all aspects and understanding the market in which the acquisition is taking place and should cover a variety of disciplines including: strategic, tax, legal, intellectual property, environmental, operational, finance and accounting, and people and culture due diligence. In an attempt to guarantee a successful due diligence process, certain individuals or teams must be involved. In addition to the due diligence team leader, the short list of team members should include a strategic development engineer, a specialist or two in operations management, legal advisors, tax consultants and human resource experts. Many electronic tools currently exist to support these important due diligence efforts along with the tried and true old-fashioned legwork, interviews, and other data-gathering methods. In this ever changing world of commerce, mergers and acquisitions will continue to be the opportunity of choice for many companies across the globe. Although inclined to failure due to ignorance or inexperience, the odds of success can be increased dramatically through the careful and relentless use of due diligence. Although it is not an inexpensive endeavor, due diligence can ultimately result in successfully avoiding failure of the acquisition, which would exceed the cost of the due diligence many times over.

Perlewitz, Ralph L. “Research Management in the Private Sector”

1978, 42pp
Archival copy only

Pertzsch, Steven Paul “Manpower Requirements and Allocation for the Harley-Davidson Motor Company Engineering Division”

Jan. 1982, 37pp
Archival copy only

Peter, Timothy Jon “Examination of Product Liability Hazards and a Proposal for Their Reduction of Turn Equipment”

Dec. 1988, 83pp
Archival copy only

Petersen, Vern R. “A Systems Engineering Approach to the Design of a Biomedical System”

63pp
Archival copy only

Petrovskis, Ivars A. “Corporate Planning for the Medium-Size Multinational Corporation”

July 1977, 71pp
Archival copy only

Petry, Jack Allan “Application of Priority Rules with Weighted Tardiness Costs in Job Shop Scheduling”

Nov. 1988, 58pp
Archival copy only

Phelan, Sandra “Meeting Customer Needs with Minimum Resources”

July 17, 2001, 68pp, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: How can a manufacturing company today meet customer needs with minimum resources? More simply put, how can a company reduce costs without reducing the quality or timeliness in which they deliver their products? The answer to this begins by understanding the foundation of any manufacturing company: its manufacturing system. There are multiple production planning systems available to today’s manufacturers, however, two prominent systems are that of Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) and Lean Manufacturing. There is much literature and research that outlines the benefits, drawbacks, and requirements of each of these systems, along with what it would take to employ a combined, hybrid system. To best understand how and why different systems should be applied, or where they can be applied, it is best to look at an actual manufacturing company for a practical application. For this research we will look at EZ Paintr, a paint applicator manufacturer, as our model or case study company. The process will start by looking at the systems EZ Paintr currently uses to plan and schedule their production. Through research and understanding of EZ Paintr’s system it is clear to see that EZ Paintr’s systems have many issues and there is significant room for improvement. This research will demonstrate how EZ Paintr can save over $260,000 annually, and improve their system at the same time. However, the process will be a challenge in that it will require serious commitment from top management, good communication, and cultural change for the people working at EZ Paintr. The final phase of this research ends by looking at how the recommendations made for EZ Paintr apply to industry in general. Industry types that fall in the four categories of the product-process matrix, batch, assembly line, job shop, and continuous flow, will all be examined.

Phetteplace, Barry S. “The Effects of Outsourcing on Knowledge Transfer Among Software Engineers”

Dec. 18, 2006, 77pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper examines the effects of outsourcing on knowledge transfer among software engineers. It investigates data gathered from interviews and surveys of software engineers who took part in outsourcing and then analyzes the resulting data utilizing both qualitative and quantitative analysis strategies. Five themes emerged from this analysis: Morale, Communication, Locale Differences, Rationale, and Planning. The paper describes the five themes and how they affect knowledge transfer between local and contractor teams. The effects of outsourcing on knowledge transfer among software engineers depends on how ‘software engineer’ is defined. If software engineer is defined as the domestic programmer working for the company outsourcing the work, the effects are minimal. However, if software engineer is defined as the combination of the local engineering team and the outsourcing contractor team, the effects of outsourcing on knowledge transfer between those two teams are significantly more pronounced. Finally, the management implications of these five themes are linked to currently held beliefs of best practices for outsourcing. The paper recommends methods for limiting the effects and mitigating the risk involved with outsourcing software development.

Piacentine, Thomas Edward “Monitoring of the External Business Environment by the Construction Industry”

May 1990, 62pp
Archival copy only

Piggott, Richard Anthony “Preliminary Project Evaluation of a Chip Resistor”

Dec. 1971, 43pp
Archival copy only

Pink, Lori A. “Knowledge Management and its Role Regarding Plumbing in the Construction Industry”

June 2013, 76pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to explain how a knowledge management system will benefit the plumbing industry. Plumbing Engineers and Master Plumbers are the highest bearers of plumbing knowledge in the plumbing industry. A literature review was conducted along with primary research. The primary research was an interview of plumbing professionals to gain their perception of current thinking regarding a knowledge management system and plumbing portal. All the individuals in the interview responded that their company does not implement a plumbing portal, but they believe a plumbing portal would benefit the plumbing industry. The plumbing industry can reap the benefits of a plumbing portal. The benefits of a plumbing portal would include an increase in competitive advantage, innovation, value, and the skill and competence of employees. It is recommended that the plumbing industry implements a plumbing portal. Creating a knowledge portal for plumbing professionals will help aid in the plumbing job because all the necessary information will be in one place. In addition, the creation and use of the plumbing portal will improve efficiency and save companies money.

Pirkey, James “Employee Involvement- Concepts, Programs, Rewards”

May 1990, 65pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Employee involvement can be described as a means to dramatically change the work environment. It is a mechanism to involve all employees in an organization into the thinking process. It can be used to generate ideas and solve problems. Employee involvement recognizes that every employee, from the least skilled, to the most skilled, has some particular talent or skill. The most underutilized resource of many companies is the knowledge and skill of its employees. The underlying principle of employee involvement is that work becomes more challenging and interesting for employees as their knowledge and skills are improved. Using this approach, employees are able to influence the outcome of decisions that affect their job. For employees, this approach offers not only additional job satisfaction, but also more direct rewards such as higher pay or job security. Employee involvement programs can benefit both company and employees by using its most valuable effective resource-people. What are the benefits of an effective employee involvement program? Employee involvement programs can increase efficiency, productivity, and job satisfaction as well as determine the long-range growth or survival of a company in today’s competitive business environment. This paper will examine the elements of an effective employee involvement program and the obstacles that should be avoided. We will then analyze three Wisconsin companies that have succeeded in offering and implementing an employee involvement program. Finally, we will examine the program currently in place at General Electric Medical Systems and offer suggestions and recommendations for future growth. Employee involvement is a philosophy of management that should be program-implemented if American business is to prosper in our ever-changing world. It is a method to utilize all of the resources available to us, especially the human mind, with its infinite capacity for creativity and ingenuity.

Plout, John D., P.E. “Improving Preproduction Processing Using Knowledge Management Principles as Applied to a Custom Fire Apparatus Manufacturer”

April 17, 2004, 131pp
Archival copy only

Pohl, Rand P. “Management of Multinational Product Development”

May 1994, 102pp, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: A survey of a U.S. manufacturing firm competing in a global environment demonstrates a need for improved new product development methods. Deficiencies identified include the following: 1. Global awareness and mind set are important to the firm yet they are perceived as a relative weakness. 2. Poor harmonization exists within product families and between product lines. 3. Products are not differentiated enough from competitive offerings. This essay discusses an opportunity to resolve these problems and attain product development leadership through the use of an international design team. Leadership can be realized in terms of creating different and superior products resulting in improved efficiencies for the firm and possibly a sustainable competitive advantage. Significant leverage can be realized from international teams in several ways. First, the team can disseminate global information regarding competitive product offerings, customer requirements, technical standards, and government regulations. Second, global members can make important contributions by acting as “independent evaluators” to foster harmonization within and between product families. By comparison, a national product development effort would be handicapped in these areas, resulting in problems identified by the survey. Communication and culture are discussed with the intent to provide an overview for the manager or team leader faced with the task of establishing a successful international product development team composed of Americans and Europeans. During new product development, communication is fast paced and usually deals with only partial information. Effective communication helps ensure that proposed solutions are appropriate, and encourages a collaborative attitude. The challenge for management is determining how to establish and maintain effective communication, to keep valuable ideas flowing between globally dispersed groups of engineers, marketing and production staff. Like other management circumstances, there is no one solution to every team’s challenges. When true international developments are started, a portfolio of mechanisms must be considered to support communication. Consideration should be given to the following: Socialization efforts that encourage situations conducive to forming important relationships necessary for informal communication channels. Social events often start good information flows and can be centered on special events such as when globally dispersed members assimilate for meetings. Socialization could include visiting culturally significant locations or events in the host country. Collocating project team members encourages trust between them and fosters open, person-to-person communication. Collocation allows members of the staff to interact on a daily basis and promotes timely decisions. Establishing a communications management position with a person that has good contacts and the ability to translate information from other facilities into the jargon of his or her own facility. This person can improve the flow of information and act as a focal point, eliminating redundant activities of duplicate requests for the same information. Implementing rules and procedures enhances formal communication through regular reporting and documentation. Formal project plans or schedules can serve to communicate the team’s performance and encourages interaction of team members, since members often must correspond with each other to complete their activities. Utilize electronic communication between globally dispersed design team members, to make communications problems more manageable. However, several pitfalls of electronically transmitted data reveal that it cannot be the sole source of information. Periodic face to face contact seems necessary to maintain confidence at a level high enough to promote successful team progress. Project managers must also carefully consider the effect language will have in the project. Special resources may be required for oral and written translations. Meetings and decisions may take longer. Written communications may require translations which can cause delays, and miscommunications may cause errors. Culture is another significant consideration with multinational product development. In general, people regard foreign cultures as inferior. This is true for almost all societies in the world, but the U.S. geographic distance from truly different cultures (with the exception of Mexico) has made it possible to enjoy the luxury of this point of view, unchallenged. If Americans want to achieve their goals in conducting business overseas, they must learn the basic anomalies of their host country. It is also important to consider management qualities that are not normally taught in business schools. These include flexibility, a sense of humor, patience, sensitivity, an ability to evaluate assumptions, a willingness to listen to others, curiosity, respect for differences, and trust in the ability of the team to outperform individuals. Finally, a much overlooked area that is common to most product development efforts is evaluating performance and continuously learning from it. The product development process should be considered both (1) as individual parts such as producing a detailed design, and (2) as a whole, from customer requirements to the eventual fulfillment of those requirements. In this way, process control techniques can be applied, similar to those used in manufacturing. Many firms do not make the effort to retain knowledge and thus spend considerable time repeating what should have been learned before. Methods to address this problem include establishing an internal data base, and implementing tools such as checklists, project schedules, and metrics to collect information throughout each phase of a product’s development. A company’s competitive advantage in many ways can be attributed to the capacity of its individuals to learn from his or her own mistakes, and those of others. Establishing an effective learning process in product development is one of the most difficult and critical processes an organization can accomplish. This is the reason why achieving a sustainable competitive advantage is so difficult. The advantage is not the result of a particular project, rather it is based on continually building and improving procedures, processes, and leadership skills to do things faster, more efficiently, and better.

Pomerantz, Melvin “Manpower Planning and Forecasting”

May 1970, 35pp
Archival copy only

Poopaiboon, Adisak “Changing Organizational Culture”

May 1989, 67pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Performance counts; achievement counts. To some, these may be all that count. In this day of difficult economic conditions, companies are exploring many new approaches to profitability. Within the last few years, many companies have begun to turn their attention toward organization culture. Top executives and managers both believe that successful innovation along with an organizational change in culture can lead to great success in the business world. Every organization holds their own culture. Culture is a dynamic trait for improving human factor and achievement. Organization culture has an impact on all employees which compels them to achieve their individual goals along with the organizational goals. If an organization cannot identify their culture, it is difficult for its employees to adjust their working situations within that organization. Culture is an important subject which is not common knowledge on the corporate level, but should definitely be considered. A distinctive organization culture will benefit the employee by giving them better values in belief, commitment, personal career, and so forth within a firm. This thesis is an analysis, evaluation, and a prescription for changing organization culture. The first part of this thesis will give a background of organization culture. This thesis will reveal such fundamental issues as what organization culture is, how an organization should diagnosis their culture, what types of diagnosing methods should be utilized, and certain factors that affect organization culture. Before any organization can change its culture, they must first realize how organization culture is important to their firm. A corporation must get a feel for their organization culture in order to determine why it is necessary at the managerial level. The second portion of this thesis will give a corporation some ideas of what they can get from changing their organizational culture. The results of changing organization culture are: improving companies in a long-term growth, improvement in employee values and beliefs, and increased employee productivity. The last chapter of this thesis will give an organization various options for changing their organization culture. These options of changing organization culture can be as I have previously stated: autonomy, communication, participation, quality of work life, and training. These changes will have an effect on organizational performance in the long-run plus they will assist an organization in being a successful company. Every organization’s culture can be changed. Changing organization culture also has a substantial impact on all of the employees of such a corporation. Some employees might resist a change in their corporate culture due to the relationship between culture and change. Changing organization culture is not an easy task to undertake. It should be known that it will take a lot of time and effort on the part of every employee of an organization which is in the process of changing its culture.

Poquette, Steven E. “Applying the Parameter Method for Risk Analysis to Software Project Estimates”

Oct. 1996, 167pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Many times Software Project Managers are required to manage a budget and schedule that was developed very early in the project’s life cycle without much consideration given to potential risk factors. Most software project managers are aware of the risks associated with software development projects, but do not quantify these risks as part of the initial estimate. As a result, senior management is surprised when a software project exceeds the budget and/or the delivery date because of the risk factors associated with the development and implementation. The Software Project Manager needs a tool to identify the probability of delivering the project on, or under budget, and on, or ahead of schedule. The Parameter Method for Risk Analysis, traditionally used in risk analysis for capital projects, is a statistical method that was developed to determine the probability that a capital project will deliver the expected Return On Investment. The proposition of this paper is that the Parameter Method for Risk Analysis can be applied to software project estimates to determine the probability that the software project will exceed the planned project budget and/or schedule. The result of the risk analysis is used by the project manager to develop contingency plans that will reduce the risk, or allow for “what-if” testing. The “what-if” testing and contingency planning identify resource or capital adjustments necessary to achieve the budget and schedule targets. The Parameter Method requires the development of best-case, most likely, and worst-cast estimates for each phase of a project. From the three estimates a total mean and a total standard deviation are calculated. Both the total mean and the total standard deviation are used to calculate a best-case project estimate, which has a 10% probability of occurring. The range between the best-case and worst-case estimates represents range that covers 80% of the possible estimates. In order to execute the Parameter Method calculations, detailed estimates for each phase of the software project are created, first the initial or most likely estimate, then a best-case (all goes better than planned) estimate, and finally a worst-case estimate (all potential problems occur). In order for the Parameter Method calculations to be useful, a detailed risk analysis must be performed to develop realistic and plausible best-case and worst-case estimates. The Parameter Method is similar to the Program Evaluation Review Technique (PERT) method in that both require the development of three estimates; best-case, most likely and worst-case. The mean calculated from the PERT method is then used as the duration for the activity being estimated. The Parameter Method generates a range of estimates and the estimate that fits the desired confidence level is used as the duration for the activity being estimate. The Parameter Method is used for both cost and schedule estimates, where the PERT method is used just for schedule estimates. This paper illustrates in detail, the risk factors that are “cost drivers” for software projects. A risk analysis methodology is proposed that identifies and quantifies the risk factors used to develop the best-case and worst-case estimates. The risk factors that the methodology concentrates on are those which have been identify as the most critical for a project; staff availability, staff productivity, staff expertise, completed requirements definition, introduction of new technology and user acceptance of the final system. Cost estimates and the risks associated with computer hardware cost estimates are not addressed in this paper. Software project budget and schedule over-runs are due primarily to unplanned development costs and project delays not accounted for in the original estimate. This paper will focus on the risks associated with software development and installation. Several risk analysis methods are discussed and compared in Chapter 4. The application of each risk analysis method is demonstrated and evaluated. The Parameter Method was selected because it allows a estimate range to be developed where all risk factors can be considered. The risk analysis methodology that provides the inputs to the Parameter Method calculations is designed to identify and quantify the risks associated with a software project. The risk analysis results in developing a best-case, most likely and worst-case person-hour estimate for each phase of the software project. These estimates are then used to develop the project best-case (10% probability), mean (50% probability) and worst-case (90% probability) estimates. The estimates are plotted on a cumulative frequency diagram which can be used to determine the probability of any estimate that lies between the best and worst-case estimates. The project team and senior management can then determine the risk associated with the original estimate by comparing it to the best, mean, and worst-case estimates. By plotting the original estimate on the cumulative frequency diagram, the project team can determine the probability that the project will be delivered on time and within budget. The risk analysis provides the project team and senior management with a clear picture of the risk associated with the project. Together they can develop alternatives to reduce the risk, or a least there is “buy-in” by senior management as to the risk involved in the project. Senior management can assess the project from a business risk perspective and therefore understand how the project may put the business at risk. The result of performing a risk analysis for a software project, is that the project risks have been identified and their impact estimated. The project manager can develop contingency plans and alternatives in order to reduce the risk. Risk adjusted decisions about staffing, training, resources and development strategies can then be made, before cost and schedule overruns occur.

Powers, Jeff “New Product Development: Necessity and Risks”

Fall 1998, 52pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: From the first use of tools to present day space travel, new product development has brought man from a primitive cave dweller into modern times. This ability to develop tools and techniques in order to provide a better life is the very essence of what separates man from animals. In spite of this fact, developing a successful new product in today’s world is very risky business. In primitive times the need for product development was the need for basic survival. Development of clothing, weapons, and shelter was necessary for life itself. As means to fill these needs were developed, man was able to spend time developing items for promoting a more comfortable life. These items could then be traded with individuals who had developed other products. This interchange of ideas and information led to the development of even more efficient and advanced items. Soon man was to the point of developing products for leisure use, as he had extra time provided by new labor saving products. As the basic needs were filled, advancement began to occur more rapidly as ideas were combined. Businesses were formed to develop more specialized products. In order to increase income, to beat a competitor, or to keep abreast of current technology, these businesses had to be able to modify current products or create new products to better fill customer needs. This paper will give an overview of the steps in developing a successful new product and reasons why many new products fail.

Prasad, Annapurna “Why Hospitals Should Employ the Marketing Concept”

Aug. 1986, 127pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: There have been significant changes in today’s health care delivery system. Dramatic shifts in patient usage and cost reimbursement have affected health care institutions throughout the country. A serious problem faced is a decline in inpatient census. This can be traced to factors such as fewer inpatient admissions, shorter length of patient stays, competition within the market place, implementation of a new reimbursement system called prospective payment and the growth of the Health Maintenance Organizations (HMOs) and Preferred Provider Organizations (PPOs). These changes create a financial strain on the health care industry. They cause the hospitals to seek better and more efficient ways of delivery service to patients while positioning themselves – guaranteeing commitment to providing the best and brightest patient care, and to market their services. Hospitals like the rest of the health care field have traditionally avoided marketing and marketing efforts. They have looked askance at advertising and competitive pricing though they have been willing to make some attempts in improving their patient, public and community relations. Yet by avoiding direct association with the marketing process, a hospital may well fall into the trap of being unresponsive to its market – its patients and potential patients.

Prevost, Russell D. “Business Plan for No-Touch Sensors: 1980 (7-Year Plan)”

March 1980, 38pp
Archival copy only

Pusztai, Andrew Zoltan “Decommissioning of Nuclear Power Plants in the U.S; Alternatives, Costs, Funding and Quality Assurance”

May 1988, 115pp
Archival copy only

Qudeimat, Isam A. “A Conceptual Study of Corporate Strategy, Environmental Scanning, Resources and Practical System of Goals and Objectives”

May 1992, 145pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The concept of corporate strategy has generated plenty of controversy during the past decade. Scholars and business planners introduced various arguments concerning corporate strategy. Companies adapted several forms of strategy formulation. For example: customer-based strategy, marketing-oriented strategy, R & D oriented strategy, growth-through-acquisition strategy, and so forth. These types of strategies are called specialized strategies. At the other end of the spectrum, some companies tried to adapt what is called generic strategy in which strategy is geared toward a single generic objective such as cost leadership. Specialized strategies and generic strategies could negatively influence the very long-term survival of the firm. This thesis introduces a conceptual approach to corporate strategy. It is called “Integrated Strategy.” This approach is based on critical and thorough analysis of the internal and external environment, critical resource allocations, and selecting a practical system of strategic objectives. It is believed that for strategic objectives to be realistic and attainable, they must be based on environmental conditions and availability of resources. In an integrated strategy, there exists several strategic objectives. Each objective has relative influence on the expected results of any given strategy. Integrated corporate strategy consists of an integrated system of objectives (e.g. marketing, production, finance, R& D, acquisition, etc…) Finally, a simple qualitative/quantitative modeling technique has been developed to analyze the influence of several independent strategic objectives on a dependent objective.

Quick, Dean A. “Project Evaluation of a Product Evolution”

May 1971, 48pp
Archival copy only

Ragheb, Souheil Elias “Reconstruction of Lebanon”

May 1993, 308pp, appendices, tables, figures, video
Available for checkout
Abstract: Between 1975 and 1990 Lebanon went through “civil” war. The massive destruction which extended all over the country was costly and reached every sector of the economy. In 1992, prime minister Hariri cabinet unveiled an $18 billion rehabilitation plan. It launched a pilot plan, the reconstruction of the Centerville of Beirut, to regain its role as a commercial and financial center of the Middle east. This thesis proposes an alternative or a co-plan for the reconstruction of Lebanon. Liberation of the country and reconciliation of the warring factions are to be achieved through strong leadership before the physical construction take place. Investing in and caring for the Lebanese people is a major factor to be considered in the reconstruction task. Defining the “New Lebanon” that the Lebanese people should agree on. History of Lebanon from pre-literary times until our present day was briefly introduced to clarify the misunderstanding of some people that Lebanon was a part of Syria. The priorities should be rebuilding the rural areas is to go hand-in-hand with the Centerville, ensuring the equal distribution of wealth across the country and investing “enough” money to enhance both the agricultural and industrial sectors at the same time. Today, after the Middle East peace talks, Lebanon should play a different role in the region and that is to become a major producer rather than just being the financial “middle-man” between the West and the East. Long-term projects are introduced to create local jobs and ensure the continuity and growth of the economy. Dams are to be built in each governorate to collect run off streams. The collected water and the generated power are to be made available for the Lebanese and the excess quantities are to sold to the neighboring countries. Research centers and other projects are to be built to reverse the brain drain. A high speed highway is to be built at mid-level altitude to alleviate the bottleneck, reverse the migration from the village to the coastal region, attract people to higher altitudes, and improve communication between communities. Regional railroads are to be built to connect Lebanon with the rest of the world. Creation of a trained Lebanese labor force and the participation and involvement of the citizens in the reconstruction mission is a key part of the plan. Reconstruction of Lebanon should be funded with the Lebanese capital abroad which is estimated by some Lebanese officials at over then $70 billion instead of using foreign funds which demand high return on investment and would cause potential deficit.

Rahimzadeh, Kazem “Linear Programming and Production Manpower Scheduling in Industry”

Dec. 1980, 56pp
Archival copy only

Rahimzadeh, Maribeth “Applications of Consumer Products Green Marketing Concepts to the Marketing of Green Electric Power”

July 5,1998, 92pp, bibliography, appendices, tables, figures
Available for checkout
Abstract: Competition is changing the demeanor of the electric utility industry. The once silent, “public benefits for all”, socialized monopoly service industry is facing deregulation and the certain ferocity that accompanies the world of competition. This reality is accompanied with the certainty that not all of its current customers will remain customers. Electric utilities have not historically focused on customer needs and wants and tailored their services to that information. Rather, the customer has had the option of one provider with whatever this provider and the Public Service Commission deemed appropriate with regards to product and service offerings. A competitive arena requires the use of marketing concepts to target product and service offerings to niche market segments that will find the greatest value in these offerings. (What the company deems strategic and profitable for itself and valuable to the customer is offered for sale to the designated customers.) For the electric utility industry, these concepts are new and untested. Before a completely deregulated marketplace unfolds, as much experience with target marketing, within the bounds of regulatory requirements, should be gained. The utility industry needs to get into a Marketing mode and gain a complete understanding of competitive marketing concepts. Marketing ‘green electric power’ is an appropriate action to take in order to gain this experience. There are many existing programs of green marketing available in the consumer marketplace from which to learn and apply this experience to other products and services as the need and appropriate time arises. Well known consumer products companies, such as Monsanto and 3M have successfully marketed ‘Green’, environmentally-friendly products and services to consumers who are willing to pay a premium for the positive impact on the environment. Electric utilities can apply these lessons to ‘Green’ power programs. Niche marketing to an environmentally aware consumer requires the knowledge of who these customers are, what induces them to purchase and why. Segmentation strategies have been developed to assist in the targeting of these niche customers. Several approaches are reviewed and combined to target those consumers with the greatest propensity to respond favorably to green electric offerings.

Raikes, Randall T. “A Study of Extranets in a Supply Chain”

May 5,1999, 93pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The Internet has the potential to change the fundamental basis of business and create a new order of consumerism. The future will include those that embrace the technology and leave behind those that wait and see. Utilizing one such technology that has been born from Internet technology is the Extranet. The Extranet is a business-to-business Intranet that allows access from remote locations. The potential benefits and competitive advantages an Extranet brings to an organization depends on how it is used and its position within the organization’s supply chain. Companies can effectively manage their supply chains with the correct business knowledge and the correct tools. A new technological tool, like an Extranet, can become a major competitive advantage for any company. In fact, the use of Extranets in business today is becoming more popular as technology progresses, management adapts, and others realize its potential advantages. The classical chain of events – sourcing, buying, making, transporting, and selling – are becoming blurred with the introduction of the Internet. The suppliers, manufacturers, distributors, retailers, and services for supply chain management are changing by linking their source of information with their partner’s information. This allows transactions to flow naturally instead of using old ways of trading information with the intention of always maintaining the upper hand. Companies can have three different types of Extranets. One is solely a content type, which provides web content to partners and customers for their use. Another is a customer service type that is used to provide customers with information related to products and service while empowering the customer to access and check order statuses. And finally, an Extranet can be designed as a revenue-generating type. Companies that perform transactions on-line use a revenue-generating Extranet. The customers are linked to the provider through on-line ordering of products like books or paying for services such as news. From recent reports in the media, it appears that companies detached from consumers invest the majority of their efforts in content type Extranets. This is supported by the author in categorizing articles and reports of companies with Extranets. It was found that the manufacturers tend to have more content type Extranets. In contrast, the companies closer to the consumer, or end user, had a larger percentage of revenue-generating Extranets. The Extranet has the same issues surrounding the Internet in regards to security. Since the Extranet typically depends on the Internet for outside communication with the internal Intranet, the possibility of security risks exists. There are ways to limit a company’s exposure like using Virtual Private Networks, or VPNs, separating and segregating important files on separate servers, or just following the basic security measures every network should have as a minimum. The risk exists, as it does with all new technologies, but the rewards can be staggering according to many reports. A company must weigh the investment, needs, and benefits of implementing an Extranet. Although, the investment can be small if an Intranet is already in place. The emphasis then should be on preparing the organization to share information for the good of its partners and ultimately its customers. The return on investment from a Extranet has been in some cases 200%, but the suggested expected return is typically above 50%. It does not matter where in the supply chain a company is, the benefits gained from an Extranet are ultimately spread among all areas. Suppliers to manufacturers can perform transactions on-line and manage each other’s inventory while distributors can pinpoint exact shipping requirements without being notified by the manufacture. Retailers can provide customers with 24-hour service and customize the information for their specific needs. However, the type of Extranet a company uses affects the type of benefits it provides. In the author’s study of reports, the content and customer service type Extranets provided internal savings, low-cost customer service, and improved lead times with products and services. These benefits related to the efficient use of an Extranet as a communication and transaction tool. The revenue-generating type Extranets provided companies with new product ideas. Additional sales, and more output with less working capital. Many of the benefits that come with the use of an Extranet are shared among all areas of the supply chain. It was the same for competitive advantages companies gained from using an Extranet. The development of alliances, reducing barriers between partners and customers, and extending boundaries were all results from using Extranets in all the areas of the supply chain. An Extranet gives companies the advantage of real-time communication through a network of computers operating and making calculations faster than any human. But, it is not about speed. It is how businesses are using the tool to change the old ways of handling new problems.

Randall, Harvey G. “Product Design and Development in the Matrix Organization”

April 1980, 24pp
Archival copy only

Rebman, Allan J. “Improving Maintenance Efficiency (Appleton Papers Combined Locks Mill)”

June 1994, 92pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Appleton Papers Incorporated, Combined Locks, Wisconsin is undergoing a mill expansion that will increase the amount of equipment in the facility by 18.7%. The Maintenance department at the mill has requested an equal percentage increase in both hourly and salaried personnel. The corporate office of the company has granted a 6.6% increase in hourly personnel and a 10.0% increase in salaried personnel to support the mill expansion. An estimated 11.4% increase in the efficiency of craftsmen is required to maintain the level of service that existed before the expansion. The maintenance department at the Combined Locks facility has several alternatives to explore in an attempt to become more efficient. Several alternatives were examined in attempt to address the resource limitation problem that the corporate office imposed on the Locks mill maintenance department. These alternatives were: try a different maintenance management philosophy; make up for the lack of resources by working the existing employees longer hours; use outside contractors to supplement the current work-force; install a totally automated predictive maintenance system on the new equipment. A final alternative that was examined was to do nothing, this alternative as well as those listed above were explored and rejected for various reasons.

Redfield, William Harold “The Business of Engineering Management”

1972, 34pp
Archival copy only

Rehberger, James Matthew “Time Drivers for Engineering Development Programs”

Aug. 25 1993, 218pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Most electronic product development programs are rarely completed on time and regularly run over budget. Numerous scheduling delays and cost overruns continue to occur despite advances in project planning tools, management techniques and theories. Many new products will fail to achieve some if not all of their strategic business objectives. These aspects of electronic product development are completely independent of industry segment, corporation or project complexity. Management’s feeling of frustration continues to grow regardless of the overwhelming amount of evidence supporting better organizational structure, overcoming internal barriers and adopting flexible management philosophies. The objective of the investigation leading to this thesis identifies, discusses and develops strategies for surmounting many of the obstacles preventing concurrency and rapid product development. For many organizations, attaining and sustaining a decisive lead and competitive advantage in these areas will always remain exceptionally difficult. This occurs because of their preconceived and generalized opinion that many of the problems associated with modern electronic development processes are intrinsically simple and quickly corrected. The composition of this paper closely follows that required to develop and implement an effective strategy for improving the product development process. The introduction provides the reader with a basic overview of traditional development processes. It offers a better understanding of the typical problem resolution tactics associated with some product development groups. The second section of this paper proposes a new basis for product development time drivers and time management issues. This section describes the author’s investigation into the organizational behavioral of modern product development groups. The discussion also reflects a characteristically different point of view by presenting a bottom up, rather than management’s traditional top down perspective. The third section of this paper formulates a generalized strategy for improving the product development process. The strategy is developed from areas of significant opportunity and an intelligent understanding of the barriers hindering speedy product development. The strategy is implemented gradually over time in two distinct phases. The first phase is discussed in the fourth section. It describes a practical set of development tools and techniques for encouraging the practice of more effective project management. The optimal set of projects can be developed and managed successfully using aggregate project planning techniques, return maps, ROI, risk/sensitivity analysis, phased development approaches and management by deliverables. The second phase is discussed in the last section. It describes the change management restructuring process needed to implement the proposed strategy. One of management’s greatest challenges over the next few years will be to facilitate more efficient interaction between people and processes at the corporate level. Tomorrow’s work force must be capable of forming cross functional alliances at all levels within the organization to solve their problems efficiently and effectively.

Reiff, Donald H. “A Study to Determination a Procedure for Planning and Scheduling in a Small Engineering Department”

April 1973, 33pp
Archival copy only

Rieck, Matthew J. “A Neighborhood Self-Service Eatery and Bier Garten “Old Milwaukee Garden”: How Likely is it to be Successful in the Milwaukee Restaurant Market?”

May 6, 2007, 97pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Neo urbanism is a trend whose growing popularity is attributed to the deficits of sprawling suburbs. Milwaukee has a 160-year-old history and legacy of German immigrants. Bier gartens were, and still are today, a beloved place of community. The disappearance of America’s Third Places presents an opportunity for a modern day bier garten in an urban Milwaukee neighborhood. The fast casual and brewpub segments of the restaurant and craft beer industries, respectively, are growing dramatically. Baby boomers and their children, Generation X, prefer densely populated, mixed-use, urban neighborhoods. They are increasingly eating away from their homes and favor convenience and familiarity when making dining choices. A new business venture offering a neighborhood self-service eatery and bier garten to an urban Milwaukee community is likely to be successful. Follow-on studies in other areas of business planning are worthy endeavors. Before embarking on this new business venture, further work needs to be done, including: a pro forma business plan, a full-scale marketing plan, an operational plan and a plan for financing.

Reise, Jonathon L. “Mandatory Registration and its Effects on the Engineering Profession”

Aug. 1978, 37pp
Archival copy only

Riehl, Edward Paul “A Marketing Study for a New Pump Line”

May 1973, 37pp
Archival copy only

Riesselmann, Eric “Management 2000: Helping the New Engineering Manager Cope with the Threats of the Next Century”

March 21 1996, 120pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Voids may exist in how well-prepared one is for the transition from Engineer to Engineering Manager. It is ultimately the hands-on experience of a first management position that presents the reality of what one knows and what one is not yet prepared for in one’s job. This unpreparedness for a new Engineering Manager in 1995 may result from no formal education or some outdated system of education. In this paper, a “new” Engineering Manager has between 1 day and 1 year of management experience. This paper is designed to lessen the voids new Engineering Managers have between their existing knowledge and what the new job will actually require of them. While this problem is shared by managers in other disciplines, the research within focuses on Engineering Managers, particularly those in manufacturing companies. The author selected these managers because they are of greatest interest to him, as he may be assuming an engineering management role in the future. However, Chapters 1-7 may be relevant to other managers, as they pertain to traditional management topics. The body of the paper consists of two parts: Chapters 1-7 and Chapters 8-16. Chapters 1-7 comprise “Traditional Management Preparation: Mentoring (Chapter 1) Consider interests and skills in choosing mentor/mentee. Personal Organization (Chapter 2) More to do overall with less support. Communication (Chapter 3) Mirror the corporate culture, be accessible and listen to negative feedback at least as much as positive. Delegation (Chapter 4) Display the strengths of one’s entire department through wise choices of varied tasks. Beware upward delegation. Motivation (Chapter 5) Managers have to excite a diverse work force. Evaluation/Skills Assessment (Ch. 6) Reviews are 2-way goal-setting meetings. Staffing (Chapter 7) Retraining is necessary to cope with advancing technology. The Predictive Index (Maynard) may accurately fill remaining positions. These were chosen because 1) they are popular subjects in the author’s company; 2) they continually appear in journals and seminars and 3) some are among the courses taught in MSOE’s Master of Science in Engineering Management (MSEM) program. Chapters 8-16 comprise “Threatening Concerns with Modern Engineering Management Positions – Survey Discussion”. This presents survey results and discussion on issues existing Engineering Managers are most concerned with today. The discussion is based on a 19-question management survey sent to 50 participants in Central Wisconsin. The companies selected were manufacturing companies appearing in the Marathon and Portage County Chamber of Commerce manufacturer’s directories. These counties were selected for the proximity to the author’s home. All participants were phoned in advance to encourage their participation, and details were left vague so as to not bias responses. Forty of 50 surveys (80%) were completed and returned. No effort was made to collect the remaining 10 as the author believed too much harassment may have affected the validity of responses. The survey was first reviewed by two of the author’s colleagues for appropriate question phrasing. Responsibilities of greatest importance to the respondents are (Chapter 8): Part of strategic planning – 88% Responsible for other depts.. – 15% Understaffed department – 50% Fear of company acquisition – 10% Office politics – 42% Eliminating Manager’s job – 2% Political correctness – 25% Other concerns – 18% Three top pieces of advice to prospective Engineering Managers are (Chapter 16): Stay current through continuing education – 20% Treat others the way one would like to be treated back – 12% Motivate people and have good people skills – 12%

Rinehart, Jack C. “Comparative Analysis of Competitive Advantage, Profitability, and Growth”

June 2017
Available for checkout
Available full-text online
Abstract: This research study tests data gathered quantitatively and qualitatively to determine the relative competitive advantage traits used in the current marketplace and if market volatility since the Great Recession has changed the correlation between profitability and growth of the firm. The leading research question to test this issue is: How key are the intangible factors of an organizational culture and how do they effect the output of a marketplace sustainable competitive advantage in the forms of profitability and growth when altered? The main variables of this study are profitability, growth of the firm, and the theoretical measurement of Competitive Advantage Index. This study reviews companies listed in the current Fortune 1000 utilizing the income statements for 2011-2015. The results of this study show that the most successful competitive advantage traits consist of management, organizational, and strategy capabilities to reconfigure, sense, absorb, and integrate. The second leading competitive advantage traits are organizational learning and competency building, and global aptness and cultural intelligence. The classic business model is still applicable in today’s volatile marketplace, but there are certain industrial sectors where profitability and growth of the firm no longer correlate. This lack of correlation between profitability and growth of the firm may indicate a market tipping point, which will invalidate the classic business model.

Ripp, William G. “Economic and Physical Analysis of the Water Distribution System of the City of Hartford Water Utility”

May 1983, 83pp
Archival copy only

Ritmanich, David “Creating High Performance Teams”

July 17, 2003, 115pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: A high performance team needs a catalyst with a strong desire to succeed using the right mix of empowered people. Deborah Ancona writes: “High-performing teams somehow manage to do their jobs better than others thought possible by setting difficult and clear performance goals.” It brings out the best in people who work together. These team members are out to make a difference, to improve the product or service, and to create a fun environment to work in. A higher energy level exists, something that taps their energy of the spirit. Through examination of literature and the implementation of high performance teams at two companies, this thesis will argue that Seven Attributes of High Performance Teams provide the key to obtaining better products in a shorter time. It will detail a process to follow to change an existing team into a high performing one. The resistance to change of the organization’s culture and the effects of rewards will also be discussed. Given the wealth of literature on the subject, what is the right mixture of team attributes? The Seven Attributes the student discovered were: Flat management structure–for fewer managers and a quicker response both within the team and the organization; Charismatic manager–who has a real vision; Reduction of ‘red tape’–which reduces time to make decisions in the team and organization; No resource constraints–one of the four project constraints (cost, schedule, resources, and scope) is removed; Employee empowerment–pushes the risk and decision-making lower; Crisis situation or competitive fear–which provides a catalyst, other than money; Strong purpose or product direction–which keeps the project on track. Seven separate steps also exist to convert a traditional team into a high performance team. The first step is to define Corporate and Division strategic and business plans that are linked to a strong vision for the organization. This should be presented in an all-hands-on-deck meeting to motivate and guide the organization. The second step is to create a flat organizational structure. Matrix structures, which slow decision making, do not function for high performance teams. There are too many bosses and too many distractions for team members to follow in a matrix. The third is to ask for volunteers and interview team members. A high performance team should be considered a more desirable full-time job and viewed as a select team. Members should not be excluded based on lack of experience, for example, but may be passed over based on a lack of interest or drive. The fourth step involves setting norms and team bonding. In the team forming stage, members have a variety of questions. They are testing the waters, both with other members and with the project manager. The project manager can lead this effort. The fifth step occurs at the start and throughout the project: aligning and motivating the employees. Most people want to do a good job, but simply do not know where to put their energy. They want to be challenged and creative. The sixth step is obtaining customer requirements. All team members should be included in customer focus groups, because everyone hears something different. Collectively they will have a better view of the real and unspoken needs. Each team member adds to the whole of the product or service. The final step is to execute a plan based on what was learned about high performance teams. Set stretch goals, reward interim achievements, and measure how much can be accomplished in a short period of time. Remember to have fun, share knowledge, and trust each other. The project manager cannot create a high performance team overnight. It is a fragile relationship that requires mutual trust, a strong purpose, shared responsibility, participative management, good communications, removal of barriers, motivation to change, risk sharing goals, respect for each other, and a desire for success. This report will investigate the necessary aspects to create a high performance team in an existing organization.

Rivilis, Alex “Analysis of Successful Techniques in the Software Development Business”

Nov. 26, 2001, 87pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The software development process is an incredible mixture of art and logic, creativity and formal rules, exciting breakthroughs, and tedious hours of testing. Nevertheless, key factors for the success of any software development project exist. The finished product must deliver value to its users. In order to achieve this goal, project scope has to be defined upfront. A well-defined software development process and rigorous testing assure high quality results. All steps of software development are fully analyzed in this paper. The process starts with the definition of scope, and management of customer expectations. This is the foundation for a successful project. The next steps are design work and “actual” software development part. The customer demos, training and implementation follow. Customer support after software is installed is an integral part of the software project. The software development process heavily relies on people working on the project. Personnel management is one of the most challenging and rewarding parts of the software business. The ability to get the software geeks to finish the development on time and within budget is a must for the successful project manager. The project management itself is a difficult part in the process. Quite often the development goes into uncharted territories where planning is tough. Many software companies add “buffer” time of as much as 40% to the development plans to accommodate the “unknown” factor. The key issues of the software development process are highlighted in the case study of successful software implementation at Lucent Technologies by the team of software engineers led by the author of this paper. The successful installation of a warehouse management system allowed Lucent to reach the goals of improved productivity and inventory accuracy.

Rodriguez, Ivan “The Override Process: A Plan for Success for Human Resources Assessment Attendees Rated Limited or Low”

May 5, 1988, 66pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper deals with the personnel selection and development process. Selecting people for specific jobs is a difficult task. Ordinarily, resumes and personal interviews are used for this purpose. Our changing economy and business environment are forcing staffing groups in all major corporations to review their selection processes. Resumes and interviews reveal some of a candidates abilities, but how does the staffing group really know what they are getting? Most often, the answer is discovered after the candidate is actually on the job! The assessment process can be used effectively to identify individuals who have high potential to succeed as management people. A leader in this field has been the American Telephone and Telegraph Company. They have used assessment for this purpose since 1959. The process has been verified as accurate. It has been proven to be an excellent procedure for identifying an individual’s potential for assuming a first level management position. Those that score well and get promoted, generally do well as supervisors. Those that score in the low or limited range, generally do not do well as first level supervisors. The problem that this paper addresses, is what happens to those individuals who do not score well in the assessment process. Many companies use the assessment process as a prerequisite for promotion. People who score poorly, are almost assured that they will not ever be promoted into management. This paper outlines a plan that can be used by personnel departments to “override” a low assessment score. It outlines a set of guidelines that are useful for measuring the self development progress of individuals who score poorly on assessments, so that the assessment score can be offset by the individuals own efforts to grow professionally. Assessments are conducted by measuring many individual personal attributes. Many of these attributes can be learned or improved with proper exposure and training. The plan includes recommendations of what type of exposure is needed to develop each measured attribute. In this way, low assessment results can be accompanied by a self improvement plan for the individual. If the candidate is committed to professional growth, he will have a guide to follow in order to pursue his goal. Progress reports and close coordination with personnel will aid the individual in his final objectives.

Roehl, Steven R. “A Scoring Model to Apply Appropriate Methods of Engineering to New Product Development Projects”

Dec. 20 2000, 135pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Engineering managers and project leaders are responsible for getting new product development projects done on time, within budget, and in conformance with customer expectations. Rapidly changing technology, increasing competition, and customer demands are forcing companies to introduce a greater number of new products at a faster rate. Methods of engineering exist that correspond to the scope or size of a new product development project under consideration. Engineering managers and product leaders need a tool to match the appropriate engineering methods to projects at the project planning or preliminary stage of development. Knowledge of the correct engineering methods to use improves planning and helps determine the development costs the project will incur. New product development projects require an application of engineering methods that match the specifications of the project based on a number of criteria. The scoring model introduced in this thesis is a tool that selects the methods of engineering to apply to a project by matching the criteria to the project specifications. These criteria are the size of the project, sales expectations, sale price of the product, safety concerns, development costs, market demand for the product, potential for warranty expense, complexity and technical detail, innovation, the possibility of patentable designs, and functionality. These criteria or specifications of a project determine the amount of engineering effort, or in other words the number of engineering methods that are necessary for the project to be a success. Very large projects typically require every engineering method the project leader is aware of to be successful. Very small projects typically require only a couple of engineering methods. The methods of engineering have a hierarchy of use that reflects the complexity and cost to apply the method. The methods of engineering in hierarchical order are: historical data, calculations, factor of safety, foreseeability, failure modes and effects analysis, design reviews, testing, team concept, and virtual prototyping. The scoring model that this thesis proposes rates the criteria and scores the criteria on their importance to a specific project. A weighted score is obtained by choosing the best match of the criteria in the model to the specifications of the project. The scores for each criterion are added together to obtain a total weighted score for the project. This score is matched against the hierarchical list of engineering methods having pre-assigned values. The match between the total score for the project and the value on the list of methods is the model’s recommendation for engineering methods to apply to the project. The scoring model is a tool that the engineering manager and project leader can use to successfully plan a project and in the process look more carefully at the details of the project. This is especially true on small and even medium sized projects where initial planning is sometimes minimal. In some circumstances, it is easier to take smaller projects for granted and just do them without any planning. Careful planning is normally part of large project analysis in order to justify development costs and prove to management that the project is necessary for company success. It is not to say the model is not important on large projects but it has greater impact on the smaller ones. The score the model provides is a basis upon which a managerial decision can be made. The score provides the manager a means of determining the amount of engineering effort necessary for success. The value of the model is not in the accuracy of its prediction but the detailed thought and consideration it forces the project manager to use at the start of the project. The result is a better-managed project and a higher quality product at completion with minimal development costs.

Roehrborn, Scott A. and Kevin A. Haen “An Analysis of the Dot-Com Failures and an Application of Their Strengths”

May 2000, 153pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: In the mid 1990s, a revolution began as business leaders recognized the potential ability of the Internet’s World Wide Web in conducting electronic commerce transactions. However, just several years after the dot-com euphoria started, the dot-com crash began, as investors demanded that management return to the “old economy” focus on profits. By 2000, the dot-com collapse reached massive proportions with widespread consolidation among e-commerce companies, and bankruptcy was common. Several recurring themes, including intense competition, lack of capital, and simply unworkable business models, appear to be the basis for many of the failures of the founding dot-com businesses. The failed dot-coms all had a common theme in that they all promised to revolutionize the buying habits of society. Companies such as etoys, Pets, and Fumiture.com had widely recognized brand names but still were unable to succeed. The dot-com euphoria of the late 1990s has now been replaced by concern over exactly how the Internet can successfully be used for business. Brick-and-mortar companies are working to integrate the Internet into their businesses in ways that will be profitable in the future. Because the Internet can be utilized in a broad range of areas, companies must deten-nine exactly which facets they want to benefit from. The challenge is deter-mining which facets of the hitemet can be utilized to add value and enhance company competitiveness. This includes developing the necessary marketing and customer strategies. These areas are critical to success because companies need to determine what markets they would like to serve, and then attract and retain customers. The abundance of dot-com failures should not be used to dismiss the potential of the Internet for business applications. Businesses and consumers still want and need technology and the Internet. Companies such as Amazon.com, Charles Schwab & Company, and numerous other smaller niche businesses have all demonstrated that the Internet can be utilized successfully. While the dot-com explosion may be over, a new generation of e-commerce companies is emerging. Now, companies in every industry are finding ways to utilize and leverage the Internet in all aspects of their operations. The distinction between old economy and new economy companies has been decreasing and this trend will likely continue. Whereas people initially predicted the Internet would reshape the U.S. economy, what is actually happening is that the economy is determining the final “shape” of the Internet. Now, it looks like the Internet is more suitable for extending and complimenting existing businesses, rather than as a replacement for them. Instead of being an entirely new business sector, the Internet is being viewed as a technology, and traditional companies are benefiting from the skills developed by the failed dot-coms. The methodology and strategic steps taken by successful dot-coms was used to develop a business plan for a proposed dot-com startup company, MagicalWedding.com. MagicalWedding.com is an Internet start-up company offering a complete source of wedding related information to consumers. Currently being developed by a creative design team, this Internet web site will allow consumers to do their wedding shopping and planning quickly and easily, from their own home. Detailed information on products and services offered by businesses will be displayed in an attractive and easy to navigate fonnat. Additional tools such as a guest list manager, budget calculator, planning calendar, and e-mail reminders will also be provided free of charge. This will allow consumers to make virtually all of their wedding plans without visiting every business. MagicalWedding.com has a key competitive advantage in that it will provide the only collection of businesses serving the wedding industry in this area. Nothing else like it currently exists. By defining a new market and offering services at a price that beats any other form of advertising, a significant number of businesses will be attracted to advertise on the web site. This client base, along with the MagicalWedding.com name recognition, will provide a huge barrier to entry.

Roethle, Joseph “Developing a New Employee Onboarding Program in a Small Engineering Department”

August 2012, 149pp, bibliography, appendices, figures, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract:Purpose: Onboarding is a tool by which small engineering departments can strategically integrate new employees into the work environment. Unfortunately, organizations in general do not make use of onboarding programs. To help assist engineering managers who have access to limited resources, the purpose of this thesis is to define a process guideline to help these individuals construct an onboarding program for their respective departments.

Methods: In order to define a process guideline for an onboarding process, research was conducted in business- and management-related literature. A partial meta-analytic review was performed on this existing onboarding material.

Main results: By employing a partial meta-analytic review, two major results were uncovered: (i) The analysis provided an insight into the current state of onboarding literature; (ii) The analysis revealed that onboarding is comprised of more familiar business/management-related practices.

The review pointed out that the appearance of onboarding in the literature has been increasing since the late 1990’s. This increase indicates that onboarding usage in organizations is increasing, that there is a growing need for onboarding-related material, and that contributors are viewing onboarding as an increasingly important tool rather than a fad. Despite this growing appearance in literature, the quality of onboarding contributions is lacking. In addition, the existing literature concerning onboarding is focused mainly on best practices and benefits. There are limited contributions in the area of onboarding application and execution, further supporting the need for a process guideline.

The meta-analysis also revealed that onboarding consists of four major components: training, orientation, mentoring, and knowledge management. Because these components have a knowledge base more expansive than that of onboarding, additional research was conducted in these four component areas, providing a better understanding of the onboarding process as a whole, and the role of each of these components play within the onboarding process.

Using the data and findings uncovered in this process- an onboarding process guideline was created. The process guideline is broken into three areas — training, orientation, and mentoring — with the knowledge management system serving as the backbone — providing organizational information directly and indirectly to the new employee.

Main conclusions: In constructing a process guideline, onboarding was found to be more than just a tool to introduce new employees to a department. Organizations and departments can use onboarding strategically. Through careful planning, execution and review of the onboarding process, organizations and departments can accomplish such goals as shaping culture, maximizing efficiency, improving production, and reducing expenses.

Main recommendations: It is recommended that small engineering department management employ the process guideline developed in this thesis to implement an onboarding program. In doing so, small engineering departments can more effectively use their existing resources. Small engineering departments will be able to strategically align their employees with the objectives of the organization and the department. The onboarding program will also improve the relationship between the new employee and the employer.

To develop the knowledge base of onboarding, it is recommended that further research should be conducted in the area of onboarding practices. An emphasis should be placed on onboarding implementation, which will help enable management of organizations to implement such a program and make onboarding a more common practice in the workplace.


Rollins, Douglas J. “A Study of the Outsourcing of Goods and Services: Practical Implications and Issues for Managers in the United States”

Nov. 8 2005, 122pp
Archival copy only

Rooney, Steven “Current Business Implications of the Americans with Disabilities Act”

Jan. 1996, 141pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Businesses of 15 or more employees are now required to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). Employers are attempting to understand the ADA guidelines with few absolute answers and plenty of room for judgment calls. Employees must be accommodated based on individual needs. The ADA counsels that each case must be evaluated on its own merit. Using the ADA as a guide, employers are trying to deal with disabled employees and applicants. However, inconsistency, subjective interpretation of terms, concern for litigation, and numerous issues of employee benefits may be hindering the implementation of this civil rights law. This investigation focuses on Title I (Employment) and Section 501 (c) (Employee Benefits) of Title V of the ADA. These portions of this legislation are key for the employment and the employability of the disabled. The employment aspects of the ADA are discussed and key terms in the law are defined and evaluated. A survey of Milwaukee businesses, replicated from a Detroit survey done in 1993, examines how organizations are complying with the ADA. Results indicate that in spite of the confusion and apprehension about the ADA, three years after implementation of this law, employers rate themselves high in compliance. More than half the organizations surveyed claim to have provided management training. Nearly 83% feel the ADA is understood by appropriate managers in their companies. Respondents claimed to be developing strategies and policies to reasonably accommodate disabled individuals. In addition, Milwaukee companies claim to have a high rate of analysis of ADA compliance in several employment areas. The Milwaukee survey did uncover weaknesses in ADA compliance. There was limited analysis of the critical issues of employee benefits and benefit plans. Employee training was lacking. Few organizations have used outside resources to assist in ADA compliance. With ADA-related legal activity increasing dramatically, employers need to develop conflict resolution systems to deal with this new group of employment concerns. Alternative dispute resolution (ADR) processes are presented to offer viable alternatives to ADA litigation and employment conflict resolution. The EEOC’s commitment to ADR should alert employers to seriously examine these techniques and their advantages. A proposition suggested is that the ADA will do more to keep people working who become disabled than it will do in providing job opportunities for the disabled. The intuitive support for this idea is that the capabilities of current employees are known and more easily accommodated. Further evidence may be that 50% of the ADA related legal charges are due to discharge, while only 11% of the charges are for hiring violations. Research indicates the business community should maintain emphasis toward ADA compliance in reasonable accommodations, job descriptions, and job applications. There should also be an additional focus on employee benefit issues, employee training, seeking information and assistance from outside resources, and developing dispute resolution procedures to help manage the increase of ADA charges.

Rosen, Alfred P. “An Approach to Sales”

May 1970, 22pp
Archival copy only

Rosenthal, Rodd “Changing the Company for Customer Relationship Management”

Aug. 21, 2002, 111pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is a strategy aimed at optimizing profits by forming consistent long-term relationships with customers. These relationships are fostered by communication with the customer and internal to the organization, resulting in consistently delighted and more profitable customers. Sales Automation, Marketing Automation, and Customer Service are the three main components of CRM. By consistently delighting and retaining customers, a successful CRM implementation will increase profitability by reducing costs, increasing process efficiency, and increasing the effectiveness and profitability of the processes. A successful implementation requires a company to change its focus from product-centered operations to customer-centric operations. This may require significant changes within multiple area of the company. A company must examine multiple areas to insure it is ready to implement a CRM strategy. To begin, a company needs to clearly communicate the vision, mission, and business rules it operates by. The company can then identify its unique CRM goals and develop a strategy and measures to guide the business in its efforts to achieve those goals. Without first articulating its vision and mission, the company risks creating conflicting CRM goals, ultimately leading to a severely decreased chance to attain the success measures. Most CRM failures are attributed to the lack of integration of the CRM strategy with the overall business vision, mission, and strategy. Once the company has clearly communicated the specifics of how it will operate and why, the company can access its readiness for CRM by examining the business strategy, the organizational structure, the company culture, and the technical infrastructure. A company must align its CRM strategy within its business strategy, utilizing its unique strengths to differentiate itself in the market. The organization structure must be conducive to communications between departments, especially Sales, Marketing, and Service in order to present a consistent face to the consumer. The company culture must be able to change to support common customer-centric processes and the open flow of information, beginning at the executive level. Also, the company must possess the communications network and technical resources required to implement the CRM tool of its choosing. Of these areas, the company culture is typically the most difficult area to address, and technology is typically the easiest. All four areas, however, must be assessed and preparations made to handle the company-wide changes associated with supporting a CRM strategy. Support of a CRM strategy requires time, money, and resources. A company must painstakingly estimate the costs and benefits associated with the CRM implementation including investigating multiple possible CRM components. The company can then determine what components of the overall strategy to implement and the order of implementation that best benefits the company. These component selections and their prioritization are documented in the implementation and continuous improvement plans. Continuous monitoring of the success criteria during the implementation of the CRM strategy components allows a company to tailor its CRM strategy to provide the greatest benefit at the least cost. Once begun, a company must continue to analyze and modify its strategy throughout the ongoing journey of CRM. This document includes a case study on a real company, which for the purpose of this report the author refers to as Conlift. The company name and other references have been changed to allow the company and executive management to remain anonymous. To better support a CRM effort at a company like Conlift, upper management must first reestablish and communicate the company vision, mission, and business rules, and then articulate its CRM goals, strategy, and measures for success. Conlift has implemented many changes within the company positioning itself for customer centricity, but further assessment will drive additional changes in the business strategy, the organizational structure, and the company culture. Conlift upper management must develop and clearly communicate the business strategy to the enterprise and marry it with CRM strategy. It must also continue to reorganize to combine similar groups and eliminate efficiencies and redundancies within the major company brands. A concentrated communications effort including a supporting training plan needs to address the details surrounding the cultural change from product-centric to customer-centric. Upper management must foster collaboration and provide the resources necessary to re-tool the workforce. Lastly, upper management must actively reinforce, monitor, and improve the CRM-related processes. By affecting changes and reorganizing around the customer, Conlift increases its chance to successfully implement a CRM strategy and increase profitability by consistently delighting its customers.

Ross, James J. “Product Liability: The New Million Dollar Sweepstakes”

Aug. 1979, 49pp
Archival copy only

Rozek, Robert “The Management Relationship to Productivity and Motivation”

Feb. 1982, 190pp
Archival copy only

Rudes, Susan “Career Management: Strategy and Planning”

March 1985, 194pp
Archival copy only

Ruesch, Marc A. “Organizations Who Exercise Effective Strategic Planning Methods May Avoid the Potential Impacts of Disruptive Technology”

Aug. 30, 2007, 60pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Business environments continually fluctuate due to the rapid rate of technology change. In addition, businesses are now competing on a global scale. These two factors combined lead to fierce competition. Therefore, rather than concede, organizations must strive to balance the risks and advantages of becoming innovating thinking machines (with potential loss of current market position) against remaining one step ahead of the competitor–the next disruptive technology. This paper defines the disruptive technology theory and describes how industry incumbents have been easily dethroned by new market entrants. This paper also suggests that the adoption of an innovative thinking environment can inadvertently increase an organization’s chance of becoming the new market entrant, thus establishing a protracted competitive position. The introduction of the Innovative Strategy Planning Process is proposed to assist incumbents in formulating innovative thinking environments and effective planning processes in the battle against the insurgence of disruptive technology.

Russell, Robert Arthur. “Our American Manufacturing Industries are Dying. The Root Cause of the Demise is Greed”

Feb. 1986, 82pp
Archival copy only

Ruth, Richard L. “The Integration of Manufacturing SYT Systems by American Management”

April 1985, 62pp, bibliography
Archival copy only

Safar, John G. “Quantitative Project Management”

July 1970, 47pp
Archival copy only

Sager, Mark “Analysis and Discussion of Effectively Managed Software Development”

Feb. 2002, 89pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Most software development projects fail. The software is delivered late, over budget, or delivered with a less-than-desired feature set. Software development has become critical for the survival of today’s information-driven companies. Organizations must improve their ability to deliver software on time, on budget, and with the promised feature set. The best and worst practices of software project management will be discussed and analyzed with the goal of establishing strategies for an organization to improve its ability to manage software projects. Many books and articles have been written chronicling the best practices of successful software development organizations. This thesis presents an analysis and discussion of the current body of research to provide strategies to improve an organization’s ability to manage software projects. This thesis provides an overall discussion of the crucial areas of software development. The thesis discusses the following topics: Software Project Planning, Software Process, Software Development Lifecycles, People, Requirements Capture, Metrics, and Benchmarking. In the author’s experience, a software development team leader must ensure the planning stage of development is thoroughly completed. The Software Development Plan, SDP, must contain all of the essential elements. The SDP must be a living document which means it needs to be updated and modified as the project progresses. By ensuring proper documentation in the SDP, the document may be used to analyze a project’s effectiveness as well as to provide a record of the project. In the author’s experience, the requirements capture process is one of the most important aspects of software development. The organization must develop, document, and institutionalize a requirements gathering process. The organization must also create processes and procedures for dealing with changes and additions to the projects requirements. In the author’s experience, a successful software organization must generate a usable, documented, and institutionalized software development process. Management must make the development and maintenance of the software process a priority by investing adequate resources to the effort. The software organization must also be aware of the type of software being generated and adapt their software processes and procedures to the realities of the software being developed. The software process must include a process for collecting metrics and analyzing the data collected. A common documented software process is essential to the success of the global software development organization. In conclusion, by understanding and applying the topics discussed in this thesis, a software project manager has a greater chance of delivering software on time, on budget, and with the promised feature set.

Santell, Michael P. “Managing Creativity wit PERT/CPM”

Nov. 1978, 48pp
Archival copy only

Savetvit, C. “Demon: A Management Model for Marketing New Product”

Aug. 8 1975, 85pp
Archival copy only

Schiedermayer, Marvin L. “Renewal of the Conventionally Structured Medium-Sized Manufacturing Organization”

May 16, 1982, 179pp, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract: A medium-sized manufacturing organization is defined as having 200 – 2,000 employees and having annual sales revenue of $20 – 400 million dollars. Conventional structure is defined as that of the hierarchy in which activities are functionally divided and the typical mind-set is one of segmentation and isolation. The mode of operation within this structure tends to be mechanistic, command and control. The hierarchal, dictatorial structure served organizations well in past decades. The operating environment of today’s organization, however, is radically different than that in which the hierarchal structure was established. The forces acting upon the organization today prevent it from adequately meeting the needs of its stakeholders with such an impending, barrier ridden, structure. Societal, globalized business and intra-organizational interrelationships demand that the conventional manufacturing organization undergo radical changes – or perish. Applying localized, band-aid type fixes to such a dysfunctional system is not the answer to achieving long term viability. Indiscriminate use of programs such as JIT, TQM or QFD will have minimal effect without the proper organizational foundation. The key element needed for success is strong, cohesive leadership. Leadership has always been important but it is crucial in the ever turbulent environment of the future. Organizational leaders must understand the fundamental concepts of the organization: the four needs which underlie its reason for existence; the core functions of the manufacturing organization, the network of activities which support these functions and the theories of human nature which influence how individuals interact to achieve organizational objectives. The number one priority of leaders is to effectively align the people resources of the organization with the efficient accomplishment of its core functions. The energy of these resources must also be unleashed and directed toward continuous, change producing organizational renewal. To have this happen the organizational leaders must formulate and communicate the organizational vision and must provide the direction, culture and structure most conducive to achievement of the vision. The structure of the successful, continuously renewing, medium-sized manufacturing organization of the future must be oriented around integrated, value adding centers rather than discrete, isolated and self-serving functions. These activity centers must have access to all information needed to make strategic decisions along with the required support resources. The culture of the manufacturing organization of the future must be one of product and process innovation; both teams and individuals must be challenged and empowered to achieve greater competitiveness in both of these areas. People must be made to feel a sense of ownership in the organization; they must experience satisfaction from their entrepreneurial activities and must be recognized, rewarded and compensated accordingly. There are numerous barriers within a conventional organization which inhibit or prevent the organization from achieving a structural and cultural oriented renewal. For those organizations which are privately owned, the owners themselves could present the greatest barrier. If change is deemed to be unnecessary or unwanted by the owners, little can be accomplished – regardless of the effort. The higher the position in the organization, the greater the need for change related support and the greater the possible barrier to such change. The two most critical elements to enhancing or impeding change are the owners and CEO. A strong CEO, with owner or shareholder backing, can achieve the desired transformation in spite of the difficulty encountered at lower levels. A restructuring renewal is a financially sound strategy. Companies which have restructured for better organizational performance have achieved an attractive financial return on investment. To maintain control of the restructuring process from a time, resource expenditure and cash flow standpoint; it is imperative that the product be led by competent people using project management tools. Renewal of the medium-sized manufacturing organization via the structural and cultural changes as proposed will be traumatic and difficult but are mandatory if the organization is to successfully meet the future needs of its stakeholders.

Schmer, Frank M., Jr. “Effects of a Merger”

Oct. 1987, 101pp
Archival copy only

Schmidt, Edward C. “A Scientific Approach to Demand Analysis and Inventory Policy”

June 9, 1970, 5 chapters
Archival copy only

Schmidt, Richard C. “Utilizing Superior Customer Satisfaction to Drive Long-Term Growth in Small High Technology Companies.”

Aug. 1998, 138pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: The best way for a small high technology company to drive long-term growth is to create highly satisfied customers. Highly satisfied customers drive long-term growth in three ways. First, highly satisfied customers become long-term repeat customers if their needs and wants are continually satisfied better than anyone else. Second, highly satisfied customer provide valuable referrals that can be used to influence the buying decisions of prospective customers and promote company products and services to prospective customers. Third, prospective customers and existing customers are attracted to companies that deliver superior customer value. Investors are also attracted to companies that deliver superior customer value. Customer satisfaction is determined by the degree to which a company meets or exceeds customer value expectations. The more a company exceeds customer value expectations, the more satisfied customers become. The more confident a company can make customers feel about the company’s ability to deliver on customer value expectations the longer the company can expect to have highly satisfied customers. The longer a company is able to provide superior customer satisfaction the longer the company can count on customers to drive long-term growth. The author advises top management to create an organization that can maintain a close relationship with the customer. A small high technology company that stays close to the customer will never go wrong because connecting the organization to the customer will provide a competitive advantage that will help ensure company success for many years to come. Small high technology companies that focus primarily on sales and marketing activities may experience rapid growth followed by a period where the growth rate flattens-out or declines. This abrupt change in the growth rate usually occurs because the company is unable to satisfy existing customers and new customers. The best practice for small high technology companies seeking fast-growth strategies is to focus on customer satisfaction from the start and make every effort to break out of the sales-driven phase as soon as possible. The first step to using superior customer satisfaction to drive long-term growth requires top management to make the commitment to change to meet the customer’s changing needs and wants. Top management must have the courage and determination to redefine and redesign the way it does business. The author identifies and discusses key success factors, business practices, and competitive tactics that allow small high technology companies to use superior customer satisfaction to drive long-term growth. The key success factors involve the need for improvements in recruiting and retention of top-notch people, knowledge and skill development, quality, communication, definition of customer needs and wants, and ability to deliver upon customer value expectations. The business practices and competitive tactics discussed are some of the methods by which a small high technology company can implement the necessary improvements. The most important success factor involves employees. Employees directly impact a company’s success when provided with the resources, training, and authority to solve customer problems.

Schmitz, Daniel J. “A Study in the Setup of a Temporary Assembly Departure”

April 1979, 72pp
Archival copy only

Schneider, Thomas J. “Planning for Product Development”

Aug. 1973, 88pp
Archival copy only

Schrage, Richard U. “Management Job Evaluation”

Jan. 1972, 51pp
Archival copy only

Schroeder, Ralph J. “Benefits to the Public Employee From Identifying Citizens as Customers”

Feb. 1988, 43pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: During the first weeks of his tenure as Secretary of Transportation for the State of Wisconsin, Ron Fiedler challenged his department with the following philosophy, “Our responsibility is to provide service to the public which is accomplished in a variety of ways. Our charge is to be responsive to the public and treat our citizens with respect.” (1) PROVIDE SERVICE; BE RESPONSIVE; TREAT WITH RESPECT. The words of an executive to his employees in the public sector which might well be repeated by an executive to his employees in the private sector when referring to their existing or potential customers. This essay will explore the concept of viewing those affected by highway construction projects as customers of services provided by employees of a construction section of the State of Wisconsin, Department of Transportation (WISDOT) Highway district. The perspective will be kept to this one section for the sake of brevity. The ideas expressed can be effectively applied to other sections of the district, agencies of the State, or non-profit organizations. The first portion of the essay will discuss the customer. It will define the customer, the State employee used in the essay, some of the views they have of each other, and suggestions for determining customer needs. The second portion will define specific customer-project personnel relationships encountered on typical highway construction projects. It will suggest attitudes and actions to satisfy the customer’s (citizen’s) needs. The conclusion will show that the same advantages await both the public and private sector employers and their employees who responsibly and respectfully serve their customers.

Schultz, William J. “The Economy and Utilization of Personnel”

Jan. 1972, 51pp
Archival copy only

Schutta, James T. “The Written Technical Communication Problem Between Middle and Top Management”

April 21 1989, 111pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Communicating in technical terms to various audiences is a difficult task. This communication task has caused problems for industry when technical engineers and middle management try to solve the problems of the customer. To be able to write technical reports, project justification and problem analysis, the technical personnel must be able to articulate the solution. Because of the need to understand each other the future of our industries will be dependent on the communication ability of our new recruits. Their abilities will depend on how they are taught as students, their individual background and the values, and the beliefs and culture of the company. The problem of written technical communication is basically individual related but it affects the entire organization. The research into this problem has proven that the technical written communication difficulty starts with elementary and secondary education. This is where the problem can be resolved. This can only be solved with the school system, the teaching as part of the school system and industry being involved with changes required for the future. Changes must start with the educational system and with industry’s selecting people that agree with the philosophy of the company.

Schwantes, Glenn Walter “Project Management”

Nov. 1973, 32pp
Archival copy only

Scott, Richard L. “The Military Industrial Complex: Last Bastion of Opportunity for the U.S. Manufacturing Engineer?”

Nov. 15, 2006, 100pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: There is ample evidence that a great deal of manufacturing production, and with it, engineering jobs and capability, has moved out of the United States to countries like Mexico, China, and India. While manufacturing is being shifted to areas of lowest cost production, military spending over the last few years has increased dramatically. Particularly since the terrorist attacks of September 11th, 2001, there has been increased spending on the military, not just on personnel but also on military supplies, hardware, research, and contract services. For obvious security and strategic reasons, the United States must still retain the ability to manufacture ships, airplanes, tanks, and guns, and ever-more-sophisticated weapons of war and defense. This military/industrial complex (MIC) is perhaps one of the last areas of growth for US-based manufacturing and engineering, and therefore may represent a more promising alternative career path for the prospective American manufacturing engineer (MFE) than commercial sector or consumer goods manufacturing. In this project, the MFE is distinguished from designer engineer and other specialties primarily by involvement in and responsibility for the actual manufacturing process. A case study from a typical private sector company, as well as one from an MIC firm, is used to illuminate the issues pertinent to the thesis. The fact that manufacturing is migrating out of the United States is indisputable. Respected analysts of the marketplace see increasing global competition, and government studies predict a loss of almost a million jobs over the next ten years. For the MFE specifically, the outlook is better. MFEs will be in demand, but competing factors complicate the picture. Companies will want to deploy the latest new technology in new plants, using new materials and processes, tending to increase demand. However, continued offshoring of manufacturing, combined with the increasing ease of substituting talented and lower-wage foreign MFEs will tend to curtail that demand. For the American MFEs, commercial manufacturing employment is becoming a riskier proposition, often involving more supervision of offshore manufacturing projects from headquarters here. Improved business networks, the fallout of industry adopting leaner Japanese manufacturing methods, improved logistics services, the proliferation of enterprise computing, and better access to world labor markets are all contributing factors to this development. The impact on the domestic MFE is that the nature of the job is changing. The MIC has its roots in the earliest days of our country, but underwent rapid development during the World War II era. Since then, it has become less and less the case that a company would shift to military production only during wartime. Instead, now more than ever firms manufacturing goods for the military tend to produce just for the U.S. government. This is mainly due to increasing weapons complexity, high cost of entry into the market, and security requirements. For the MFE, there are more hands-on assignments with less competition from foreign nationals and more likelihood of remaining stateside. There is a great need for applying modern manufacturing techniques to what in many cases are recently-merged conglomerates with need for efficiency-improving lean projects, knowledge management and product lifecycle management improvement. Although both have strengths, there are more reasons to believe the opportunity for MFEs within the MIC is superior. Chief among these are the legislated regulations, institutional bias of the government, and the security considerations of keeping a highly capable industrial sector working; ready and available to surge up for emergency demands, here within the United States. Economic theories such as transaction cost theory and resource based views support this argument as well, as do the apparent management focus of sector firms. Finally, given the entrenchment of our enemy in the global war on terror, the advantage of the MIC as an opportunity for the MFE over private sector manufacturing appears sustainable for the foreseeable future. The U.S. still has the world’s largest manufacturing economy, and demand for MFEs is strong. However, the tide of global competition is moving firms inexorably toward reducing labor costs in all parts of manufacturing, including MFE labor costs. The support of the domestic MIC by the U.S. government, and their view of it a crucial strategic capacity, along with all the other factors cited herein, makes the opportunity within the MIC superior.

Scott, Roger A. “The Future of the Temporary Technical Services Industry”

June 1974, 37pp
Archival copy only

Seavers, Robin K. “Total Quality System: Definition, Benefits and Implementation”

Feb. 1993, 79pp
Archival copy only

Sedlar, Jeffrey Donald. “Understanding the Process of Change Within the Business Organization”

Oct. 19, 1987, 36pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Today, the business environment that surrounds an organization is changing rapidly and is challenging managers to become far more alert and inventive than ever before. Many business organizations are trying to understand the process of change in terms of which approaches will lead to successful changes and which actions will fail to achieve the desired results. This dissertation is an analysis and evaluation of the process of change in respect to identifying, understanding, implementing and maintaining change within the business organization. An essential element in the management of change is the ability to recognize change as it starts to take place. Management needs to stress a continuing self-examination as part of the process of identifying and managing change. The organization must adopt a positive view toward change and respond in an orderly manner. Understanding the characteristics of change is a far more complex task than identifying specific changes. In today’s business environment, employees are experiencing considerable stress because they can no longer perform their work as they formerly did. Resistance to change by employees and managers alike is one of the most difficult problems that business managers have to resolve in their organizations. Business organizations should be structured to create the circumstances that make it possible for individuals to contribute their ideas to the process of change. Managers need to develop internal environments that stimulate individuals to act and give them the power to do so. Successful change depends basically on a redistribution of the decision-making power within the structure of an organization. The power redistribution should occur through a good developmental plan for the business organization. This plan involves a number of phases, each containing specific elements and multiple causes that provoke a needed reaction from the power structure, which, in turn, sets the stage for the next phase in the process of change. The most important task for the business organization is to develop the characteristics of the business environment that can be managed to permit change to take place on its own. Change management systems must continually be reviewed and re-reviewed to assess its appropriateness and effectiveness. The business organization must be responsive to the social revolution in both the internal and external environment of the company and to the new structures and systems necessary for improving its performance for the future.

Shakir, Jawed A. “Management of the New Product: Development in the 1980s”

Nov. 1981, 38pp
Archival copy only

Shambayati, Keyvan “New-Product Strategic Planning”

1975, 72pp
Archival copy only

Shamsaifar, Khosro “Management Involvement in Public Affairs Strategies”

April 1980, 26pp
Archival copy only

Shipley, David L. “The Development and Analysis of a Cost Reduction Proposal”

Sept. 1978, 38pp
Archival copy only

Siepert, Fred R. “The Supervision of Technical People”

May 1979, 33pp
Archival copy only

Sikora, Daniel F. “Process Planning: Documenting the Manufacturing Process”

Aug. 20, 1990, 48pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Manufacturing Engineering is a service industry, providing information, instructions, and support to production personnel. The means in which information is obtained, digested, and interpreted by manufacturing and passed on to production is not quite as important as the quality of the information which is given. Clear, concise information enables production personnel to understand the intentions of the design engineer and allows them to produce parts made to blueprint tolerances in an efficient, cost-effective manner. The product or service which is produced is the ultimate “end” and the manufacturing plan is a means to that “end”. This paper will address the importance of a well-defined manufacturing plan and will define the required elements of that plan.

Simon, Robert N. “Succession Planning in the Engineering Atmosphere”

May 1989, 75pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Sims, Michael D. “A Feasibility Study for Starting Up a Technology Company for Industrial Network-Interface Products”

Oct. 22, 2003, 149pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis analyzes the economic feasibility of starting up a new technology company to design and market industrial-network interface products. It determines if there is a sufficient market need for the proposed business venture, presents a detailed market analysis, and applies that analysis to develop a business strategy and supporting functional strategies. These strategies are implemented in a preliminary business plan, and the results reviewed to determine if this is a viable business opportunity. The market analysis reviews the external and internal business environments, identifying the important strategic factors. Existing competitors are analyzed to identify their strategies and objectives. Market research is used to estimate the potential market size, identify target market segments, and determine customer requirements. Strategy formulation applies the results of the market analysis to develop the business strategy. A situation analysis uses the strategic factors to identify the most appropriate business strategy. Corporate culture and values are defined. Based on this data, the best corporate strategy for the proposed company will be growth through horizontal integration. The business strategy will be focused differentiation for the North American market. Further refinement of these strategies results in the development of a hybrid business model. The proposed company will provide custom products to the industrial network-interface market. It will charge a nominal fee for its design services, generating profits by manufacturing the resulting custom products. The hybrid business model is unique in its application to the industrial network-interface market, and will be a strong competitive advantage for the company. The preliminary business plan defines and implements specific functional strategies that support the hybrid business model. It includes a marketing plan, an organizational plan, and an operations plan. Financial statements generated from the sales forecast and estimated budgets are analyzed to determine profitability and the return on initial investment. Company ownership and financial sources are defined. The company will be a closely-held corporation. The required start-up funding is estimated to be $220,000. Contingency plans are presented for each functional strategy. The results of this feasibility study indicate that the proposed company can be economically successful. The business opportunity is well defined, and there is sufficient market size and growth to accommodate a new competitor. The hybrid business model will provide a unique competitive advantage for penetrating the target market segments and growing its business. Important success factors include customer-orientation and flexibility. Customer relationships will be important to financial success, because the company will have a limited number of customers. Flexibility will be important for company employees, who will need to perform a diverse number of tasks. Manufacturing operations will also have to be flexible in order to efficiently produce a number of different custom products.

Sincere, David P. “New Justification Technique for the Replacement of Capital Equipment”

July 31, 1996, 136pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Wise investment in capital equipment is critical to a company’s future. The basic object of replacing capital equipment is to improve a company’s future and competitiveness. The process to replace old or obsolete capital equipment is very critical. More than 34% of all U.S. machine tools are twenty years old or greater. This equipment will eventually need to be replaced. An accurate equipment justification procedure must be in place to make financially sound decisions. This procedure can only be effective if an accurate costing system is in place, all benefits are stated, and no fixed numerical hurdle rate is in place that acts as the go/no-go decision on capital equipment replacement decision making. Technology has changed the way companies do business. Production lines have become fully automated. Overhead costs have grown while direct labor cost have shrunk. Overhead costs have grown because of the need for more expensive equipment and tooling, larger marketing departments, increased advertising, technology, and R & D research. While so much has changed, some things are still the same. Accounting systems have not changed to reflect the change that is happening in manufacturing facilities. New Activity Based Costing (ABC) accounting systems are needed to allocate costs where they are consumed. Unfortunately, converting standard accounting systems into Activity Based Cost accounting systems can be difficult. New technology is being used because customers demand higher quality, greater variability, shorter lead times, and lower cost products. This causes overhead costs to increase. New manufacturing technology increasing involves more maintenance, expensive capital equipment, additional engineers, maintenance equipment, support labor, and expensive tooling, etc. The major cost of a product has shifted from direct labor to overhead and material cost. Direct labor is a small percentage of total corporate cost. The increased use of automation has had a direct impact on the reduction of direct labor. The changes in manufacturing philosophy have been significant. a) Greater use of automation equals higher quality, and lower cost. b) Flexible Manufacturing Systems (FMS) reduce throughput time. c) JIT philosophy leads to less lead time and smoother work flow. d) Cellular Manufacturing reduces delivery time, increases flexibility and quality. Spending for capital equipment is a very important decision. How a manufacturing company invests, will determine its future. Investment decision making starts with an analysis on justifying new equipment. This analysis must contain, costs, benefits and intangibles. This data should contain both tangible and intangible benefits. All cost savings should be either calculated or estimated. After these costs and benefits are estimated, a decision is made on whether or not to replace the equipment. There are many types of costs, but most accounting systems allow only tangible costs in the justification of capital equipment. The financial department uses a simple model to approve or disapprove the capital needed for the equipment. This simple model will have a hurdle rate attached to it. Replacement projects will have to meet or exceed the hurdle rate. Both intangible and tangible benefits should be calculated or estimated. Ignoring intangible cost could undervalue the true benefit of the replacement equipment, thus depriving a company of becoming more efficient. Peter Santori states, “Good data for justification systems is seldom available in today’s cost-accounting systems. Direct labor is easily calculated by the accounting department. At one time, factories were dedicated to making large volume with small part variation. Indirect costs were allocated to product cost either by volume or direct labor hours. Since overhead was not a major cost and volume was large and consistent, this method of overhead allocation was estimated accurately. Overhead was allocated as a percentage of direct labor. For every direct hour of labor consumed, a predetermined amount of overhead would be consider consumed. This fixed amount of overhead was equally allocated to each direct labor hour. While technology has changed, the accounting systems used to monitor costs have not. Traditional Cost Accounting Systems were designed to track direct costs. Accounting systems spend a considerable amount of resources measuring direct cost. This was fine when direct labor was a major cost of a product. This is not true anymore. Currently, overhead makes up a large share of the total cost. This cost can be over 50%. The financial department determines whether an Equipment Justification Investment Proposal (EJIP) is approved or not. A financial analysis tool is used to measure the EJIP. The rate by which an investment is needed for approval is called the hurdle rate. By using high hurdle rates, the financial department believes it is eliminating all but the best investments. The thinking is, the higher the hurdle rate, the less the risk in making the investment. This will either limit the amount invested, or it will eliminate it all together. Proper equipment investment is critical to a companies future. An accurate replacement equipment justification method is critical for proper decision making on investment in capital equipment. A successful technique to justify the replacement of capital equipment needs three items to be successful. 1. A scoring model that takes into account: Financials; Risk; Benefits (tangible and intangible); Costs; Resources’ Assumptions. 2. An ABC cost accounting system in place. Costs are charged to the specific activity where they occur. This leads to more accurate product costing. 3. Financial departments that eliminate the simple/short-term financial tools, i.e. payback, ROI, etc. as the main decision making tool. Decisions should be made on the comparison of scores on the scoring model, which includes tangible, intangible and financial benefits.

Sindelar, Thomas B. “Process Improvement Techniques in Healthcare”

May 21, 2006, 85pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Introduction — Proposition — Healthcare in the United States — Process improvement history — Process improvement technique keys — Change — Process improvement in healthcare — Case study — Desired outcomes — Root cause conclusions — Recommendations — Conclusions — Appendix A- Project meeting notes and action items B- Ideal redesign worksheet. The healthcare industry in the United States is facing a crisis. Costs continue to rise, access to care continues to get constrained, and quality of care as perceived by patients is not keeping pace with the cost. Many of the efforts utilized in healthcare today attempt to leverage new technology and cost control measures to combat these issues. Many healthcare organizations do not employ systematic process improvement to help combat these issues. The current state of the healthcare industry is a culmination of over one-hundred years of changes. In the early 1900s, changes began in the use and influence of hospitals in patient care. An increasing number of physicians became specialists versus working in general medicine. As World War II raged on, those that joined the military received health services and treatments not widely available previously. Wages were frozen at this time and groups negotiated for improvements to insurance benefits. In the 1960s Medicare changed healthcare as coverage was now being provided based on age rather than need. Healthcare costs continue to climb reaching nearly 16 percent of the United States’ gross domestic product. The increasing cost of providing healthcare has in turn increased the expenditures of employers and employees at a rate greater than income growth. The current rapid rise in healthcare costs can be tracked in part to productivity not keeping pace with healthcare wage inflation, insurance, risk inherent in the practice of medicine, and the lack of solid information and payment responsibility in the hands of the patients. Process improvement techniques have been used in manufacturing for years to make advancements in the areas of quality, cost, delivery, safety, and morale. Most of these efforts trace back to Toyota Motor Company in 1945 when they created their Toyota Production System as a method to make productivity and cost improvements to catch up to their American counterparts. Their steady application of such techniques over the years have allowed them to pass Ford Motor as the second largest automobile manufacturer in the world and positioned them to soon overtake General Motors as the largest. Organizations that successfully utilize process improvement techniques have some common characteristics. These start with strong leadership at the top of an organization lending full support to the improvement efforts. Leaders create and effectively communicate a vision to the entire organization. They also lay out steps and projects for employees to execute that help achieve the vision. Resources are dedicated to the effort with a continuous improvement manager responsible for leading and training the organization in addition to insuring that the processes are correctly followed. Process improvement tools all follow a similar six step methodology which includes identifying the opportunity, understanding the current state, defining the desired outcomes, determine root causes, propose and test solutions, and insure that improvements are sustained. Managing change is an important aspect to successful process improvement efforts. Keys to managing change include the establishment of a sense of urgency, the creation of a guiding coalition, development of a vision and strategy, communication of the vision, the empowerment of action, the consolation of gain, and the use of early successes to anchor a new approach in the culture. Healthcare organizations have slowly begun to embrace and utilize process improvement tools. When these efforts are anchored by strong leadership and are allowed to become a part of the business, successes are realized. The general culture of healthcare, given its risks, propensity for litigation, and sometimes just a belief that things are already as good as they can or need to be, tend to prevent results similar to what have been realized in manufacturing. A case study at healthcare provider organization in a Midwestern state provided first-hand experience in quality improvement efforts in healthcare. The study showed in this healthcare organization that there was no process improvement system, adequate training, management support, clearly communicated vision, process ownership, dedication of resources, and patient input. Process improvement tools to drive quality improvements in healthcare can be successful. Some important elements of the system are necessary for success to be achieved. This includes the correct leadership, creation and communication of a vision, having a process improvement system, a manager to control the improvement tools and processes, resources dedicated to the improvement projects, and feedback from the patients most directly affected by the process.

Sitton, Randy W. “An Assurance of Safety on State and Federally Funded Construction Projects”

May 1989, 75pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Skoug, Chad L. “Activity Based Costing for Injections Molding”

Nov. 1999, 93pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Companies have lost the ability to track costs accurately. Eighty percent of companies today continue to depend on traditional costing to develop the final price of their finished goods. However, traditional costing has grown obsolete for most applications and needs to be replaced by a more accurate method of tracking costs. In recent years, companies have begun turning towards Activity-Based Costing (ABC) to accurately track the costs of finished goods. However, ABC has been hyped as an extremely difficult concept that requires a team of accountants and outside consultants to implement effectively. Many small companies have felt that ABC is outside of their grasp. This is not the case. ABC can be implemented by small companies and does not require a large sum of money or manpower. A basic ABC system can be developed without a large amount of difficulty. Many of the books, magazines, and journals about ABC lead people to believe that a complex system is needed. In reality, a simple ABC that is understood by managers is more effective and can be developed for nearly any company. This thesis will show how ABC can be implemented in a small operation. A custom injection molder is used as an example. Injection molding works well as an example because there are many unique and varied processes. ABC can tie the processes and costs of injection molding together to accurately track the final prices of the plastic parts. Additionally, the ideas and concepts from implementing ABC in an injection molding company can easily be transferred to other industries. Implementing ABC simply requires one person who understands the company and the major activities performed by employees. With this knowledge, the person can create the ABC model using the simple functions of a spreadsheet. The costs fall into a logical arrangement resulting in an accurate price for the finished good. As the company grows and changes, the spreadsheet can easily be changed as well. With ABC in place, companies can provide much better customer support, initiate incremental costing when bidding on new jobs, and measure the impact that new equipment will have on the operation of the company. In short, ABC can make a manager’s job easier by providing more accurate information to allow better decisions to be made.

Siwek, Michael, Shauna Boyer and DeAnna L. Leitzke “Knowledge Management in the Construction Industry”

July 23, 2008, 98pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: It is commonly accepted that knowledge is an important asset in today’s organizations. Businesses are starting to apply knowledge management theory in an effort to remain competitive in the dynamic environment of the 21st century. The construction industry has struggled to find ways to effectively embrace knowledge management and maximize its potential. This paper focuses on utilization of post-project reviews in an effort to aid in facilitation of this objective. First, the uniqueness, project delivery methods, and challenges associated with the construction industry are considered, as well as how these characteristics affect knowledge gathering and retention. Next, communication and the vital role that it plays in regard to knowledge management is investigated. The concept of post-project reviews is then presented as a means to implement knowledge management within this unique industry. Finally, primary research was conducted through a survey to gauge the current practices and perception of knowledge management and post-project reviews among construction professionals. The results of this study support the hypothesis that post-project reviews are an effective means to facilitate knowledge management in the construction industry. Additional conclusions are explored and recommendations for further research in the field are suggested.

Skowron, Richard T. “Management: His Concern for Product Integrity and its Ultimate Relationship to Product Design”

Dec. 1977, 66pp
Archival copy only

Skowron, Richard Thaddeus “Professional and Product Integrity and Their Relationship to Product Design”

March 1978, 75pp
Archival copy only

Slavik, Cynthia S. “The Department of Natural Resources as a Long Term Engineering Career”

May 1990, 41pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This essay attempts to evaluate the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources as a long term career for the engineer. The problem was initiated by a perception of several groups that the DNR is merely a training ground for other companies and would not be an optimal long term career. The evaluation was performed using a questionnaire sent to all engineers in the DNR and a review of available literature. The results of the analyses indicate there are some misconceptions about those working for the DNR and some areas where the administration can indeed enhance the DNR as a long term career.

Smiarowski, Michael W. “Case Study: Limerick Turbine Retrofit Project: Managerial and Contractual Issues Problem Analysis”

Feb. 25
Archival copy only- not available for circulation or viewing

Smith, Debra Lynn. “Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs)”

Feb. 1992, 58pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to describe Employee Assistance Programs as a method of helping employees deal with alcohol, drug, or emotional problems, so that the employees can regain their health and individual productivity. The following are advantages to having an EAP: 1. Employee’s alcohol, drug, or emotional problems can be detected early, when treatment is less expensive and has a higher success rate. 2. Reduced health care costs in subsequent years. 3. Helps employees maintain full productivity. 4. Increased product quality. 5. Decrease in injuries, damaged equipment, theft, absenteeism, fatalities, tardiness, and time off. 6. Reduce social costs of crime and cost of criminal justice system. 7. Reduced homicides, suicides, domestic and sexual violence. 8. Reduction in turnover, grievances, sick leave, and off the job accidents. This thesis also discusses types of EAPs, how to evaluate and start an EAP, drug testing as a future trend, and the manager’s role in employee health. Two primary means are used by work organizations to engage employees in the counseling and referral process. First, EAPs try to attract voluntary referrals through employee education. Employees are encouraged to seek confidential counseling and referral for assistance. Second, managers and supervisors are encouraged to refer their problem employees for counseling and referral. Without management referral, employees with alcohol and/or drug problems are unlikely to seek help from EAP programs because these employees deny that they have these problems. They must be brought to face their problems in a very direct and forceful way. Employee Assistance Programs present that opportunity. The first step to establishing an employee assistance program is to develop and publish a clear policy concerning alcoholism and various other problems that interfere with job performance. It must assure employees that participation in the EAP will be kept confidential and records will not become part of their personnel files. Supervisors need training if they are to be effective in the rehabilitative process. They must be counseled in how to maintain an objective, consistent approach to the problems of the troubled employee and must be helped to understand how the employee’s behavior is impacting their own behavior.

Smith, Edward W. D., II. “Managing to Success in a World Class Manufacturing Environment”

March 5 1996, 73pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: World Class Manufacturing is a concept manufacturing organizations are trying to achieve. The definition of World Class Manufacturing is different for each organization. The project researched showed that organizations state the desire to become World Class without having defined how World Class Manufacturing fits the needs of the organization. The World Class Manufacturing model developed by the author consists of four components: Utilization of sound manufacturing management strategies, Adoption of practices to insure the strategies are part of the daily activities, Identification of customer expectations developed through interaction with all business constituents and/or customers, and Standardization of performance measurable to insure all customer expectations are met. The World Class Manufacturing strategies are: Total Quality Management (TQM), Employee Involvement, Self-Directed Work Teams, Root Cause Elimination/Standardized Problem Solving, Safety/Housekeeping, Environmental Awareness, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM), Set-up Reduction, Waste Elimination Manufacturing, Simultaneous Engineering, and Quality Function Deployment. The strategies are essential to the progression to World Class Manufacturing. When the strategies are combined with the appropriate practices and customer expectations, and applied correctly World Class status can be achieved. Practices include: Benchmarking, Reengineering, Vision and Business Planning, Employee Development Training & Mentoring, and High Velocity Change. Customer expectations are based on quality, cost, and delivery but include the expectations of both external and internal customers. Examples include: complete, clear, stable processes, drawings and plans, manufacturable designs, on-time drawings, process, plans, and tool designs, on-time delivery, cost reductions, capable processes, performance consistent with budget and or quotes, a great place to work, meet customer product development timing, and zero defects. The model when used in conjunction with the following ten step application process can lead a organization on the journey to World Class Manufacturing and Engineering. 1. Create a clear tomorrow (Develop the vision) 2. Solicit Customer expectations 3. Perform Competitive Benchmarking 4. Develop Strategic Imperatives 5. Align Strategic Imperatives with World Class Manufacturing Engineering Strategies 6. Determine Key Process within Manufacturing Engineering 7. Form Teams to Perform Key Processes 8. Develop Measurables that Support Imperatives, Key processes, and Customer Expectations 9. Develop Transition Plan 10. Periodically Review Key Measurables and Corrective Actions and Institutionalize World Class Manufacturing Engineering The correct application of the model can lead to the following results: Improved market share of nineteen percent and reduced manufacturing costs sixty nine percent over six years. Teamwork and employee involvement using waste elimination techniques accounted for much of the organization’s success. Self-directed work teams, standardized problem solving and total productive maintenance drove the reduction of scrap and rework twenty seven percent, met production schedules one hundred percent of the time and reduced machine downtime from six hundred hours per year to one hundred seventy-five hours for one manufacturer. Another manufacturer reduced product introduction lead times fifty percent through Simultaneous Engineering and new technology in engineering. The results can be obtained by periodic review of the customer expectations and the implementation of corrective actions that insure the expectations and measurables are being met.

Smith, Gregory J. “Crisis Management: An Increasing Challenge for Today’s Organizations”

Dec. 2001, 102pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Crisis management, as it relates to organizations, can take on many different forms. Crises, such as an organization losing its senior managers in a severe car crash, or facing bankruptcy proceedings, can threaten the existence of a company. Therefore, managers must understand the importance of not only identifying early warning signs of crises, but they must also prepare for future ones. Many managers may view the probability for a crisis as low and, as such, may not adequately prepare for them. Managers that are knowledgeable, aware of potential crises, and that are capable of detecting early warning signs may minimize the effects and intensity of them. What appears to complicate or cloud the issue of crisis management within organizations results from bottom line and top level managers that may view their respective company contingent plans somewhat differently. Additionally, managers of publicly held organizations may share a somewhat different perception of crisis than managers of privately owned companies. It also becomes important to understand that crisis evolves through stages. This allows managers to better conceptualize and thus prepare for crisis. This ultimately enables managers to create contingency and monitoring plans to assist the organization during a crisis. All managers should realize that it is not a matter of, if a crisis will occur during their careers, but when.

Smith, Pamela “Challenging Tradition: The Learning Organization as a Strategic Management Approach in the Construction Industry”

June 11, 2007, 78pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Literary research and interviews with professionals in the construction industry are used in this thesis to identify current challenges facing construction companies. Challenges found include a highly competitive, complex, and rapidly changing business environment, a shrinking pool of skilled labor, lost knowledge and skills among trade personnel, and increasing customer demands. Traditional management models still widely used in the construction industry are introduced and discussed in detail, emphasizing the scientific management philosophy of Frederick Taylor and the administrative management theory of Henri Fayol. Drawbacks of the traditional management model were found, including its neglect of acknowledging employee intellectual capital and therefore its inability to capture and transfer valuable knowledge; the disconnect between those actually doing the work, that is, the value added part, and the needs and priorities of the customer; the extensive dependence on inspection in the traditional model; the absence of team and cross-functional analyses to problem-solve, especially vital in this era of complexity; the inability to adapt quickly to changes due to its hierarchical structure; and the lack of opportunities for innovation. This thesis researches the learning organization model as an alternative strategic management approach. The premise of the learning organization is that learning must take place quicker than the external environment changes to enable organizations to maintain viability amid these changes. Organizations accomplish this through a concerted strategic management effort to instill continuous improvement initiatives through continuous learning by its members. Knowledge must be sought and transferred through the organization through formalized structures supporting this intent. The basic concepts of the learning organization include a culture that values experimentation, teamwork, shared decision making, employee ownership of work outputs, employee control over work process, continuous improvement, the creation and transferring of knowledge, systematic thinking, and learning styles that challenge company norms. The challenges found that face the implementation of these concepts within the construction industry include the non-standard nature of construction projects, the use of temporary alliances and fragmentation in the industry, a construction culture that values “hard” issues, and difficulties in managing information due to the lack of formal structures and procedures to support it. An implementation plan designed by this student is presented in the second portion of this thesis. The implementation plan is geared toward construction firms interested in adopting a learning organization strategic management model. Prerequisites for employing the plan are outlined, including an analysis of strategic and knowledge gaps, and communication within the organization. Unit work teams are at the core of this student’s plan, emphasizing trade personnel responsibility for work quality, time and cost efficient work processes, problem solving, and record keeping. A structure is presented which allows individual project learning to transfer on an organizational-wide basis. Other topics of note include continuous information gathering to support and analyze change plan, the benefits of using a pilot project, handling resistance to change, and the development of an exit strategy as part of the implementation plan.

Smittkamp, Charles E. “Management Policy Effects on Purchased Material Quality”

May 1983, 52pp
Archival copy only

Snan, Read H. “Procedural Rules for the Settlement of International Commercial Arbitration Cases”

May 1989, 63pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this research is to examine the procedural rules of international commercial arbitration. A detailed description will be given of the procedures involved in commercial arbitration cases – including terms of reference, pleading, discovery, and witnesses. The research will then focus on arbitration involving developing countries, and will conclude with an evaluation of the comparative merits of ad hoc (special case0 arbitration vs. institutional arbitration, especially when one party is from a developed country and the other from a developing country. Procedural rules, for the purpose of this research, are the body of rules or machinery for carrying on arbitration proceedings after the formation of the arbitration panel and culminating with the award. Thus, this study is concerned with what goes on in arbitration, beyond the actual proceeding themselves, that go on during an arbitration. The procedure for the settlement of commercial arbitration cases has a number of advantages over other forms of disputes resolution, including litigation. These will be discussed at greater length.

Sparapani, Scott (see Coffey, Anthony)


Sparger, Michael F “A Study of Strategic Planning for Manufacturing in an Electronics Operation”

March 1986, 43pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: One objective of every member of a corporation is to identify the strategic contribution that it can make to the overall stability, profitability, and long term health of the organization. The ultimate contribution of each member of the organization must include a synergy that results in a total organizational output greater than the sum of its individuals. The overriding thesis of this paper is the development of the strategic planning process, controls, and methods to enhance competitive positions of electronics manufacturing organizations. The goal of this competitive strategy is to position a company where it can best defend itself against competitive forces or can influence them in its favor. Competitive events in several worldwide manufacturing industries have highlighted the dangers of viewing the manufacturing function as neutral and the benefits of recognizing its potential for supporting business and corporate strategy. These recent events suggest that manufacturing can and should take a more proactive role in defining the desired competitive advantage if manufacturing is to become a significant weapon. What most organizations lack is a descriptive framework for understanding how their manufacturing organizations are contributing to overall strategic goals. This includes identifying how the manufacturing organization can be viewed as a source of competitive advantage. The difficult task is to identify that advantage, acknowledge its presence, communicate its ability to contribute, and then exploit it to the advantage of the company. To be effective, each functional strategy must support, through a consistent pattern of decisions and trade-offs on competitive priorities, the competitive advantage being sought by the business strategy. It is the pattern of structural decisions over time that constitutes the “manufacturing strategy” of a business. It is not the stated objective of the organization if the actions and decisions are not congruent with, or lend credence to the publicized goals. The major function of the manufacturing strategy is to assemble and develop the set of manufacturing resources that will allow the business to pursue its current and future strategy. Once the attitudes and competitive priorities are identified for the business, the task for manufacturing is to structure and manage itself in such a way as to mesh with and reinforce that strategy. What is needed is a statement of manufacturing strategy that reflects the true priorities of the business strategy, and that allows the manufacturing organization to be a major contributor to that competitive advantage.

Sperl, George “Suggested Improvements for the System of Performance Evaluation and Merit Adjustment of Technicians in Industry”

Dec. 1971, 67pp
Archival copy only

Spiegelhoff, Steven Paul. “A Need for Formal Project Planning and Scheduling”

May 1981, 49pp
Archival copy only

Stanis, William “A Heat Balance Analysis of Hydraulic Systems”

May 1970, 85pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Steepy, Tom Arne “Introducing New Products into the Manufacturing Environment: A Companywide Effort”

Nov. 1986, 49pp, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to outline a process for introducing new products into the manufacturing environment that will help ensure that all the company objectives are met. The main thrust of the thesis will be directed toward small to medium sized companies that have a functional organization structure and supply customer proprietary products to the OEM market. The thesis will address all the functional areas of a company that should be involved in the new product introduction, beginning with the customer request for a design/quotation of a product and ending when the product is being consistently produced on a normal production basis.

Stein, Jeffry A. “A Manufacturing Planning Method Tasks, Strategies and Policies”

May 1975, 64pp
Archival copy only

Stemper, Brad “Demand Innovation Strategy with Integration into Commercial Knowledge Management Practices”

Nov. 9, 2007, 98pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This thesis considers demand innovation as a major influence within the customer’s value proposition. When compared to product innovation, demand innovation accommodates the customer’s higher-order needs and accomplishes their esteem and self-actualization needs. Within business activity, these needs are the foundation to determine customer value based on the requirement to achieve higher performance or productivity. The use of knowledge management to facilitate a demand innovation agenda is imperative. The problem lies in how knowledge management can fulfill a commercial business organization’s needs while working around management challenges. A significant challenge is overcoming the difficulty in managing knowledge that is both subjective and objective. Since commercial business units rely heavily on the personal attributes of, or the relationships with, customers, the knowledge system — to be useful — must maintain an ability to retain and communicate the details of those relationships as well as offer an understanding of the customer’s application. Cohesion and communication within the organization is vital since customers each have their own needs and restrictions based on their needs. Different employees will have varied appreciations for the situation. A system to present and streamline these knowledge-sharing efforts would enhance delivery and provide greater application knowledge for customers. This is essential when implementing a demand innovation agenda to improve the value proposition.

Stockwell, Stanley F. “Management for Creativity in the Research and Development Department”

May 1979, 32pp
Archival copy only

Strand, Lisa “Replacing the Traditional Performance Appraisal: Using a Balanced Scorecard Approach to Strategically Guide Individual Performance Toward Organizational Goals”

May 12, 2003, 93pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Both the traditional performance appraisal and the Balanced Scorecard ultimately seek to improve the performance of the organization. However, the focus is different in each approach — the traditional performance appraisal focuses on individuals, while the Balanced Scorecard focuses on the organization as a whole. The goals of the traditional performance appraisal are worthy, but these functions have not been served adequately. The Balanced Scorecard could be used to cover most of the functions that the traditional performance appraisal sought to satisfy in a manner that is more appropriate in the context of today’s organization. The main focus in this thesis will be to identify who traditional performance appraisals fail and how the Balanced Scorecard can address their shortcomings. Topics addressed in this thesis include the intended purposes of the traditional performance appraisal, evidence that traditional performance appraisals cannot adequately serve their intended purposes, the basics of the Balanced Scorecard approach, the importance of managing the organization as a system, management’s view of employees, and an explanation of using a Balanced Scorecard approach to invoke a cultural shift in the organization that can eliminate the need for the traditional performance appraisal. The traditional performance appraisal is an artifact of the assumptions made regarding how and why people are motivated to perform in an organizational setting. Compelling evidence continues to mount pointing to the elimination of the TPA. Unfortunately, most resources on the subject do not indicate how to measure and guide performance without it. People within the organization may be convinced that the traditional performance appraisal serves important purposes within the organization and that it is a necessary part of life. For example, people within organizations may be concerned about how pay would be administered fairly without it. Resolving problems such as these requires an examination and reevaluation of the assumptions upon which the need is based. Management may need to adopt a different viewpoint regarding employees and how they function in and react to the organization as a system. Several of management theories, namely McGregor’s Theory Y, systems theory and a balanced scorecard approach, can be used in combination to solve a number of problems in today’s organizations. McGregor’s Theory Y indicates that individuals are intrinsically motivated to perform. Given the correct information regarding strategy along with a picture of how he or she fits into the organization, an employee will align their efforts with the goals of the organization. Systems theory provides the picture, while the balanced scorecard approach provides a means by which to communicate the strategy. The balanced scorecard also provides timely feedback regarding performance and a framework for linking compensation with outcomes.

Strangeway, William E. “A New Approach to Performance Appraisal for Software Engineers”

March 21, 1994, 122pp, endnotes, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: Development of sophisticated software applications for today’s business environment is being hampered by low productivity and inadequate quality control. This situation has resulted in a “software crisis”. As Conte, et al., explain in Software Engineering Metrics and Models: The full realization of the potential of computers … depends on our ability to produce reliable software at a reasonable cost. … there is great national concern that software technology lags so far behind hardware technology that this potential will never be fully realized, and that we as a country could lose our technological lead in computers to other nations. Productivity improvement in the software engineering profession has been approached from either a technical or behavioral perspective. Technical approaches utilize new software development methodologies, development tools, metrics, etc., in their attempt to improve productivity. By contrast, behavioral (sociological) approaches consider such areas as the work environment, ergonomics, human relations and organizational behavior. This thesis focuses on the software productivity problem from a behavioral perspective. In particular, the employee performance appraisal aspect of organizational behavior and its impacts upon productivity are explored and a new approach to the appraisal of software engineers is developed. The premise of the proposed approach to the performance appraisal of software engineers concurs with a citation of Gerald Weinberg in The Decline and Fall of the American Programmer: Many programmers – probably most programmers – work in environments in which they receive essentially no real feedback embodying the consequences of what they do. Lacking this feedback, they lack the motivation to attempt changes, and they also lack the information needed to make the correct changes. Chapter One further explains the importance of addressing the software productivity issue and the rationale for approaching it from a behavioral perspective. Chapter Two gives a historical background on performance appraisal and the corporate rationale for its implementation. Chapter Three examines the many aspects, problems, and pitfalls involved in implementing performance appraisal. In addition, the role of the manager and emerging concepts on the subject are discussed. To gain further insight into the performance appraisal issues that affect software engineers, an opinion survey was administered. Chapter Four discusses the insights gathered from the survey and how the information was considered in the recommendationed approach to performance appraisal. In Chapter Five a new approach to the performance appraisal of software engineers is developed. The new approach involves revising the performance appraisal practices applied to software engineers and implementing them within the framework of the classic software development model. The new approach intends to improve the productivity of software engineers by using performance appraisal as a medium to create a climate of increased communication between managers and software engineers.

Straub, Robert J. “Guide to Project Management”

May 1970, 58pp
Archival copy only

Strehlow, Gene “Managing the Engineer: The Subtle Differences”

June 1978, 33pp
Archival copy only

Stricker, David K. “A Management Review and Long Range Plan for Locrest Farm”

June 1978, 33pp
Archival copy only

Stuart, Thomas Gregory “Management Study of Technical Documentation”

June 1977, 45pp, appendix
Archival copy only

Studt, Tim “Guidelines for Selecting and Networking Core Business Units”

Aug. 1995, 99pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: Over the past few years, most firms have been effective in reducing manufacturing cost through automation. Likewise, these companies have made strides in reducing inventory and quality costs through techniques such as just-in-time manufacturing and statistical process control. As a result, material and direct labor costs have been reduced dramatically. However, relatively high overhead costs continue to burden the larger firms, yet smaller firms have been successful in keeping these costs relatively low. The large, diversified firms must address these costs if they are to regain competitiveness. The overall goal of this thesis is to help large firms reduce overhead costs through the process of selecting and networking core business units. Although the subjects of selecting (diversification strategy) and networking (organizational structure) business units are well covered in available literature, there is little mention of integrating these two areas in the effort to improve company efficiency. This thesis shows that the major factors affecting company efficiency are diversification strategies and organizational structures. It also shows that these factors are interrelated. In other words, successful diversification also requires proper organizational structure. Hypotheses on company efficiency are proposed in Chapter 2 to suggest that if diversification is minimized and the organization is networked, company efficiencies would improve. A literature review is presented in Chapter 3 and 4 to defend the proposed hypotheses. The data shows that the diversification strategies of most conglomerates have dissipated rather than improved shareholder value. The data also shows the negative affect that large, vertical structures have on operating and innovation efficiencies. Diversification strategies are analyzed in Chapter 5 by contrasting “unrelated” (portfolio-based) diversification with “related” (core strategy) diversification. It appears that companies are better off if resources are focused on core business units. Efficiencies can be improved in related industries because of the opportunities to share activities and transfer skills. On the other hand, portfolio-based strategy reduces risk by spreading resources among a variety of industries. However, the benefits of core strategy appear to outweigh any benefit of risk spreading that the portfolio-based strategy might offer. Organizational structure is analyzed in Chapter 6 by contrasting vertical structures with a networked organization. The two main problem areas with the vertical structure are unilateral control and the division of labor. Unilateral control does not effectively utilize the vast knowledge available in the lower level of the organization. Division of labor causes barriers to be placed between functional departments and between the vertical levels of the company, hindering communication and encouraging bureaucracy. Networking addresses unilateral control by empowering workers. Networking addresses division-of-labor concerns by interconnecting employees vertically and horizontally. As a result, communication and decision-making are completed quickly and efficiently. Networking blurs the lines between levels and departments allowing employees to focus on company goals instead of departmental goals. Corporate strategies within efficient firms are discussed in Chapter 7. The environment is scanning internally and externally by measuring overhead costs using techniques such as activity-based accounting. Strategy formulation and implementation is discussed. Guidelines for selecting and organizing business units are given. The main idea is to select business units that are related in ways that allow activities to be shared and skills to be transferred. Once the business units are selected, they must be networked in a way that optimizes information flow, empowers employees, and holds them accountable. Finally, the culture that should be nurtured within the “Efficient Firm” is discussed in Chapter 8. The Efficient Firm focuses on the customer, looks for longer term investments and empowers employees.

Stuebs, Kurt W. “Integrating People with Disabilities into the Work Place”

Nov. 1993, 232pp, appendices, references
Available for checkout
Abstract: The composition of the work force is changing; it is shrinking and becoming more diverse. Managers must adapt to the changing environment and acquire the skills necessary to manage a team of diverse employees, particularly employees with disabilities. American companies can no longer afford to exclude the unique talent of people with disabilities. By the year 2000, these companies may face a shortage of technical and business-trained individuals. People with disabilities complement a company’s work force and improve its global competitiveness. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) became effective in July, 1992. This civil rights legislation is intended to remove employment barriers and facilitate the integration of people with disabilities into the work place. Unfortunately, the ADA’s ambiguous wording is creating apprehension among employers. The majority of employers are wary of the ADA’s impact on businesses and unaware of the benefits derived from employing people with disabilities. Experts believe that negative attitudes, myths, and misconceptions prevent the full integration of people with disabilities into the work environment. The contemporary nature of this topic resulted in conducting a significant amount of primary research. An integral part of the research involved interviewing able-bodied employees and employees with disabilities from manufacturing and service industries across the United States. The comprehensiveness of this thesis is attributed to the design and development of the Organizational Environment Test Instrument (OETI). The OETI was used to determine if an attitudinal differential exists between able-bodied employees and employees with disabilities toward nine environmental attributes. These attributes include commitment, acceptance, comfort level, awareness/sensitivity training needs, supportiveness, openness in communications, the existence of attitudinal barriers, perception of the ADA, and level of contributions from people with disabilities. Primary research is complemented by a wealth of secondary research. Resource materials located through OCLC, WISCAT, Compendex, Internet, Newsbank, and Wilson-Disk support this thesis. Analysis of the data from the OETI reveals that a statistically significant difference exists between the attitudes and perceptions held by able-bodied employees and employees with disabilities toward the work environment. This difference impedes the integration of people with disabilities. Research concludes that employing people with disabilities has no detrimental effect on companies’ insurance premiums, productivity, product quality, attendance, safety, or turnover rates. In fact, after hiring people with disabilities, companies experience increased market share, strengthened work ethic, societal benefits, improved customer relations, and elevated corporate image. The ADA will not be totally effective as long as attitudinal differentials remain between able-bodied employees and employees with disabilities. Proactive managers with a vision recognize this fact and develop strategies to promote the integration of people with disabilities. Sensitivity training, strategic alliances, top management commitment, disability mission statements, and the development of partnership relations are effective strategies in the integration process.

Stumpe, Jeff “Effective Customer Satisfaction Strategies”

May 14, 1991, 64pp, bibliography, tables
Available for checkout
Abstract: The pursuit of customer satisfaction is rapidly becoming the business objective of the 90’s. The activity is a natural extension of the quality movement of the 80’s. Today’s business success hinges upon getting and keeping customers using cost efficient methods to remain competitive in what has become a global economy. Companies that sell and service their manufactured products through independent distributors or manufacturer’s representatives are removed by at least one step from the ultimate customer or user. This presents a challenge to that business to develop effective strategies to achieve and maintain customer satisfaction, as virtually all contact between producer and consumer is highly filtered. This thesis will examine that area of customer satisfaction pertaining to product performance and supplier relations concerning after sale service. The study will be limited to industrial manufacturing companies supplying capital goods to other businesses through distribution organizations which are responsible for sale and service of those goods. An examination of current literature to include major texts and articles appearing in business publications will be undertaken. In addition, a number of companies meeting the above criteria will be comprehensively surveyed or interviewed. The focus of these two information searches will be to determine what companies are doing to achieve customer satisfaction in the subject area and their relative levels of success. In conclusion, an overall plan will be developed based on the findings above which upon its implementation will assure customer satisfaction and measurable business success. Industrial manufacturing companies that sell and service their products through independent dealers/representatives face a unique challenge in assuring customer satisfaction. Strategies must be formulated which address the satisfaction needs of all customers in the chain, typically the dealer/representative and the ultimate end user. Determination of those satisfaction needs and knowing when they are met must be extracted from the highly filtered contact between producer and consumer. Companies that unravel this complex relationship and formulate the appropriate customer satisfaction strategies enjoy business growth and success.

Suntareja, Renus “Analysis of the Leveraged Buyouts and the Case Study of RJR Nabisco”

Nov. 1996, 172pp, references, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: The Leveraged Buyout (LBO) became one of the most popular corporate restructuring techniques of the 1980’s. Many entrepreneurs and corporate managers want to own their own corporation and control their own destiny. However, most do not have the personal resources to achieve this goal in a short period of time. The LBO became a vehicle ideally suited to then current circumstances to enable many to achieve their desire for corporate ownership or control as well as personal wealth beyond conventional dreams. The LBO also came into existence because the timing was right. A dissatisfaction with ordinary returns on investment, a desire for personal ownership by short-cut methods, a tax structure that allowed assets to be written off against current earnings, interest payments that could also be written off against current earnings and the existence of a small group of investment brokers who saw an opportunity to take advantage of all these circumstances to make large sums of money for themselves and for their clients. Thus, the LBO was created. An LBO is a highly leveraged buy-out of an existing company by an investment group. Because of the high degree of leverage it is also an investment with a much higher degree of risk than commercially acceptable. The investment group consists of an investment banking institution, an array of different types of investors with different tolerances for risk and an ownership group consisting of the existing management of the corporation, an outside management team, public investors or the employees of the company or some mix of all these different groups. The two essential players are the group that can raise the usually very large sums of capital needed to buy the corporation and the management team that can run the acquired corporation more effectively than it has been run in the past. The premise of the LBO is that the price paid today will be paid for within a relatively short period of time – five to ten years – by the subsequent sale of the corporation at a much higher price, after allowing for inflation. This will enable the original borrowing to be repaid and the owners left with a substantial capital appreciation. A further premise is that the performance of the target corporation will be improved after acquisition by new management, better motivation of management and by the introduction of productivity techniques. The new performance levels will generate, it is assumed, significantly higher profits than before which will service the higher debt load of the acquired corporation. The requirements of the ideal target corporation are a multi-million dollar return potential, a market leader or similar sized company in a stable rather than a cyclical industry and with low requirements for expensive R & D efforts or advertising. The ideal target should have unpledged assets or a low debt structure. Excess assets not needed for operations are also useful since they can be sold to raise immediate cash. Lastly, there should be a good management team available either internally or from outside. Theories that have been used to explain the LBO process include Asymmetric Information and Underpricing, Agency Cost and Free Cash Flow, Tax Code Incentives, Inefficient Management and Increased Efficiency and Performance. Also important in explaining the reason for the success of the LBO are greater motivation of management, the economies of operating as a private company and the common interests of stockholders and management. Because an LBO usually involves a public corporation and typically a larger rather than a smaller one, they are highly visible. The economic impact of an LBO is therefore, more public and frequently involves plant closings and employee layoffs. All of this generates much publicity which more often than not – especially in the early days – is negative because the benefits only come at the end of the buy-out process, the liabilities occur at the start. For all of these reasons LBOs have attracted much attention. This has related as much to their social impact as to their commercial impact. The beneficial effects of the LBO are greater productivity from the capital investment, a higher return on the capital employed and an increase in market value of the corporation concerned. It is not always a case of universal profit. There are also losses. Some employment may be permanently lost, communities may lose a local employer, bondholders often lose much of their investment while other classes of investors are gaining. The biggest problem may be that not every LBO has been successfully executed. The failures are an economic cost to the economy. They also represent a shifting of capital and earnings from one investor to another under conditions of excessive risk. The research as to the effects of an LBO on the corporation are summarized. R&D does not in practice appear to be cut as is often predicted by critics of LBOs. Taxes collected are often reduced during the period when higher amounts of interest are being paid although taxes will typically be higher after the LBO borrowing have been repaid. So in the long run tax returns might be higher. An analysis of the RJR Nabisco case is given as an illustration of how this type of financial deal is structured. This was the most highly publicized LBO of the decade and possible the most controversial. The problems met, the mistakes made and the results are set out towards the end of the Thesis. In conclusion, the thesis summarizes that the controversy surrounding the LBO technique is not always founded on facts. The LBO often produces gains for investors and that these are not always just transfers of wealth from either other types of investors or taxpayers in general. It shows that LBOs create wealth through improvement in operating performance and utilization of assets. The role of management is significant as a key instrument in the process through financial involvement leading to high motivation. The RJR Nabisco case indicates the LBO process. It shows that the LBO would have been much more successful had it not been for mistakes made during the bargaining process by the competitive bidding teams and the shareholders interests. Lack of experience in negotiating a deal of this complexity was instrumental to the lack of total success.

Szep, Richard J. “The Divided Policy: A Source of Capital”

June 1972, 32pp
Archival copy only

Szesterniak, Peter “A Study of U.S. R&D Organizations, Financing, Alternatives and Strategies Relative to Future Performance”

Jan. 1984, 152pp
Archival copy only

Taft, Daniel L. “Establishing and Maintaining Production Standards”

Nov. 29, 1982, 43pp
Archival copy only

Taychargumpoo, Charnvit. “Econometrics for Management”

April 1976, 112pp
Archival copy only

Teddy, Roger A. “Management: The Initial Assignment”

May 1985, 62pp
Archival copy only

Teresinski, Ronald Louis “Personal Sales Promotion- An Application of this Marketing Function to a Truck Product”

May 1973, 54pp
Archival copy only

Tesch, Hugo W. “Project Management for a Small Company”

Dec. 1971, 29pp
Archival copy only

Tesker, Kathleen M. “Reward-Punishment Motivation”

May 1977, 36pp
Archival copy only

Tessenske, Dean James “Reliability Study”

April 1983, 38pp
Archival copy only

Theis, Scott “Motivation Cause and Effect”

May 15, 1979, 39pp
Archival copy only

Thiry, Ron “Improving Maintenance Effectiveness by Implementing the Right Performance Measures”

Feb. 19, 1998, 119pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: This project is built upon the proposition that a maintenance organization can achieve greater effectiveness by replacing its traditional cost-based measurement system with one that incorporates financial, customer, internal process and growth/learning perspectives. While the project concentrates on a specific operation, knowledge gained from this application may be applied to other organizations with similarly high levels of capital intensity and operations trying to facilitate increased levels of employee involvement. Research was conducted in the areas of measurement systems, employee empowerment and maintenance management to substantiate the proposition. Five essential characteristics of an effective measurement system were gleaned from the literature. After comparison with cost-based measures and Open Book Management, the Balance Scorecard was selected as the foundation upon which to build the new measurement system for the Wisconsin Tissue Menasha Product Supply Maintenance Organization. Since this application is significantly different than the Balanced Scorecard examples presented in the literature, the building process was modified to better fit this situation. To meditate the potential implementation obstacles, the Situational Leadership II change model was used to guide the implementation process. Early results indicate that maintenance costs have been reduced by approximately $400,000 over the first four months. The maintenance craftspeople have also shown greater interest in becoming involved in group problem solving efforts. Both observations are strong indicators that the maintenance scorecard may be having a positive impact. The process of building a scorecard for the Wisconsin Tissue Menasha Product Supply Maintenance Organization revealed several valuable learnings that could be applied to other organizations. Measures must be aligned with the desired outcomes but also support the desired work environment in order to sustain a change effort. Also, five characteristics of an effective measurement system were identified to access current or potential measures. This project illustrates how the Balanced Scorecard concepts may be applied at a departmental level without the need to wait for higher level scorecards to be implemented. Finally, what is measured and how things are measured have significant psychological impacts upon employees. Human responses must be considered whenever measurement system changes are being considered. Overall, the project has successfully demonstrated that applying the right measurement system can have a positive impact on improving the performance of a maintenance organization. In the process of proving that point, several additional measurement system considerations have been discovered.

Thompson, Richard Donald “Solving the Administrative (vs) Technical Career Path Dilemma”

May 1991, 91pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Today’s men and women should not think about a “job”; rather, their concern should center about the concept of a “career”. The word career emphasizes concern for a long-range commitment to a profession which will provide self-satisfaction as well as filling the material needs of life. To this end, individuals must take the responsibility to direct their own careers. To be happy and productive people must choose the career path that is best for them. Get to know yourself, then choose the profession that fits you; do not take a job then try to adapt to it. This essay presents a special way of organizing and interpreting information about careers for easier comprehension and practical application. It is aimed toward those who are not happy with their present position and who want to change their situation. Corrective actions for this will be indicated by the use of tests to help determine whether the problem lies with themselves, their job, or their career. On the other hand, this paper deals only with the choice between technical or administrative oriented career paths for engineers and administrators up to middle managers. It is not intended to select the field of endeavor, but it is intended to help discover who you are so the correct path of the above two choices will be taken. This career choice dilemma usually develops after ten years of work experience when the person is between 30 and 39 years of age. These are the years of development during which a person’s education and experience are merged. If you are a practicing engineer, you probably have not done much hard thinking about your career. You may believe that your career progress will essentially take care of itself or you may want to consult an expert in career planning, but never get around to doing it. The bad news about your position is that, if you don’t change it, your career will likely be set back considerably. To appreciate the value of career planning, ask yourself how many jobs you have had. Five: Ten? Did those job changes happen to you, or did you decide what you wanted and go after it? You will probably change jobs as many times in the future as you did in the past. The important thing is to plan the changes. The more prepared you are, and the more specific your desires are, the more likely you are to get what you want. The basic goal of career planning is to help you to reach your fullest potential in the shortest time, whether you intend to stay in your technical specialty or branch out into management. To accomplish this, a series of exercises is offered that are designed to uncover and assess your powers and limitations. This paper will help to clarify career aspirations, determine your skills and set realistic career goals. Effective career matching suggests that a person first understand the structure of the occupational world, what is required to enter, survive, and advance in it, and how it impacts each person. Second, a person must develop an accurate, objective self-understanding including abilities, ambitions, interests, motivations, and needs, and relate these personal attributes to the characteristics essential to success in various occupations. Then, through the use of logical decision-making procedures, appropriate career choices and plans can be made and implemented. You have an obligation to yourself to find out what is right for you. The field you are working in should challenge your abilities and spark your imagination. A job which doesn’t engage your strengths or which is more demanding of your weak points than your strong points is not likely to keep you interested for long and is a road block to career path development.

Tillotson, Francis E. “Computer Aided Design of Electronic Systems”

May 1972, 20pp
Archival copy only

Timmer, William J. “Computer: What is it?”

Aug, 15, 1970, 80pp
Archival copy only

Tongqing, Chen. “Project Management of Construction Claims Under FIDIC Conditions of Contract”

Oct. 1996, 168pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: With the globalization of today’s construction industry and the dynamics of the rapidly growing international construction market, the domestic centric marketing strategy is no longer appropriate for a player in this industry to maintain its long term profitability. However, international construction projects are an extremely risky undertaking, especially in a turbulent business environment of the third world countries. A thorough comprehension of its inherent risks and the management thereof is therefore vital and often the single most challenging task for an active contractor in this market. The International Federation of Consulting Engineers Standard Form of Contract and Conditions of Contract for Civil Engineering work, or FIDIC Conditions of Contract, is the de facto standard for regulating the majority of these projects and is endorsed by all international development institutions and financial agencies. By covering the FIDIC contractual allocation of the risks and the project management process thereof, this paper attempts to provide the guidelines and various tools for the project management of claims for any potential risks with an international construction project under the FIDIC Conditions of Contract. This paper first discusses various categories of the claims commonly encountered by an international contractor and their general ruling principles, including justification of a claim, extra costs and prolongation claim, compensation and concurrence of a prolongation, and critical vs. float path delays. It discusses further the detailed FIDIC allocation of various risks and the contractual relationships of parties involved. The management of these risks are then incorporated into the project management process to provide effective strategies, monitor risk and remedy the system. Various guidelines are provided, including the FIDIC notification and submission procedures of claims for risks, the system for data collection and documentation, negotiation strategies, and the roles of Critical Path Method Network (CPM network). The impacts of any eventuated risks are evaluated in terms of claims for extension of time and financial losses. These include damage evaluation based on the actual records and the contractor’s tender strategies. Various guidelines for financial evaluation based on the actual records and the contractor’s tender strategies. Various guidelines for financial evaluation are provided in terms of the prolongation and disruption time-related costs, uncovered escalation costs, its exchange rate fluctuation risk, and new present value analysis (NPVA) of financial investment and cost. Some useful strategies and tools are discussed and recommended for efficient and effective management of claims, including resolution through the FIDIC project management process, variation orders, settlement financing, claim/interest tradeoffs and project cost control cycle (PCCC) for monitoring, managing and most important of all, preventing the potential risks. As an introduction, this paper provides a background of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract and discusses the roles of the parties involved and the general legal ruling principles. Most of the examples in this paper are extracted from actual construction claim cases and condensed and simplified for the purpose of illustration.

Torzala, Robert J., P.E. “It is Difficult to Structure a Concept Through Market Methodology for Low Volume Resources Intensive Products”

Oct. 1996, 152pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Current literature focuses on product development methodologies for mass produced and one time build product types. Very little literature focuses on product types that are not in the category of the above two classifications. A product that has a low annual volume and is capital intensive has similarities to both mass produced and one time build products. It also has unique characteristics different from either of the fore mentioned. As a result, defining an appropriate development program that addresses the unique characteristics of a low volume resource intensive (LVRI) product is difficult. The scope of this thesis is to propose and evaluate concept through market methodologies for LVRI products. The thesis begins with a study of the concept through market methodologies employed for high volume (HV) and one time build (OTB) products. Assuming that a methodology spectrum exists with the HV and OTB methods at opposite ends, potential methodologies for LVRI products are formulated and financially analyzed. The study of the HV and OTB methodologies involves modeling concept through market methodologies typical for these product and market types. The models are structured and formatted around similar incremental phases and stages. After modeling the methodologies, the corresponding products’ attributes and market attributes are identified and correlated against the phases within the models. Also, the investment philosophies for each of the two product types are reviewed for correlation to the methodology models. In addition to correlating against the incremental phases, the attributes are correlated against the intensity of each incremental phase. The study continues by analyzing the product and market attributes of a generic LVRI product typical for the surface mining industry. Utilizing the identified correlations between methodology phases and intensity against product attributes, market attributes, and investment philosophies, two potential methodology models are proposed for a LVRI product. Each model is based on the correlated attributes identified in the HV and OTB methodology study, but the models differ in investment philosophies. One model pursues a market share, or long term, investment philosophy. The second model pursues a cash flow, or short term, investment philosophy. The final part of the study evaluates the financial feasibility and performance of the two LVRI models. The models are formulated on assumptions typical for the mining industry. The financial models include projections for the market shares, margins, investments, expenses, costs, working capital, and program lives to establish annual cash flows. The evaluation includes sensitivity analyses of twelve model factors to assess the ramifications of both varied resource allocations and the base assumptions. The models are compared on the basis of internal rate of returns (IRR), present worths, and break-even points. The evaluation indicated that the market share strategy was more likely to yield a higher IRR than the cash flow strategy and less likely to yield a negative IRR. This study indicates that a market share strategy is the pursuable concept through market methodology for a LVRI product, assuming an organization’s mission is to be profitable, competitive, and endure over time.

Tso, Peter “Use of Employee Attitude Survey to Improve Management-Employee Relationships”

Nov. 1984, 43pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: This paper presents an overview of the use of employee attitude surveys to increase job satisfaction and to improve management-employee relationships. It has been noticed that employee attitudes can affect the work force and productivity. In order for management to maintain an organization with positive employee attitudes, it must have an accurate perception of the employee’s feelings of the organization and its policies. Employee attitude survey is a management tool designed to measure how employees really feel about the organization. Not all employee surveys are successful. Most of them fail because of false assumptions held by the survey administrators or the survey administrators do not follow guidelines of good survey programs. When the survey is carefully and thoughtfully designed and conducted, it can provide important benefits for the organization, such as increased productivity, improved management-employee relationship and increased job satisfactions. An “Eight-step attitude survey program” has been recommended. The steps are: • Purpose of survey; • Initial preparations; • Task Force formation; • Survey questionnaire design; • Administration; • Interpreting survey results; • Feedback discussion; and • Support for action. When properly administered, employee surveys provide much useful information. They can increase employees’ sense of value to the organization from the participation and involvement. Furthermore, surveys can engage and develop employees’ problem solving capabilities and, most of all, the relationship between management and employees can be improved. With the help of employee surveys and effective management of human resources, America may one day beat Japanese productivity rates and regain its position as an industrial leader of the world.

Tulbah, Omar M. “Managerial Decisions Under Uncertainty in Construction Projects”

Aug, 15, 1970, 80pp
Archival copy only

Ubom, Emmanuel E. “Evaluation of Techniques of Personnel Selection in Nigerian Oil Marketing Companies”

May 1986, 64pp
Archival copy only

Udell, James G. “The Effect of Involute Error on Gear Pump Noise”

July 1971, 66pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Unangst, Paul H. “Development of a Management Philosophy”

July 1971, 66pp, appendices
Archival copy only

Undeger, Rafet Volkan “Foreign Direct Investments and Their Effects on Turkish Economy”

June 1995, 114pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: During last two decades, the world has experienced what is called the “globalization” trend. Currently, more and more companies around the world engage in business activities in other countries and in international markets. Competition intensifies as the number of companies emerge in business. For existing companies, lowering costs, increasing market share, and globalizing become competitive tools. This is where Foreign Direct Investment (F.D.I.) comes in play as a way to increase comparative advantage and to increase business potentials for each company. In contrast to what some believe, F.D.I. has become a major factor and fact of life for every single country in the world. In this thesis, Foreign Direct Investment’s effects on Turkish economy are explored. However, rather than solely concentrating on this subject upfront, the following format is followed throughout the thesis: Chapters one and two provide a background of F.D.I.; it is defined, major F.D.I. theories and its advantages are explained. Chapter three provides data to determine F.D.I. patterns around the world. This is required to recognize opportunities for the Turkish model. Chapter four, the main part of the thesis, provides background information and explains the historical development of F.D.I. in Turkey. The author provides interpretation and explanation as a result of intimacy with the subject, the country and the culture. In following sections of this chapter, incentives provided by Turkey and F.D.I.’s effects on Turkey in integrating with EEC (European Economic Community) are explored and explained. An important section of this chapter is a survey of Turkish middle and upper level managers to find out the general perception of Turkish people of F.D.I. in Turkey. Chapter five provides a conclusion that is developed throughout the thesis. Throughout the thesis, F.D.I. is explored considering developing countries, since Turkey is a major country in this category.

Ungemach, Robert “High Growth Companies: Managing in an Environment of Rapid Change”

Dec. 1992, 107pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Managing a business in an environment of change is a challenge faced by all companies. In our society it is almost impossible to be isolated from change in one form or another. Businesses are challenged with the constant process of adaptation to changing conditions, and the striving for growth. Some executives have managed their companies well in these uncertain times, resulting in rapid growth for sustained periods of time. Rapid growth manufacturing firms are the focus of this investigation into the management techniques which these firms consider to be essential for their success. In this research, the term “high growth” is used to refer to companies which have grown at a rate of over 25% per year for at least a 5 year period. Six high growth companies were identified and investigated in order to identify management techniques which the companies felt were important factors in allowing them to grow and prosper in an environment of change. The results of this investigation were also examined to determine whether the identified characteristics or techniques existed in the majority of the six high growth firms involved in this study. The identified characteristics or techniques were grouped into subject areas. These areas were business planning, teamwork, human resources, productivity, facilities planning, product development, quality, market research, and company culture. The practices of the high growth companies in each of these areas are discussed and compared with examples of management theory published within the last five years. In this research, the subject of “attitude toward failure” was identified as a key characteristic common to all of the investigated high growth companies. The investigation of current management theory did not reveal a great deal of material on this subject.

Uradnicek, Robert “Project Evaluation”

Dec. 1972, 37pp
Archival copy only

Urbassik, Michael A. “Brake Product Line Product Audit”

Jan. 1981, 71pp
Archival copy only

Van Da Huvel, Kelly “A Prerequisite to a Corporation Reorganization”

Sept. 14, 1998, 120pp, appendix, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: During the past twenty years, management has had difficulty in determining how their corporations were to operate and function. Organizational structure design was questioned. Team management and empowerment evolved. Other modifications to structural design and application occurred. Management’s ideology toward strategic planning also changed. At the end of the 1970’s it appeared non-existent. By the mid-1990’s strategic planning and the need to maintain a strong understanding of the internal and external business environments were the norm. During this short period of time when the use of strategic audits were set aside and trend model buzzwords were the rage, corporate America suffered. Management had become complacent; the need for executive and business foresight seemed to disappear. Lack of understanding what was occurring not only in the United States marketplace but also the global marketplace cost some companies dearly. Knowing the strength and weaknesses of the corporate assets was essential. Understanding what internal conditions were detrimental to the company was crucial. Utilizing the corporate strengths to ward off any external threats was vital. Having a strategic audit in hand or to be performed would be the definitive management tool to have. This would allow top management to appraise the strategies needed to block any external threat while aggressively pursuing any viable opportunity. Alternative strategy components could be tested with results measured and quantified. Having a strategic audit outline with the answers to the questions is the ultimate management tool. It allows for all other models, theories and ideologies to be tested or implemented. It provides for the alternate questions and answers to the “What If” questions. A directional guide is presented to management on their path to achieving the corporate goals and objectives.

Van Houten, Crispin “An Evaluation of the Effect on Industry of the PCB Regulatory Situation and a Discussion of Management Options”

May 1987, 65pp, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: Polychlorinated biphenals (PCB’s) are a liquid which was used extensively in the period up to about 1976 as a dielectric in industrial transformers, capacitors, and other types of electrical equipment. Although some of its properties made it very effective for this purpose, other characteristics were deemed to pose a threat to human health and the environment. In 1976 the EPA began to impose strict rules on these substances regarding their continued use, mandating removal in some applications, and also setting up comprehensive regulations for their removal, and disposal. Since that time it has been found that the by-products of the incomplete combustion of PCB’s which may be produced in a fire pose an even greater hazard than the material itself. This situation has led to ever increasing regulatory attention and has placed a huge economic burden on industry which may be faced with expensive control measures, and possibly even more expensive, and disruptive clean up costs in the event of an accident involving these materials. This paper will review some of the technical information about PCB’s, including some of the experimental evidence that has led to their classification as a hazardous material. The regulations that have been developed as a result of these findings will be reviewed, and the impact on industry will be discussed by means of summarizing some recent incidents and their costs. Finally some alternatives will be proposed showing some of the choices available to manage the problem, and examples of how industries have dealt with their situations including two cases at General Electric Medical Systems will be presented.

Van Norman, Drew (see Kaufman, Brian)


Vanasse, William L., Jr. “A Comparison of Managerial Styles Based on Age Groupings: An Examination of Why Certain Groups May Act the Way They Do”

May 1979, 107pp
Archival copy only

Vanden Heuvel, Tammy J. “How to Successfully Integrate the Internet into the Marketing Program”

Aug. 1997, 141pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The following thesis will give a brief history of the Internet and the different tools that are available on it. This includes a description of gopher sites, ftp, USENET, and the World Wide Web. It also looks at who uses the Internet and what for. It then looks more into detail at how businesses use the Internet and the World Wide Web for marketing purposes. Businesses that use the Internet, and more specifically, the World Wide Web for marketing must realize that to successfully develop the Web site, the company as a whole needs to be involved. It’s like a community raising a child. Explained will be the different departments that can be involved in the process and ideas of what they can contribute to the development of the Web site. The company must also look at the resources needed to develop the Web site. Does the company have the expertise and tools available in house, or do they need to look externally for sources? Some of the tools needed will be discussed and the reason for the need. Once the company as a whole determines what is important and should be included on the Web site, the development process can begin. There are different types of media content that can be used to develop the Web site. This thesis will look at the different types of media content; including e-mail, text only, graphics, multimedia, etc., and explain how each can be used effectively as a marketing tool on the Web site. Examples of successful sites are included. The next step in the process after determining the media content is to actually design and develop the site. This thesis will then look at how the pages should be set up, how long the pages should be, and how to effectively organize them. What kind of graphics to use, how to use them and how links should be used are included with examples. After developing the Web site, it must be promoted. Companies can promote the Web site through methods that are internal to the company or through methods that are external to the company. Internal methods would include brochures, business cards, e-mail signatures, letterhead, or stationery. External methods include media ads, print ads, sponsoring web sites, or web banners. It is important that the company include the Web site address and/or e-mail address on everything that goes out of the door. The thesis will conclude with a survey that was administered to companies that have Web sites. It proves that: 1. Companies are starting to see an increase in sales from using the Web as a marketing tool. 2. Companies use more than MIS and marketing to design Web pages. 3. Companies use multiple formats to advertise the Web site. Finally, recommendations and conclusions are given as to tools that are in development and should be watched. It also ends by recommending that companies that currently do not use the Web as a marketing tool should start. The process of how a champion can create a Web based marketing program within the company is explained.

Vanderbrook, Donald C. “Risk Analysis Techniques: Acceptance and Effectiveness in Strategic Capital Investment Decisions”

Sept. 2001, 246pp, bibliography, appendices
Available for checkout
Abstract: The ability of business to predict the long-term impact of capital investment decisions from both a tactical and strategic initiative has become a necessity. No longer can intuitiveness or basic measures such as simple payback be the only tools for leaders of typical businesses that are engaged in manufacturing, service or other for profit venture to chart the direction of their companies. Accurately determining the risk in a capital venture is paramount in the overall performance and ultimate growth or decline of a business. The lack of sound understanding and means to assess risk in long-term business decisions can lead to poor, or even catastrophic financial performance. There is a need to utilize a more sophisticated approach to judge the worth and ultimate risk of both investment and resource allocation decisions in today’s fast-paced, capital-intensive business world. Risk can consistently be minimized by utilizing financial techniques as a crosscheck to short term payback analysis and judgmental modes of capital allocation and project selection. However, can it be done in a way that is a generally accepted method, and useful to the general business community? The mission of this work is addressing the acceptability and effectiveness of advanced risk analysis in capital investment decisions as follows: [1] To investigate and summarize the basic methods for assessing financial risk in capital investment decisions as well as exploring new or alternative methods that are advanced in their application; [2] Adapt and enhance existing risk analysis techniques to broaden the scope or use by demonstration of a working simulation model developed by the writer that is useful in making sound decisions throughout the various phases of a capital investment project. Compare the model to commercially available risk simulation software packages for ease of use, accuracy and interpretation; [3] Determine the state of acceptance of risk analysis techniques in typical nonfinancial based businesses by means of a survey polling commercial business decision makers from companies that are not engaged in financial analysis, business development or consulting as their primary business; [4] Compare and correlate survey results which indicate that there is still a high reliance on traditional cost/benefit techniques such as simple payback analysis in support of the thesis: “Advanced risk analysis techniques are not consistently applied due to the perception of difficulty encountered in applying these techniques to capital investment decisions, and the lack of user friendly simulation packages that allow the generalist to determine viability of an investment decision based on risk.” The survey conducted for this project indicates that there is strong opinion (75%) that using computer risk analysis simulation can assist in minimizing capital investment risk, however, there is little actual usage of such techniques, as only 5.8 percent of survey respondents indicate utilization of risk simulation software. Additionally there is only a 5.56 percent improvement when advanced risk analysis techniques are utilized over traditional financial decision making methods. These factors indicate a real or perceived difficulty of use of such techniques, and no significant benefit over use of traditional methods. To improve the use and effectiveness of advanced risk analysis techniques in capital investment decisions, a simulation model developed by the writer known as the Multiple Technique Scenario Analysis (MTSA), which utilizes multiple analysis methods to validate results is compared to leading commercially available risk simulation software. Results indicate that MTSA model offers comparable accuracy of results to the commercial simulation software, while providing greater ease of use and speed of conducting the risk analysis.

Verish, Julie Lynn “Management Automation”

May 1992, 91pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: Project management defines the task of planning, monitoring and controlling the progress of a project. Projects today consist of a highly complicated mix of activities and disciplines. In order for a project manager to successfully manage a project of this nature, and make sure that the project is being worked on in the most efficient manner, it is essential that he use one of the many computer software packages especially designed for this purpose. This paper discusses manual methods of project management, including the critical path method, Gantt charts and PERT charts. The benefits of using these methods are examined, along with the shortcomings of each technique. The critical path method offers the project manager a clear indication of the crucial elements of a project, Gantt charts graphically express the time relationships between each activity, and the PERT chart is a simple graphical method which indicates activity relationships. When used independently, these project management tools are helpful, but do not give the project manager a complete picture of the status of his project. This paper also illustrates some of the features of computer management techniques such as automatically calculated critical path, resource leveling, PERT charts and bar charts. A detailed explanation of the advantages and disadvantages of using computer management techniques compared to manual methods follow. The advantages include the abilities to: manage large projects on a very detailed level, efficiently use available resources and collect historical data on projects to use for future estimates. A method to successfully implement computer management techniques in the workplace is also included. This method includes classroom and hands-on instruction followed by periodic one on one sessions with an expert on the system. The solution to some of the complicated problems facing today’s Project Managers can be found with the help of computer software. This powerful tool can save time and money and help assure a project which is on time and within budget.

Vogedes, Jerome “Revolutionizing Mobile Internet Business Strategies”

Dec. 19, 2003, 86pp, bibliography
Available for checkout
Abstract: This research report discusses two types of evolving and converging technologies that will have a significant impact on global business and commerce. These technologies are the Internet and wireless communications. The telecommunications industry has invested significant resources to facilitate the widespread adoption of mobile Internet solutions without substantial market penetration. In the opinion of many experts, this will soon change. M-Business (Mobile Business) solutions and applications are comprised of enterprise applications and consumer services. The research produced conclusions that the short-term m-Business solutions will focus on enterprise applications. Consumer applications, including content and commerce services, will also become important as technology evolves. Successful m-Business strategies have the opportunity to increase productivity, revenues, and marketing opportunities, while creating a competitive advantage for wireless manufacturers, mobile operators, and other companies looking to expand into the wireless domain. The research shows that understanding the needs of the end user, environment of the mobile user, display capabilities, data rate, and data entry limitations of today’s mobile Internet devices is important in enabling developers to design and implement compelling mobile solutions. For a solid m-Business strategy, rapidly changing technologies and standards must be considered by management. Organizations that have developed a sound m-Business strategy, that is consistent with these themes, will be well positioned to create a sustained competitive advantage and generate significant mobile and data services revenues.

Vorce, James J. “Organizational Behavior Management in Business and Industry”

Jan. 1989, 44pp
Available for checkout
Abstract: What is the dominant philosophy of American Management? Many feel it is the carrot-and-stick philosophy, reward and punishment (Levison, 1973). “Several theories of human motivation (Maslow, 1970; Herzberg, 1966; McGregor, 1966) have led to considerable laboratory research, many surveys of what workers say about their jobs and about management, and a few attempts to change management and work practices in hopes of influencing productivity. However, research has not generally established the validity or practical utility of these theories (Hopkins and Sears, 1982).” The problem is that most of these approaches do not use precise scientific measurement and observation (Davis, 1981). And if a structured method is developed, often managers lack the formal training to use the method effectively (Miller, 1978). Although the concepts have been around for nearly a century, it has only been within the last two decades that the principles of behavioral psychology and the methods of behavior modification have been applied to industry and business. This new approach is called Organizational Behavior Management (OBM). The purpose of this paper is to review current research and investigate the potential use of Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) in industry and business. The research paper will focus only on behavioral aspects of managing people within industry and business, specifically Organizational Behavior Management (OBM). Although it is understood that the use of only one model is impractical, only the OBM model will be discussed. Other models such as the Need, Equity, Goal, and Expectancy theory will not be covered.

Vroman, G. “Overcoming the Marketing Objective”

Nov. 1991
Missing

Wallace, A., Jr. “Simulated Management Experiences From Computerized Games”

Aug. 1975, 91pp
Archival copy only

Walters, Tim “Creating Knowledge Workers to Improve Competitive Success”

Jan. 2002, 119pp, bibliography, appendix
Available for checkout
Abstract: The business world of today is rapidly changing. These changes are being brought about by various factors. Globalization of the economy, technological advancements, and changing world demographics are just three of the many issues modern organizations must face. In order to deal with the changing environment, businesses must continually create and re-evaluate the policies and structure, which guide the organization. The following thesis makes the case that, one of the most important ingredients to competitive success is the quality of the human resources of the organization. The ability to learn, retain, and utilize knowledge is the reason the human resource is so valuable. Additionally, the thesis promotes the following idea: while the characteristics of the individual employees makes the difference between success and failure for the entire organization, the characteristics of the management is of greater importance. In order to create “knowledge workers”, organizations need “knowledge managers”. It is important to note; this analysis deals mostly with American or western culture. The ideas presented here may or may not readily apply to, or be accepted by, all cultures or the global community. Additionally, the focus of this work is creating and improving on existing conditions. No analysis has been made regarding maintenance of the condition once established.

Wass, Terrence H. “Making the leap from strategic objectives to tactical actions: a simple tactical planning and execution model for an internal business process”

Oct. 2009, 91pp, bibliography, glossary, figures
Available for checkout
Abstract: The purpose of this thesis is to describe the development of the Simple Tactical Planning and Execution Model (STPEM), as well as its application in an organization. The STPEM is a strategic management tool that can be applied to an internal business process in order to verify that the tactical actions and activities associated with the process are aligned with both the strategic objectives of the process, as well as those of the organization.

The STPEM is a useful strategic tool that seeks to overcome the gap that typically occurs in many organizations between strategic objectives and what employees actually do to meet those objectives. A typical strategic management process in an organization usually begins with the organization’s efforts to identify its mission, or fundamental purpose, and its vision, or where it needs to head. The strategic management process then goes on to feature an analysis of the external environment for opportunities to pursue and threats to defend against. An analysis of the internal environment for strengths and weaknesses of its processes compared to the competition is also undertaken. The selection then occurs of key opportunities and threats based on impact to the vision and effort to implement. Strategic objectives to address the key opportunities and threats are typically defined. Those objectives must then be defined to achieve those strategic objectives and to move the organization towards its vision.

With the typical strategic management process, there are a number of challenges encountered when defining and executing tactical actions. Employees do not fully understand the mission, vision, and strategic objectives of both an internal business process, as well as those of the organization. Action plans are often defined without input from the employees who are expected to complete those actions. The link between actions and strategic objectives is not clear. Action plans are not clearly stated. Action plans overload resources. Action plans are delegated without support. Conflicts arise between tactical actions and individual performance measures. Managers react improperly to performance measures, focusing on single observations in time rather than in relation to variability over time.

While tools such as Drucker’s management by objectives, the Kaplan and Norton Balanced Scorecard, and Hoshin Kanri address many (but not all) of these challenges, a gap still exists regarding an effective methodology for brainstorming, developing, and executing tactical actions for an internal business process.

This thesis employs a review of a wide range of management-related literature to leverage a number of concepts in the development of the STPEM. Concepts from the Kaplan and Norton Balanced Scorecard, statistical process control, Hoshin Kanri, Ishikawa Cause-and-Effect Diagram, Nickols and Ledgerwood Goals Grid, SMART actions, “vital few” and “useful many” pr